TOURER OWNER`S
TOURER OWNER’S
SERVICE AND WARRANTY HANDBOOK
INTRODUCTION
Thank you for deciding to buy one of our
new caravans.
We are sure you will enjoy many happy hours
in it and we hope the information and hints in
this handbook will heighten your enjoyment.
The handbook has been designed to give
you a general guide to the care, use and
maintenance of your caravan. Whether you
are a new or an experienced caravanner the
hints will help to protect your investment.
The information contained will answer most
of your queries, but if there are any aspects
which are not covered please consult your
appointed dealer. We would suggest you
make a note of your dealers name and
contact information below.
Throughout the season, specifications and
equipment details contained within this
handbook may change. Please refer to our
online handbooks (www.swiftgroup.co.uk)
for the most up-to-date version of your
handbook.
Customers should note that all caravans
are supplied with two handbooks, the
User Handbook which contains general
information for the use and care of your
product and the Technical Handbook, which
contains technical information, weights and
dimensions of your product.
Dealer Name:
First Service Due:
Telephone Number:
Dealer Contact Sales:
E-mail:
Dealer Contact Parts:
Serial Number:
Dealer Contact Service:
IN TRODUCT ION
Dear owner
1
CONT E N TS
SWIFT TALK
I chat on
SwiftTalk
Social Network for Caravan and Motorhome enthusiasts
www.swift-talk.co.uk
Swift Talk
Swift Talk is the central forum for the Swift
community online. A place for all those united
in their love of caravanning, motorhomes,
holiday homes and touring in general, to share
their experiences, meet new friends and find
out a world of information on how to enjoy
their touring lifestyle.
The site is packed full of features that actively
encourage members, not only to liaise with the
Swift Group via the forums, but also interact
with each other through publishing their own
content, uploading and sharing photos and
video, and even posting their own blogs for the
community to follow.
Swift Talk is the first place to learn about new
product launches, events and Swift Group
news, it’s also the first place customers can
go to as a quick reference to frequently asked
questions or to actively take part in the forums;
providing valuable feedback on Swift Group
products and customer service.
The online community can even be used to
create your own groups, perfect for Owners’
Clubs, dealers and exhibitors to attract new
2
members, publicise and build awareness
for upcoming events, rallies and shows.
Anyone who owns, uses, or is thinking of
buying a Swift Group caravan, motorhome
or holiday home, or would just like to be part
of the growing Swift community is actively
encouraged to sign up, create their own
content, and start talking!
Just visit www.swift-talk.co.uk
and become part of a unique
online experience.
CONTENTS
Towing code ............................................................................................................................ 13
Safety & security ....................................................................................................................... 37
Services ................................................................................................................................... 55
CO N T E NT S
Warranty ..................................................................................................................................... 5
Electrics .................................................................................................................................... 77
Fitted equipment ...................................................................................................................... 99
Maintenance ........................................................................................................................... 207
Useful information ................................................................................................................... 241
3
4
WARRANTY INFORMATION
Change of ownership...................................................................................................................8
What to do if you require assistance ........................................................................................... 8
Supplier contacts........................................................................................................................ 9
Touring caravans - annual service/inspection record ................................................................. 10
Annual service / inspection record stamps ................................................................................ 11
WA RRA NT Y INFORMAT ION
Warranty and guarantee cover .................................................................................................... 6
5
WA RRA NT Y INF ORMATIO N
WARRANTY
All the illustrations and descriptive matter in
this handbook are intended to give a general
idea of the caravan. Changing market and
supply situations and our policy of continuous
product development may prevent us from
maintaining the exact specifications detailed
in this handbook. We therefore reserve the
right to alter specifications as materials and
conditions demand.
Dealers are not agents of Swift Group Limited
("Swift") and have absolutely no authority
to bind the manufacturer by any express or
implied undertaking or representation.
Your caravan has three
warranties:
SuperSure Warranty
For all parts or fittings of your caravan other
than the body shell, Swift will repair (or at its
option, replace) any defective parts or fittings
for 3 years from the date of purchase (or hire
purchase) subject to conditions, terms and
exclusions below.
Body Shell Warranty
For the body shell, Swift will repair (or at its
option, replace) any defects with the body shell
for 6 years from the date of purchase (or hire
purchase), subject to the conditions, terms
and exclusions below.
Extended Body Shell Warranty
For the first owner, Swift will repair (or at its
option, replace) any defects with the body shell
for 10 years from the date of purchase (or hire
purchase), subject to the conditions, terms
and exclusions below.
Conditions
6
1. You must ensure that your caravan has
had an Annual Service (see clause 2 below)
within 90 days before or 60 days after each
anniversary of the original date of purchase.
In order to preserve your SuperSure
Warranty, the third Annual Service must
be carried out before the expiry of the 36
month period from the original date of
purchase. In order to preserve your Body
Shell Warranty, the sixth Annual Service
must be carried out before the expiry of
the 72 month period from the original date
of purchase. In order to preserve your
Extended Body Shell Warranty, the tenth
Annual Service must be carried out before
the expiry of the 120 month period from
the original date of purchase. If you have
not performed an Annual Service then Swift
will not be obliged to perform any work
under the applicable warranty. Original
VAT invoices must be retained as proof that
Annual Services have been carried out.
2. The Annual Service must be carried out in
accordance with the requirements in this
handbook. You will be responsible for
any charges made for an Annual Service.
If the Annual Service is performed by an
authorised Swift Group Service Centre then
Swift warrants that the Annual Service has
been performed correctly. If the Annual
Service is performed by an unauthorised
repairer or service centre then if the
Annual Service has not been performed in
accordance with the requirements in this
handbook and/or work has been performed
on your caravan that is defective or faulty,
then Swift will not be obliged to perform
any work under this Warranty (insofar as
it relates to defective or faulty work or
defective Annual Service).
3. All new caravans must be registered with
Swift within 6 weeks of purchase as new. 4. The benefit of the SuperSure Warranty and
Body Shell Warranty may be transferred
to a new owner if the caravan is re-sold,
provided that the caravan has been serviced
in accordance with the requirements of
this handbook, and details of the change
of ownership have been supplied to Swift
using the change of ownership form set out
in this handbook as soon as reasonably
practicable after the change.
5. The benefit of the Extended Body Shell
Warranty is non transferable to new owners
and applies only to the original registered
owner
6. If any repairs are identified as being
necessary during an Annual Service or
otherwise, Swift will only pay for Warranty
work performed by an authorised Swift
Group Service Centre. The caravan must
Exclusions
11.Swift shall not be liable under this Warranty
for any defect related to or arising from the
following:
• The failure of a component for reasons of
fair wear and tear;
7. The SuperSure Warranty, the Body Shell
Warranty and/or the Extended Body Shell
warranty only apply to caravans purchased
and used primarily within the UK.
• Damage resulting from freezing, fire, overheating or accidents (whether caused by
the user or a third party);
• Misuse of any component;
Terms
8. The Body Shell Warranty and Extended
Body Shell Warranty cover any defect with
the panels and seams of the caravan.
This includes body leaks, delamination of
panels or floor, water ingress through any
permanently sealed seam joints.
• Normal deterioration, corrosion, intrusion
of foreign or harmful bodies, lack of
servicing or negligence of any person
other than Swift which causes stoppage
of or impairment to the function of any
component of the caravan;
Note: Only jack up your caravan when it is
coupled up to the car with its handbrake
applied and in 1st gear (engine off).
• Replacement of parts which have reached
the end of their effective working life
because of age and/or usage;
• Cleaning or adjustment of any assemblies; • Cosmetic finishes to kitchen sinks, cooker
tops, vanity units, shower trays;
• Damage caused by any abrasive cleaners;
• Issues related to condensation in normal
use;
• Routine maintenance items which are
part of the annual service including brake
shoes, one shot nuts, lubricants, AKS
pads, rubber gas hose, the cleaning
of the heater and fridge flues, the
replacement of gas jets, the resealing and/
or replacement of shower room sealant,
and the adjustment and lubrication of
locks.
9. The SuperSure Warranty will cover in the
first 12 months any defect other than those
specified in the Exclusions below.
10. In years 2 and 3 of the SuperSure Warranty,
the Warranty will only cover any defect with
the following components:
• Water system, heater, fresh water tank,
water pump, water gauges, taps and
shower heads:
• Heating system and components;
• Main proprietary items (for example fridge,
toilet, cooker);
• Chassis and associated parts;
• Auxiliary electrics ; and
• Windows (excluding window furniture and
blinds).
In years 2 and 3 of the SuperSure Warranty, any
defect specified in the Exclusions will not be
covered.
WA RRA NT Y INFORMAT ION
be made available to an authorised Swift
Group Service Centre within 6 weeks of
the date the repair need was identified for
the work to be carried out. The cost of
transporting, towing or moving the caravan
by any means to or from the place of repair is
the responsibility of the owner.
12. In addition to the exclusions above, in years
2 and 3 of the SuperSure Warranty Period,
Swift Group Limited shall not be liable under
this Warranty for any defects related to:
• Caravan Alloy wheel (after 15 months from
date of purchase)
• Omni-vent roof-lights (after 24 months
from date of purchase)
• GRP sheet material (after 24 months from
date of purchase)
7
WA RRA NT Y INF ORMATIO N
ASSISTANCE
Swift shall also not be liable under the
SuperSure, Body Shell and Extended Body
Shell Warranties if the Caravan has been
neglected, misused, modified or use for
hire or reward or if the identification marks
(chassis/VIN numbers) have been removed or
defaced. The caravan will be deemed to have
been neglected if it has not been serviced
and maintained as stated in this handbook
or any repairs being identified as necessary
at an Annual Service or by a Swift Group
Service Centre have not been carried out in a
reasonable time.
You have legal rights under UK law
governing the sale of consumer goods.
These warranties do not affect your
legal rights.
The name and address of the warranty and
Guarantee provider is:
Swift Group Limited, Dunswell Road,
Cottingham, East Yorkshire, HU16 4JX. In the unusual event that a fault develops and
you need to claim under Body Shell Warranty
or the SuperSure Warranty, your first contact
should normally be made through the dealer
from whom the caravan was purchased. If
this is not feasible then a claim may be dealt
with by a different authorised Swift Group
Service Centre, please contact the Swift Group
Customer Service Department on 01482
875740 or enquiring on our website:
www.swiftgroup.co.uk directly for details.
Change of ownership
You can transfer the remainder of any 3 year
'Supersure warranty' and the 6 year 'body
shell' warranty, details of how to do this can
be found at the rear of this handbook.
The 'Extended Body Shell Warranty' is non
transferable.
8
What to do if you
require assistance
Congratulations on purchasing your new
caravan. We are confident that you will enjoy
many happy holidays. However, should you
have an enquiry or require assistance with a
problem, we hope that this guide will be of
assistance to you.
If you have a problem, or enquiry with
regards to your new caravan, please
follow these steps:
1. Check the Owners Handbook, paying
particular attention to the fault finding advice
at the back of the book.
2. Contact your supplying dealer
for assistance.
If you need to contact the Swift Group,
please be aware of the following:
1. When contacting Swift Customer Service,
please quote your name, postcode and
serial number of your caravan.
2. In most instances, the Customer Service
Team will involve your dealer in resolving the
issue you are experiencing.
3. Check our website www.swiftgroup.co.uk
and enter the Help and Advice section
which provides answers to frequently asked
questions and how to contact us.
4. If you are contacting the company by
email, letter or fax, the Customer Service
Team will respond to you within five
working days from the date of receiving the
correspondence.
5. If you are calling the Customer Service
Team, please avoid where possible,
Mondays and lunch times.
6. Please be aware that the Swift Group
cannot send parts direct from the factory.
In all cases, without exception, your dealer
must place the order for you.
SUPPLIER CONTACTS
A number of Swift Group suppliers manage their own Technical and Warranty related queries.
Where a customer has a question relating to a product manufactured by a company listed below,
we would advise that the first contact should be directly with them.
Sargent Electrical Services
Unit 39, Tokenspire Business Park, Beverley,
East Yorkshire, HU17 0TB
Phone: 01482 678981
Fax: 01482 678987
E-mail: [email protected]
AL-KO Kober Limited
WA RRA NT Y INFORMAT ION
Supplier contacts
South Warwickshire Business Park
Kineton Road, Southam,
Warwickshire, CV47 0AL
Fax: 01926 818562
Email: [email protected]
Truma UK Ltd.
Park lane, Dove Valley Park,
South Derbyshire, DE65 5BG
Phone: 01283 586020
Fax: 01283 586029
[email protected]
Thetford Ltd.
Unit 6, Brookfields Way, Manvers,
Dearne Valley, Rotherham,
South Yorkshire, S63 5DL
Phone - 0844 997 1960
Fax - 0844 997 1961
Email - [email protected]
Alde International (UK) Ltd
Huxley Close, Park Farm South,
Wellingborough, Northants, NN8 6AB
Phone: 01933 677765
Fax: 01933 674975
Email: [email protected]
Dometic (UK) Ltd
Dometic House, The Brewery,
Blandford St Mary, Dorset, DT11 9LS
Phone: 0844 626 0133
Email: [email protected]
9
WA RRA NT Y INF ORMATIO N
SERVICE INSPECTION
Touring caravans - annual
service/inspection record
1. Damp and lamination test.
In order to comply with the warranty, you must
have your caravan inspected and serviced at
least once per year.
3. Jockey wheel.
We highly recommend that you have your
Touring Caravan serviced by a Swift Group
Approved Service Centre who have direct
access to our online Customer Service
system, Connect. This system provides them
with the ability to order approved parts and
ensure that any product upgrades which may
be available for your Touring Caravan can
be offered to you and carried out as part of
the service. In the unfortunate event that an
issue requires attention under warranty then
a Swift Group Approved Service Centre are
able to submit a warranty claim to the Swift
Group for processing, and deal with the issue
for you from start to finish. All of our Swift
Group Approved Service Centres are provided
with up to date technical information and
have access to current repair methods giving
you peace of mind that any defect has been
repaired effectively.
It is important that the Owner’s Handbook
is stamped on the appropriate page by the
authorised Swift Group Service Centre. Failure
to do this will invalidate the warranty and the
transfer of the warranty on the change of
ownership.
The inspection should take approximately two
to four hours and will cover the areas dealt
with in the annual service check list. Any areas
requiring service and/or maintenance will be
highlighted by your dealer and we recommend
that you authorise any necessary work to be
carried out.
Note: It is essential, to validate the warranty,
that an annual inspection be carried out by
an authorised Swift Group Service Centre
covering the items listed.
10
2. Coupling head and breakaway cable.
4. Chassis and chassis to body security.
5.Corner steadies.
6.Tyres and tyre pressures.
7.Torque wheel nuts.
8.Brake rods and linkages.
9. Hub bearings, brakes and brake shoes.
10.Handbrake operation and performance.
11.Suspension and shock absorbers (if fitted).
12.13 pin plug and cables.
13.Road lights, wiring and reflectors.
14.Internal lights and 12V DC system.
15.Water heater - gas and 230V AC (if fitted).
16.Hob, grill and oven (if fitted).
17.Refrigerator 230V AC, 12V DC and gas.
18.Gas system.
19.Water pump, taps andwater system.
20.Mains 230V AC system.
21.Windows and fittings.
22.Smoke alarm and battery.
23.Roof lights.
24.Furniture hinges/stays etc.
25.Exterior locks and hinges.
26.Grab handle security.
27.All internal vents.
28.Oil seals.
29.Blinds and fly screens (if fitted).
30.Carbon Monoxide detector and battery
1st service
Date:
Caravan model:
Dealer’s Stamp
Year:
Chassis Number:
We certify that an annual service has been
carried out in accordance with the handbook.
2nd service
3rd service
Date:
Date:
Dealer’s Stamp
Dealer’s Stamp
We certify that an annual service has been
carried out in accordance with the handbook.
We certify that an annual service has been
carried out in accordance with the handbook.
4th service
5th service
Date:
Date:
Dealer’s Stamp
Dealer’s Stamp
We certify that an annual service has been
carried out in accordance with the handbook.
We certify that an annual service has been
carried out in accordance with the handbook.
6th service
7th service
Date:
Date:
Dealer’s Stamp
Dealer’s Stamp
We certify that an annual service has been
carried out in accordance with the handbook.
We certify that an annual service has been
carried out in accordance with the handbook.
WA RRA NT Y INFORMAT ION
Annual service / inspection record stamps
11
WA RRA NT Y INF ORMATIO N
SERVICE INSPECTION
12
8th service
9th service
Date:
Date:
Dealer’s Stamp
Dealer’s Stamp
We certify that an annual service has been
carried out in accordance with the handbook.
We certify that an annual service has been
carried out in accordance with the handbook.
10th service
11th service
Date:
Date:
Dealer’s Stamp
Dealer’s Stamp
We certify that an annual service has been
carried out in accordance with the handbook.
We certify that an annual service has been
carried out in accordance with the handbook.
12th service
13th service
Date:
Date:
Dealer’s Stamp
Dealer’s Stamp
We certify that an annual service has been
carried out in accordance with the handbook.
We certify that an annual service has been
carried out in accordance with the handbook.
14th service
15th service
Date:
Date:
Dealer’s Stamp
Dealer’s Stamp
We certify that an annual service has been
carried out in accordance with the handbook.
We certify that an annual service has been
carried out in accordance with the handbook.
TOWING CODE
Caravan terms ......................................................................................................................... 14
Towing vehicle terms ............................................................................................................... 16
Measurement of nose weight ................................................................................................... 16
Type of driving licence held ...................................................................................................... 17
TO W ING CODE
Caravan towing code ............................................................................................................... 14
Glossary & checklist ................................................................................................................ 17
Useful memory aid ................................................................................................................... 19
Preparing for the road .............................................................................................................. 20
Tyre Maintenance .................................................................................................................... 23
The Tyre Law ........................................................................................................................... 24
Hitching up for AK160.............................................................................................................. 24
Hitching up for AKS3004 stabiliser........................................................................................... 25
Pre tow check list .................................................................................................................... 26
13 Pin Socket .......................................................................................................................... 27
Towcar electrics....................................................................................................................... 28
Breakaway Cables ................................................................................................................... 29
Mirrors ..................................................................................................................................... 31
Moving off ............................................................................................................................... 31
Reversing ................................................................................................................................ 31
Speed limits ............................................................................................................................. 31
Caravan handling ..................................................................................................................... 32
Motorway driving ..................................................................................................................... 32
AL-KO spare wheel carrier tips ................................................................................................ 32
Changing a wheel .................................................................................................................... 33
Wheel Bolt tightening ............................................................................................................... 33
Jacking points ......................................................................................................................... 33
Stopping on a hill ..................................................................................................................... 34
Arrival on site ........................................................................................................................... 34
Exterior Door ........................................................................................................................... 35
13
T OW ING CO D E
TOWING CODE
Caravan towing code
This Code of Practice contains
recommendations jointly reviewed and
agreed by the following organisations:
The National Caravan Council
The Caravan Club
The Camping and Caravanning Club
The Caravan Writers Guild
The Department for Transport
Scope of the Code
The Code applies to all trailer caravans of
maximum laden weight not exceeding 3500 kg
(7,700 lbs), overall width not exceeding 2.3m
(7ft 6in approximately) and overall length not
exceeding 7m (23ft approximately), excluding
the drawbar and coupling.
This is legally the maximum size of trailer
that can be towed by a motor vehicle with a
maximum gross weight of less than 3500 kg.
Caravan terms
Mass in Running Order:
The mass of the caravan equipped to the
caravan manufacturer, standard specification.
The MRO includes an allowance for gas, the
electric hook up, cables as well as the fluids
and liquids required for the normal caravan
operation.
Note: The mass of the caravan in running
order contains provision for the masses
of liquids, gas etc. (see Mass in Running
Order in the Technical Handbook). Part
of this provision can also be utilised as
additional payload, if for example, you wish
to travel with no gas cylinders.
Maximum User Payload:
The maximum allowable weight to be put
into the caravan whilst it is being towed. This
is made up of the personal effects and the
optional equipment payloads.
The user payload is the difference between the
Maximum Technically Permissible Laden Mass
and the Mass in Running Order.
14
The Mass in Running Order + Personal Effects
+ Optional Epuipment = Maximum Technical
Permissible Mass or MRO + PE + OE =
MTPLM
Personal Effects
Those items which a user can choose to carry
in a caravan.
Note: The Personal effects payload includes
an allowance of 20kg for a leisure battery.
Optional Equipment
Items made available by the manufacturer over
and above the standard specification of the
caravan for factory fitted options.
Maximum Technically Permissible Laden
Mass (Lower Limit):
The fully laden mass of the caravan in the
manufacturers standard specification which
is stated in the publications, technical
handbooks, brochures and weight plate and
used for car matching.
Maximum Technically Permissible Mass
(Upper Limit):
The mass takes into account specific
operating conditions including factors such as
the strength of materials, loading capacity of
tyres, etc.
Payload Definition
The method of calculating the Mass in Running
Order (MRO) and user payload figures are in
line with European Vehicle Directives.
Allowances for essential equipment is
now contained within the MRO of the
caravan and include the following:
LPG 1 x BP Lite cylinder = 10kg
Fresh water in water heater = 8.5kg*
Toilet flush tank with 2 litres of fluid = 2kg
The MRO is calculated with the fresh water
tank empty.
*Weights are typical figures and are dependent
on specification.
(iii) Manufacturers letter confirming the upgrade
for that Vehicle Identification Number.
The leisure battery is considered to be
included in the personal effects and an
allowance of 20kg has been made for this.
Items fitted at the point of manufacturer (wheel
locks, hook-up cable, plastic steps, waste
containers, etc.) are included within the vehicle
MRO.
Nose weight:
The vertical weight transferred to the towing
vehicle through the coupling head.
Notes:
! WARNING: Under no circumstances
(i) When measuring the noseweight it is
important that the caravan is fully loaded.
Do not place extra items indiscriminately into
the caravan after this adjustment has been
made.
should the maximum technically permissible
laden mass (MTPLM) be exceeded.
Upgrading of maximum technically
permissible laden mass:
The lower (or standard) MTPLM is quoted in
the Technical Handbook, in brochures and on
the caravan weight plate. However, in some
cases it may be possible to increase this
to a higher (upper) MTPLM. (See Technical
Handbook for details).
(ii) The caravan is intended to be towed
slightly nose heavy. The nose weight can
be adjusted by distribution of the load
within the caravan. The nose weight
should be approximately 5%-7% of the
actual laden weight (but not greater than
the hitch capacity) and at the same time
suit the towing vehicle. See section on
Measurement of Nose Weight.
If extra user payload is required, an upgrade
maybe available (model dependant), this
must be requested via your dealer and is
chargeable.
If required you will be issued with the following:
(i) New weight plate giving upgrade weight
details.
Note: Tyre pressures may increase when
upgrading the MTPLM.
TO W ING CODE
(ii) New NCC certificate (declaring the
upgraded MTPLM)
Note: If you travel with water in the fresh
water tank, the payload will be reduced
accordingly.
(iii) It is not recommended that you tow with
just a battery, spare wheel and gas bottles
as this may exceed the permitted nose
weight. Additional payload must be placed
behind the axle to compensate for this.
YES
NO
85%
MAYBE
Equal
Fig. A Car/Caravan
weight ratios
15
T OW ING CO D E
TOWING VEHICLE TERMS
Towing vehicle terms
Measurement of nose weight
Kerb weight
(Mass of Vehicle in Running Order):
Nose weight may be measured using a
propriety brand of nose weight indicator.
Such equipment is obtainable at your
Caravan Dealer.
The weight of the towing vehicle as defined by
the vehicle manufacturer. This is normally with
a full tank of fuel, with an adequate supply of
liquids incidental to the vehicles propulsion,
without driver or passengers, without any load
except loose tools and equipment with which
the vehicle is normally provided and without
any towing bracket.
Caravan to Towing Vehicle Weight Ratio:
The towing vehicle to caravan weight ratio can
be determined by calculation and is equal to:
Actual laden weight of caravan
Kerb weight of towing vehicle
Note: These indicators have a varying
tolerance level and may not be accurate.
Another simple method is to use bathroom
scales under the coupling head with a piece of
wood, fitted between the coupling head and
the scales, of such length that the caravan
floor is horizontal with the jockey wheel raised
clear of the ground. (Fig. A)
x 100%
The law requires that caravans & their towing
vehicles & the loads they carry must be in
such a condition that no danger or nuisance
is caused.
LEVEL
430mm
±35mm
(Regulation 100 of the Road and Vehicles
[Construction and Use] Regulations 1986).
Note: The towing vehicle manufacturer’s
limit is, in some cases, less than the kerb
weight.
Mass in Running Order:
Caravanners can use a public weigh bridge to
establish the mass in running order.
Note: Weigh bridges have varying weight
tolerance levels.
Maximum Permissible Towing Mass:
The weight defined by the vehicle
manufacturer as being the maximum that the
vehicle is designed to tow at.
Train Weight (Combination Weight):
The maximum combined weight of the towing
vehicle and trailer combination as specified by
the towing vehicle manufacturer.
16
GROUND LINE
Fig. A Measuring nose weight
Nose weight can be adjusted simply by
distribution of weights in the caravan.
Always lower jockey wheel before entering
the caravan and then raise before measuring
again. (See Loading).
Note: The height of the towball on the
towing vehicle, when laden, is also critical.
! WARNING: Do not lift the coupling head
by hand when hitching the caravan to the
car. Always raise and lower the coupling
head by winding the handle on the jockey
wheel up and down.
GLOSSARY AND CHECKLIST
Glossary & checklist
In order to be able to tow a caravan a driver
must hold a Category B licence.
Awnings - Can consist of just a simple top
sheet but may extend to a five sided frame
tent attached to the side of the caravan.
If you passed your car test before 1 January
1997 you are generally entitled to drive a
vehicle and trailer combination up to 8.25
tonnes maximum authorised mass (MAM)
If you passed your driving test after 1 January
1997 and have an ordinary category B licence,
you can:
- Drive a vehicle up to 3.5 tonnes or 3,500kg
MAM towing a trailer of up to 750kg MAM
- Tow a trailer over 750kg MAM as long as it
is no more than the unladen weight of the
towing vehicle (with a combined weight of up
to 3,500kg in total)
From 19 January 2013, drivers passing a
category B licence can tow:
- Small trailers weighing no more than 750kg
- Trailers weighing more than 750kg, where the
combined weight of the towing vehicle and
the trailer is not more than 3,500kg MAM
If you want to tow a trailer weighing more
than 750kg, when the combined weight of
the towing vehicle and trailer is more than
3,500kg, you will need to pass a further test to
obtain a B+E category licence.
Fire blanket - approved to BS 6575 is ideal
for dealing with ‘fat pan’ fires.
TO W ING CODE
Driving licence
Fire extinguisher - It is strongly
recommended that a fire extinguisher is carried
in the caravan. (For suitable types see Safety
and Security).
Gas bottles - Bottled L.P. gas is the most
convenient portable source of fuel. Two bottles
are required for a constant supply.
An initial deposit is payable on each cylinder.
We recommend the use of 6kg Calor Light
Propane bottles. One position for use and one
for storage only. (For detailed information see
Services - Gas).
Jack - A suitable jack is essential (screw,
scissor, side mounted or air jack type).
Many car jacks are unsuitable. Ensure the
lifting capacity of the jack is suitable for your
caravan.
Levellers - Levellers help level the caravan
from side to side before unhitching. Proprietary
products can be purchased from your caravan
dealer and need to be positioned as indicated
by a spirit level.
Spare Wheel - It is always advisable to carry
a spare wheel with your caravan.
Spirit Level - A spirit level is extremely useful
when siting the caravan.
Stabiliser - Stabilisers help to dampen the
side to side movement of the caravan.
Torque Wrench - A torque wrench is the only
way that the exact recommended torque can
be achieved for wheel nuts and bolts. (See
Preparing for the Road).
17
T OW ING CO D E
GLOSSARY AND CHECKLIST
Towing Bracket - Never use cheap
alternatives, obtain one manufactured by
a reputable company complying with the
relevant standards.
Any light passenger vehicle registered in the
UK on or after August 1st 1998 will require a
type approved towbar and towball (to 94/20/
EC). Failure to fit a homologated towbar and
towball could result in a prosecution and
invalidation of your insurance cover. Always
check with your car manufacturer or towbar
manufacturer if in doubt.
Wooden Blocks - Wooden blocks typically
25cm square and 2cm thick are ideal for
placing under corner steadies and jockey
wheel when the ground is uneven or soft.
Water Containers - Two containers are
required, one to carry fresh water to the
caravan and one for waste water, which needs
to be disposed of properly. Several types
are available including jerry cans, Aquarolls,
wastemaster, etc .
13 Pin Socket - One socket fitted to the
car to accept corresponding plugs from the
caravan this energises the road lights and
caravan auxiliary circuits.
12 Volt Battery - A deep cycling, heavy duty
rechargeable leisure type battery should be
purchased to provide back-up power for
lights and other electrical appliances. (See
Battery). The securing arrangements for the
battery compartment require a leisure battery
complying with EN 60095-2 in particular those
with ledges for fastening to the lower edge
of the long sides. The maximum battery size
that can be fitted is 225mm high, (including
terminals) x 175mm deep x 353mm wide.
The depth and width dimensions include the
rim around the bottom used for securing the
battery.
Note: Batteries that are not foot mounted,
ie. without a rim, can still be fitted, but check
first that they will fit within the battery box
and can be secured before purchasing.
18
! WARNING: Your caravan dealer should
be consulted if additional equipment is to be
fitted as strong points may or may not be
provided in the design.
Caravan motor movers
The design and fitment of a caravan motor
mover shall be in accordance with the NCC
Code of Practice 305 and you should ensure
you receive a signed installation certificate of
compliance from the installer.
Failure to do so may invalidate you
warranty.
Note: Fitting additional equipment, such
as a motor mover will reduce the caravan
allowable payload.
Note: The fitting of a motor mover
may require a larger capacity battery fitting.
Note: If a towing cover is fitted, care should
be taken not to obscure lights, reflectors
and protect against rubbing or damaging
the bodywork.
USEFUL ITEMS
Car
External mirrors
Fire extinguisher
Jack
Petrol can
Spare bulbs
Spare keys
Spare wheel
Tool kit
Towball cover
Tyre pressure gauge
Warning triangle
Tyre pump
Hi-Vis tabard(s)
Breathalyser kit (some Euro
countries)
Headlight stickers (Beam
deflectors)
Caravan
Awning pegs and poles
Awning ground sheet
Bucket
Corner steady brace
Corner steady pads
Coupling lock
Door mat
Fire blanket
Fire extinguisher
Fresh water container
Gas cylinders
Jack
Levelling boards
Mallet
Site/caravan mains lead
Spare bulbs (Mandatory in E.C.)
Spare 12v fuses
Spare high pressure gas hose
Spare wheel
Spirit level
Toilet fluid
Waste water container
Wheel brace
Personal
After sun cream
First Aid Kit
Flannels
Hairbrush and comb
Make up. etc.
Raincoats
Toothbrush
Toothpaste
Scissors
Shampoo
Shaving kit
Shoe cleaning kit
Soap
Sun tan oil
Wellington boots
Domestic
Adhesive tape
Air freshener
Aluminium foil
Ashtrays
Bedding
Bin liners
Binoculars
Bottle opener
Breadboard
Brush and dustpan
Butter dish
Camera
Carving knife
Chairs
Clock
Clothes brush
Clothes line
Coat hangers
Coolbox
Colander
Crockery
Cruet
Corkscrew
Cutlery
Dish cloth and brush
Dusters and polish
Disposable cloths
Egg cups
Floor cloth
Fly spray
Food
Food mixer
Frying pan
Glasses
Grill pan
Jugs
Kettle
Kitchen roll
Kitchen tools
Matches
Measuring jug
Milk jug
Mixing bowl
Needles and thread
Oven gloves
Pegs
Piezo Gas lighter
Potato peeler
Radio
Rubbish bin
Saucepans
Scissors
Sieve
Sugar bowl
Shopping bags
Sleeping bags
Tea pot
Tea strainer
Tea towels
Table cloths
Table mats
Television
Tin opener
Tissues
Toilet paper
Torch
Towels
Toys & Games
Vacuum cleaner
Washing up bowl
TO W ING CODE
Useful memory aid
Documents
Bank and credit cards
Caravan Certificate
Cheque book
CRIS document
Driving licence
Green Card
Insurance (some Euro
countries)
Maps and guides
Money
MOT Certificate
Vehicle Registration
Documents
19
T OW ING CO D E
PREPARING FOR THE ROAD
Preparing for the road
Pre-load checklist
! WARNING: Never enter the caravan
without first lowering the four corner
steadies with the brace provided.
Before loading check:
! WARNING: Always disconnect the
electrical connector between the towing
vehicle and the caravan before connecting a
LV supply to the caravan.
(a)
- loose articles are stowed securely.
Do not stow tins, bottles or heavy items in
overhead lockers prior to towing.
-a
ll lockers and cupboard doors are closed
and secured, including the bathroom door.
-a
ll bunks are secure.
(b)
-e
nsure shower door is secure
-a
ll rooflights are closed and secured.
-m
ain table is stored in its transit position.
- television aerial is lowered - where applicable
- fridge is on 12V operation and door lock
is set.
(c)
-a
ll windows are fully closed and latched.
Never tow with windows on night setting.
Leave all curtains and blinds open to aid rear
visibility.
-g
as cylinders are correctly positioned,
secured and turned off, unless using en route
heating.
(d)
-b
attery is secure and mains connecting cable
is disconnected and stowed.
-E
nsure control panel settings are correct
for 12v fridge operation. See control panel
instructions for detail.
! WARNING: Turn off gas appliances
except en route heating (if fitted).
! WARNING: Do not travel with televisions
or microwaves in overhead lockers unless
the appliance was supplied fitted to your
caravan by the manufacturer.
20
Fig. A Loading your caravan
It is important that the towing vehicle’s rear
suspension is not deflected excessively by the
nose weight on the tow ball. If it is excessive
the steering and stability will be affected.
(Fig. B)
Light
Medium
Heavy
The greater the towing vehicle’s tail overhang
(the distance between the rear axle and the
tow ball), the greater the effect the nose
weight will have on the towing vehicle’s rear
suspension.
TO W ING CODE
Towing vehicle’s rear suspension
Fig. A Sensible loading
How to apportion it
1. L
oad heavy items low down near the floor
and mainly over or just in front of the axle(s)
(Fig. A).
2. L
oad evenly right to left so that each
caravan wheel carries approximately the
same weight.
3. D
o not load items at the extreme front or
rear since this can lead to instability due to
the ‘pendulum effect’.
4. L
oad remainder to give a suitable nose
weight at the towing coupling.
Check nose weight.
Note: Do not overload car boot.
! WARNING: All heavy and/or voluminous
items (e.g. TV, radio etc) must be stored
securely before travelling.
Fig. B Illustration of excessive deflection
of vehicle’s rear suspension
After trying out the caravan it may be found
that a stiffening of the rear suspension is
necessary - but note that this may give the
towing vehicle a firmer ride when not towing.
There are a number of suspension aids
available and advice should be sought on
which to use and how to fit. It is important to
ensure that the caravan is towed either level or
slightly nose down.
If you have any doubts about the suitability of
your towbar for towing a caravan consult the
towing bracket manufacturer.
Do not exceed the:
• Gross Vehicle Mass (G.V.M. on car plate).
! WARNING: Please take care to
ensure that you have allowed for the
masses of all items you intend to carry
in the caravan. e.g. optional equipment,
and personal effects such as clothing, food,
pets, bicycles, sailboards, sports equipment
etc.
! WARNING: under no circumstances
should the MTPLM of this caravan be
exceeded
• Maximum Technically Permissible Laden
Mass (M.T.P.L.M.) on the caravan.
• Gross Vehicle Combination Mass (Train
Weight) (G.V.C.M. on car plate).
• Maximum Permissible Towing Mass.
• Vertical Static Load on the
caravan coupling (noseweight).
• Maximum Vertical Load on the car towball
as specified by towing vehicle manufacturer
(noseweight).
• Driving licence limitations
21
T OW ING CO D E
STABILITY
Stability
All our models are of a well balanced design
and should be exceptionally good towers. All
models apart from the Sprite range (Diamond
pack option) have an AL-KO stabiliser fitted
as standard. The common causes of poor
stability include:
a. W
orn springs or loose spring fixings on the
towing vehicle.
b. Towing vehicle springs too soft.
d Nose of caravan is towing too high.
Towbar manufacturers should be consulted
before towing an uncompensated twin axle
caravan.
e Unsuitable
towing vehicle
Snaking
Galvanised steel chassis
This is a term used to denote an unstable car
and caravan combination where the caravan
‘weaves’ from side to side often causing a
similar swaying movement in the car itself.
c Insufficient nose weight.
Drilling of the galvanised steel chassis will
invalidate the warranty and must not be done.
Towball
The AL-KO stabiliser is designed to be used
with a swan neck, fixed or detachable towball.
If you use a ‘bolt on type’ towball you may
need to replace your towball with a special
extended neck towball.
Causes:
If you have a bolt on type towball you should
ask your dealer to check clearance around the
towball to allow for the stabiliser to articulate.
4. Side winds.
The AL-KO extended neck towball (available
from your dealer) is approved and marked
with the approval number EC94/20. Failure to
provide enough clearance around the towball
may invalidate your stabiliser warranty.
Stabiliser friction pads
The AL-KO stabiliser uses ‘friction pads’ inside
the coupling head to clamp the towball. These
pads must be kept free from grease and
contamination from the towball.
The friction pads should last approximately
50,000km (30,000 miles) under normal use, if
correctly maintained.
Suitable towing vehicles
The caravan is manufactured for towing
behind normal road cars and is not suitable
for towing behind commercial vehicles. It
is strongly recommended that whenever a
caravan is to be towed over rough terrain,
22
e.g. a field or track, great care should be
taken to ensure that no undue stress is placed
upon the caravan via the hitch mounting, i.e.
reduce speed. If in doubt, please consult the
chassis manufacturer and the towing vehicle
manufacturer who will advise. Touring caravans
based on standard AL-KO chassis can be
towed by four wheel drive off road leisure
vehicles providing the unit is used to tow in a
like manner to a conventional road-going car
and driven in the same considered manner.
1. Unsuitable or unbalanced outfit.
2. Incorrect loading or weight distribution.
3. Excessive speed especially downhill.
5. Overtaking.
6. Being overtaken by a large fast
moving vehicle.
7. Erratic driving.
8. Incorrect tyre pressures, car and caravan
9. Incorrect vehicle towball height
10. Worn stabiliser pads or towball
Cures
Cases of persistent snaking can be alleviated
by the use of a stabiliser.
On the road
If you do find your outfit snaking, try to keep
the steering wheel in a central position as far
as possible, decelerate and avoid braking if
possible.
Tread
The original tyres fitted by the manufacturer are
suitable for towing at a maximum speed of up
to 81 mph (130 kph).
Keep tyre treads clean of stones and other
foreign bodies, and check regularly for
damage to the tread and sidewalls. It is vitally
important that any damage is checked out
by a tyre expert and any necessary repairs or
replacements are carried out immediately.
Tyres
Caravan manufacturers choose the type,
size, profile, load carrying capacities and
speed ratings to match the design masses
of their vehicles, adjusting the tyre pressures
to suit. Only change the type of tyres on your
caravan on expert advice from the caravan
manufacturer, or tyre manufacturer.
Tyre maintenance
Tread depth
Pay special attention to the amount of tread
remaining on your tyres, and measure them
regularly. Always replace tyres before they
reach the minimum legal limit of 1.6mm.
Periodically tyres should be rotated to equalise
wear in the same manner as car tyres.
Pressures
The caravan manufacturers plate (fixed
adjacent to exterior door) and Technical
handbook contains information about caravan
loading and the required adjustments to
tyre pressures, which should be followed for
safety (these pressures relate only to the tyres
originally fitted to the caravan). Tyre pressures
should always be checked and corrected prior
to each journey. It is vital that tyre pressures
are maintained at the levels recommended by
the manufacturer to ensure maximum tyre life,
safety and handling characteristics.
Over or under-inflating tyres is likely to
seriously impair their performance and may
compromise the safe use of the vehicle.
Over-inflation increases overall tyre diameter,
decreases the amount of tread in contact with
the road, decreases sidewall flexibility and
affects road-adhesion.
Under-inflation decreases overall tyre diameter,
increases sidewall flexing, generates higher
tyre operating temperatures and difficult
vehicle handling characteristics. Running an
under-inflated tyre may cause premature tyre
failure. Both over and under-inflation adversely
affect tyre life.
TO W ING CODE
Types of tyres fitted
Tyre valves
Check tyre valves carefully. Ensure the caps
are in place free from dirt/ debris and that there
is no evidence of cracking or damage to the
valve stem.
Tyre Ageing
Rubber compounds used in tyres contain
chemicals that help to slow down the natural
aging process of untreated rubber. However,
tyres do deteriorate with age, which increases
the risk of tyre failure, and there are many ways
in which this can be spotted:
• Cracking/crazing on the side wall of the tyre,
caused by its flexing
• Distortion of tyre tread
• Deformation of the carcass of the tyre
There will also be a deterioration of the ride
quality caused by vibrations through the
tyre. This may signify the tyres performance
has been affected by age and should be
investigated as soon as possible
Note: It is recommended that tyres are
replaced after 5 years from the date of first
inflation. The date of first inflation is normally
within a few days of the date of manufacture
of the vehicle they are fitted to, and this
date can be determined from the gas and
/ or electrical certificate supplied with the
caravan.
We recommend that tyres that are over 5
years old (from first inflation) are inspected
and passed as fit for use by a qualified
technician. It is possible that in the event of
a tyre failure, an insurer may not cover any
losses incurred if the tyre is over 5 years
(from first inflation) and was not inspected
no more than 12 months prior to the
incident.
23
T OW ING CO D E
THE TYRE LAW
Tyres that display signs of aging should be
removed and not put to further use.
The effects of aging can be brought about
prematurely in several conditions. Tyres fitted
as spare wheels may age prematurely. If
tyres on caravans are not in regular use they
should be inspected before every journey,
several cleaning products may also harm the
chemicals in the rubber. However, the age of
a tyre will affect its safety and increase the risk
of failure, and you should inspect tyres for the
signs of aging regularly.
Note: The use of some motor movers
can damage or increase wear on the tyres
prematurely.
The tyre law
Note: Sales literature/ Technical Handbooks
publish recommended tyre pressures for the
MTPLM only (fully laden condition). It is not
possible to publish tyre pressures for any
other load condition other than the MTPLM.
Tyre types
It is illegal to mix tyres of a different
construction on the same axle.
Note: Although the caravan may be fitted
with the same type of tyre as the towing
vehicle, the pressures specified are different.
All charts show values for cars and are
therefore not applicable for caravans.
Wheel rims
Two sizes of wheel rims are used 5.5J x 14
and 6J x 15, the rim sizes are the same for
both steel and alloy rim, incorporating a double
safety hump which conforms to European
safety standards. Check the size on your
caravan before replacing a rim.
Hitch head load capacity
The maximum vertical static load which can
be put upon the hitch head when connected
is 100kg. Please refer to the technical data
in your handbook. (But see also vehicle
manufacturer’s weight limits on towball
loading.)
Hitching-up
An assistant can help in the hitching operation
by standing on the left hand side of the
drawbar (facing rear of car) and extending
an arm horizontally to indicate position of the
coupling. When reversing aim the towball
of the car directly at the caravan drawbar.
Remove towball cover and keep in car.
Adjust the jockey wheel to ensure the hitch
head is high enough to slide over the towball.
! WARNING: Do not lift the coupling head
by hand when hitching the caravan to the
car. Always raise and lower the coupling
head by winding the handle on the jockey
wheel up and down.
AK160 Type Hitch head
Pressures displayed on tyre walls apply ONLY
in North America and Canada.
Wheels
Caravan wheel bolts supplied with your
caravan should be tightened to a torque of
88Nm (65lb/ft) on steel wheels or 130Nm
(96lb/ft) on alloy wheels and should be
checked with the use of a torque wrench
regularly. Only use a spare wheel and tyre of
the type and size provided with you caravan.
Note: Please remember to check the wheel
bolt torque setting regularly.
24
Fig. A
Open the locking mechanism by pulling the
coupling handle upward in the direction of the
arrow (Fig.A item 1). The handle will remain
in the open position until the hitch head is
positioned onto the towball.
PR E-TOW CHECK LIST
The hitch head is fitted with a visual indicator
to show whether or not it is properly
connected to the towball. A green band will
show immediately below the red indicator
button on the hitch head when a proper
connection has been made. (See Fig. C)
If the green band is not visible it is not safe
to tow the caravan. Contact your dealer for
advice.
TO W ING CODE
Release the caravan handbrake and
manoeuvre the hitch head over the greased
towball and re-apply the handbrake. Using the
jockey wheel winding handle, lower the hitch
head carefully onto the towball. The pressure
of the towball within the hitch head will release
the locking tongue with an audible click and
the coupling handle should drop down. For
safety check that the coupling handle is fully
down by pushing the handle down manually.
When the hitch head is correctly coupled to
the tow ball the green collar of the locking
display button will be visible. (Fig A item 2).
If the green collar is not visible it is not safe
to tow the caravan. Contact your dealer for
advice.
Adjust jockey wheel to lower the hitch head
onto the ball. A click indicates it is fully
engaged. Ensure the smaller handle has
returned to its free position.
Firmly push down the large stabiliser handle to
engage the friction pads. (Fig D)
AKS 3004 Hitch head
Fig. D Stabiliser Handle
Fig. B
Release the caravan handbrake and
manoeuvre the hitch head over the ungreased
towball and re-apply the handbrake. Lift
forward the large stabiliser handle (Fig. B) lift
forward the exposed smaller handle (Fig. B)
until it clicks up.
Connect breakaway cable as described on
page 29.
Ensure that the jockey wheel is fully wound up
and properly located in the slots in the jockey
wheel tube, then release the clamp handle, lift
the whole unit as high as possible ensuring
the wheel is pointing directly backwards
and retighten the clamp handle.
Note: Ensure jockey wheel locates in recess
provided. Carelessness could result in
damage to the A-frame cover.
Note: Ensure the hitch is secure by
checking the visual indicator (figure C).
! WARNING: If the green band is showing
when the hitch head is not connected to the
towball there is a fault- contact your Dealer.
Fig. C
25
T OW ING CO D E
PRE-TOW CHECK LIST
Connect the 13 pin plug to the car socket by
inserting and rotating it slightly ensuring there
is enough loose cable for cornering and that
they won’t also drag on the ground. (See page
27 for further details)
Pre-Tow Check List
Check gas locker, battery locker and cassette
toilet doors are secure.
Check wheelnuts, tyre pressures and tyre
conditions.
Fully raise all four corner steadies. (Fig. E).
Fig. E
Pick up any levelling pads or levelling boards.
Check windows/rooflights/vents are securely
closed.
Ensure television aerial is lowered (where
applicable).
Switch off gas supply and change over to 12v
electricity if required.
Lock the caravan exterior door.
Check all car and caravan roadlights are
working.
Check round the caravan for anything left
behind.
Fit extending mirrors
Release caravan handbrake, adjust all mirrors
from driving seat and proceed.
• All road lights must be in working order.
• Lenses and reflectors must be in good
condition
• Bulbs must be of correct wattage for the
application (see Service handbook).
! WARNING: Do not cause any road
lighting to be obstructed by the addition of
any options or accessories to your caravan.
26
13 PIN SOCKET
Please be aware that some car manufacturers
and towbar manufacturers do not wire up all
13 pins as standard, unless requested.
TO W ING CODE
13 Pin socket
27
T OW ING CO D E
TOW CAR ELECTRICS
Tow Car Electrics
In all cases, The Swift Group assumes that the
tow car harness and electrics have been fitted
with the specific requirement of connection to
a caravan, which may contain AL-KO trailer
control (ATC), a 12V powered fridge and
charging circuits.
Most modern retro-fit towbars contain a relay,
located somewhere within the boot of the
tow car, which may have a selectable power
output for the fridge supply.
If a customer is experiencing issues with the
fridge supply it is possible the relay requires
adjustment and they should contact their tow
vehicle electrics installer or an auto electrician
to verify the installation.
LED Road Lighting
Your caravan maybe fitted with LED road
lighting, including the directional indicators and
stop lamps. LEDs consume very little power,
offer excellent light output and longevity when
compared to traditional tungsten bulbs.
Some more advanced tow cars are fitted
with Vehicle Light Monitoring Systems {VLM},
where the car monitors the condition of the
trailer/caravan road lights and advises the
driver of any bulb failures. To do this, some
tow cars expect to see a load on the caravan
lighting circuit similar to a tungsten bulb while
others may send a pulse of energy to each
light to confirm that the resistance of a bulb is
present.
The result of the above is that some tow cars
may incorrectly advise the driver of a bulb
failure, due to the use of LED lights while
others may flash or pulse the lights during use.
Recognising this, The Swift Group have
developed an additional towing fusebox,
which when connected to the existing towing
fusebox and is used to assist the towcar in
recognising the VLM System. Depending on
the type of car and system used the fusebox
maybe model specific.
The secondary fusebox is chargeable and
available through any Swift Group Dealer.
28
Note: This will change updates will be
required.
Caravan 13 Pin Connection - care advice
All caravans since 2008 have been supplied
with a 13 pin plug to connect to the towcar.
The 13 pin plug has an inner ring assembly
that is independent from the outer body.
Plug Inner Ring (containing
male pin terminals) - fitted to
the caravan
Plug Outer Body with locating
groove and hood - fitted to
the caravan
Socket Body (containing
female socket terminals) fitted to the car
Under normal circumstances the inner ring and
the outer body will be locked in one position
(see fig 1).
Fig 1
When the plug is first inserted in the socket
body ensure that the locating protrusion (key)
matches the groove (keyway) in the socket
body. The outer body can then be rotated a
full 90 degrees clockwise until a click is felt
or heard, at this point the cover flap can be
allowed to fall over the circular surface of the
plug top.
To remove the plug it is important to rotate the
outer body a full 90 degrees anti-clockwise,
again until a click is heard or felt before
withdrawing the plug from the socket. This will
ensure that the inner and outer parts of the
plug are returned to a locked condition.
BREAKAWAY CABLE
Fig 2
Note: Customers should note that the
towbar and towcar electrical socket will
be checked as part of the standard MOT
regulations, under directive 2009/40/EC.
This not only applies to tow cars but also
all Motorhomes fitted with a tow bar and
socket. Inappropriate repair or modification
to either maybe deemed a failure of the
vehicle if it is likely to affect the road
worthiness of the vehicle.
TO W ING CODE
WARNING: If the connector is not fully rotated
anti-clockwise prior to removing it from the
socket it is possible that the inner ring will
become ‘floating’ and may result in a condition
where the protrusion will be incorrectly aligned
(see fig 2 & 3).
Passengers
Passengers are forbidden to ride in a caravan.
Breakaway cables
Fig 3
If this situation does occur then it can be
corrected by inserting the edge of the
protrusion on the plug into the groove in the
socket (see Fig 4) and rotating the plug body
anti-clockwise until a click is felt. This process
will re-establish the lock between the inner and
outer parts allowing the correct insertion of the
plug into the socket.
Fig 4
UK law requires that all caravans are fitted
with a safety device to provide protection in
the unlikely event of separation of the main
coupling while in motion. A device referred to
as a ‘breakaway cable’ fulfils this requirement
and when fitted as on your caravan is
mandatory.
Purpose
To apply the caravans brakes if it becomes
separated from its towing vehicle. Having done
this, the cable assembly is designed to part
allowing the caravan to come to a halt away
from the towing vehicle.
Construction
A thin steel cable with a red plastic coating
fitted with a means of attachment for
connection to the towing vehicle. Located
directly beneath the coupling head.
Operation
In the event of the main coupling of the
caravan separating from the towing vehicle,
the cable should be able to pull tight, without
any hindrance, engaging the caravan brakes.
The breakaway cable should not become taut
during normal driving.
Correct procedure for use
Regularly check the cable and clip for damage.
If in doubt contact your Swift Group dealer.
Make sure the cable runs as straight as
possible and goes through the cable guide
fitted underneath the caravan coupling head.
29
T OW ING CO D E
BREAKAWAY CABLE
Determine whether or not the towing vehicle
towbar has a designated attachment point
(i.e. a part specifically designated for a
breakaway cable).
Where a point is designated on the towbar:
• Pass the cable through the attachment point
and clip it back on itself (figure 1).
Fig. 3a
Fig. 1
• Do not clip directly onto the designated point
(figure 2) since the clip is not designed for
use in this way.
Fig. 3b
• Detachable towball: You must seek guidance
on procedure from the towing vehicle towbar
manufacturer or supplier.
When the breakaway cable is attached, check:
a. that the cable cannot snag in use on the
caravan coupling head, jockey wheel,
stabiliser or accessory e.g. bumper shield,
cycle carrier etc.
b. that there is sufficient slack in the cable
to allow the towing vehicle and caravan
to articulate fully without the cable ever
becoming taut and applying the brakes.
Fig. 2
Where there is no designated attachment point
on the towbar:
• Fixed ball: Loop the cable around the neck
of the towball in a single loop only. See figure
3A and 3B.
30
c. that it is not too slack and can drag on the
ground. If left loose, the cable may scrape
along the ground and be weakened so that
it subsequently fails to do its job. The cable
may also be caught on an obstacle when in
motion thus engaging the caravan brakes
prematurely.
MOVING OFF
Reversing
The driver of the towing vehicle must have an
adequate view of the rear.
When the towing vehicle is reversing, the
overrun device shaft is pushing in, applying the
brakes via the overrun lever, brake rod system,
bowden cables and the expander mechanism.
If there is no rear view through the caravan it is
essential that additional exterior towing mirrors
are fitted. This is mandatory in some European
countries and drivers can face instant fines if
extension mirrors are not fitted.
! WARNING: Any rear view mirror must
not project more than 250 mm outside:
a. the width of the caravan when being
towed.
b. the width of the towing vehicle when
driven solo.
Note: Any rear view mirror fitted shall be
‘e’ marked and cover the field of view as
stipulated by type approval requirements
(Community Directive 2003/97 or 2005/27
or ECE Regulation 46.02 or Regulation 33
of the Road Vehicles (Construction & Use
Regulation 1986).
Moving off
Let the clutch in smoothly.
Allow more engine speed to produce the
power to move the additional weight of the
caravan.
TO W ING CODE
Mirrors
Fig. A Reversing
The backwards rotation of the brake drum
causes the secondary brake shoe to collapse
cancelling out the braking effect, allowing the
caravan to move backwards. At the same
time the transmission lever swings back and
compensates for the entire travel.
When reversing up a slope or on a loose
surface the brakes may apply themselves,
Correct maintenance and set up of the brakes
will help prevent this. Incorrect adjustment
of the wheel brakes or linkages will result in
making reversing difficult.
Proficiency at reversing can only be achieved
with practice and should be first attempted in
a large open area (Fig. A).
Reduce wear and tear on clutch and
transmission by taking extra care.
Speed limits
Change gears smoothly.
Normal road towing: 50mph
Try not to jerk the clutch.
Motorways (including dual carriageways):
60mph
31
T OW ING CO D E
CARAVAN HANDLING
Caravan handling
AL-KO Spare wheel carrier tips
Allow for caravan being wider than car.
The caravan needs to be jacked to the
maximum lifting height to be able to withdraw
the wheel from the carrier.
Do not bump kerb with caravan wheels.
When passing other vehicles allow more than
the normal clearance for driving solo.
Allow longer to build up speed to pass.
Allow for the outfit being twice its
normal length.
Do not suddenly swing out.
Carry out all manoeuvres as smoothly
as possible.
Use nearside wing mirror to check caravan has
cleared when overtaking.
! WARNING: Take care not to foul or
ground caravan chassis whilst traversing
ramps or other obstacles.
Motorway driving
Important points
1. Caravans may not be towed in the out- side
lane of a three or four lane motorway. (Reg.
12(2) of the Motorway Traffic [England and
Wales] Regulations 1982).
2. Reduce Speed:
a. In high or cross winds
b. Downhill
c. In poor visibility
3. High sided vehicles cause air buffeting so
extra care must be taken when passing or
being passed. As much space as possible
should be given.
32
Note: The side-lift jack has a maximum
lifting height of 375mm and the scissor jack
a maximum lifting height of 340mm.
Customers should also ensure that the
telescopic arms are kept well greased at all
times to guarantee ease of operation.
! WARNING: If it becomes necessary
to completely remove the carrier from the
chassis remember that the washers and
split pins are on the inside of the chassis as
well as the outside.
Note: On some models the spare wheel is
located in either the gas locker or under the
fixed bed.
CHANGING A WHEEL
1. Leave caravan hitched to towing vehicle and
ensure that the caravan and towing vehicle
handbrakes are applied.
The sequences necessary to correctly carry
out this work on a 5 stud wheel is as follows:
1
2. Lower corner steadies (as safety measure)
on the side that is being jacked up.
3. Remove wheel trims (if fitted).
3
4. Use wheel brace to slacken off wheel nuts
on the wheel to be changed.
5. Position jack under the axle at the
appropriate jacking point
(see Fig. B, page 34)
6. Jack up the caravan until the wheel for
removal is just off the ground.
7. Remove the wheel nuts and remove
the wheel.
8. Fit spare wheel and reverse the above
procedure. Ensure clean, dry mating
surfaces and clean, dry bolt/nut sealing
areas.
9. Ensure the spare wheel is free from damage
and distortion
10.Tighten all five bolts, according to
Fig. A, to 88Nm (65lb/ft) for steel wheels
or 130Nm (96lb/ft) for alloy wheels using a
torque wrench or have checked as soon as
possible. Ensure the correct wheel fixings
are used, as supplied with your caravan.
! WARNING: When a wheel has been
removed and replaced the torque of the
wheel nuts should be re-checked after
approximately 50 miles.
Wheel bolt tightening
4
5 Stud
5
TO W ING CODE
Changing a wheel
2
Fig. A
Please note the correct torque settings.
Jacking points
! WARNING: Only jack up your caravan
when it is coupled up to the car with its
handbrake applied and in 1st gear
(engine off).
Ensure that the jack is located in the correct
position, i.e. on the jacking bracket on the
chassis for the AL-KO side mounted jack
(Fig.B). Alternatively the reinforced axle
mounting plate can be used as an alternative
but the chassis member itself MUST NEVER
be used as a jacking point.
All caravans are provided with the facility to
fit AL-KO side jacking points and although a
scissor, trolley or bottle jack may be used.
Ensure the lifting capacity of your jack is
suitable for your caravan.
When refitting a wheel it is ESSENTIAL that the
wheel bolts are tightened to the recommended
torque figure and in the correct sequence.
Note: Only use a suitable wheel brace to
loosen and tighten the wheel bolts. Do
not use the corner steady brace for this
application.
33
T OW ING CO D E
STOPPING ON A HILL
1. Selecting a pitch
Do not pitch in such a position that your outfit
will obstruct others coming in.
Try to choose an area which is dry, reasonably level and preferably with a hard base.
If you have no alternative but to pitch on a
slope ensure that, for when you leave, you are
facing down the slope.
It is good practice to chock the wheels of the
caravan when parked on a slope even though
the caravan brakes are applied.
Fig. B Side lift jack
Stopping on a hill
Pulling off again can sometimes present a
problem. The easy solution is
1. Carry a good sized wedge shaped piece of
wood with a rope or light
chain attached.
2. Attach the other end of the rope to the
nearside rear grab handle.
3. Place the wood behind the nearside
caravan wheel.
4. Carefully reverse the car slightly back down
the hill, the caravan will stop against the
wedge and turn.
5. Drive forward since this attempt to move
up the hill will now not involve pulling the
full weight of the caravan until the car has
gained some traction.
6. When reaching the top of the hill retrieve
the wedge.
Arrival on site
2. Levelling the caravan
Levelling must be carried out in both directions
in order for the refrigerator and other
equipment to function correctly. This should be
done before unhitching the caravan. Levelling
boards (Fig. C) can be used to raise one side
of the caravan by driving or reversing the
caravan onto the boards. Apply the handbrake
and chock the wheels.
The positioning of the jockey wheel can be
used to help level the caravan.
Lower the corner steadies until they are in firm
contact with the ground.
! WARNING: DO NOT use the steadies
as a jack they are only a means of stabilising
the caravan.
Levelling pads or boards should be used
under the steadies where the ground is soft or
uneven.
In extreme cases where it is necessary to raise
a wheel off the ground for levelling purposes,
further adequate support should be applied so
that the steadies do not take any undue strain.
Note: Check and observe site regulations.
Manoeuvring your caravan by hand
Note: Care must be taken when
manoeuvring your caravan into position.
Pressure placed on unsupported parts of
front and rear GRP/ ABS panels may cause
surface damage/ cracks to appear. Use the
grab handles provided.
34
Fig. C Levelling board
UNHITCHING
To prevent distortion of the body, the caravan
must be always correctly sited and levelled.
Failure to site the caravan correctly may
prevent the exterior door from closing properly.
3. Unhitching
TO W ING CODE
Exterior door
Before applying the handbrake ensure the
hitch is fully extended and not compressed
behind the tow vehicle otherwise the hitch will
not release from the tow ball.
Apply the caravan handbrake.
Lower the jockey wheel to the ground.
Disconnect the breakaway cable and road
lighting plugs.
AK160
Lift the coupling handle to release the locking
tongue (fig A page 24), whilst simultaneously
winding down the jockey wheel, to lift the
caravan hitch head clear of the tow ball.
AKS 3004
Release the stabiliser by lifting the large
handle. Then lift the exposed small handle
forward until it clicks up, at the same time
winding down the jockey wheel, to lift the
caravan clear of the tow ball.
35
T OW ING CO D E
TOWING CODE
36
SAFETY AND SECURITY
SI 601 Smoke Alarm Operation ................................................................................................ 38
Alarm Test ................................................................................................................................ 39
Fire extinguisher........................................................................................................................ 40
Escape paths ........................................................................................................................... 40
Children .................................................................................................................................... 41
CO Alarm - Fireangel CO-9X Carbo Monoxide Alarm operation................................................. 41
Ventilation ................................................................................................................................. 48
Security .................................................................................................................................... 49
SA F E T Y A ND S E CURIT Y
Fire............................................................................................................................................ 38
AL-KO Secure immobiliser......................................................................................................... 49
TRACKER Retrieve ................................................................................................................... 50
Mobile Alarm System ................................................................................................................ 51
37
S A FE T Y A ND S E CURITY
FIRE AND FIRE ALARM
Fire
Important: Your attention is drawn to the
notice affixed inside the caravan wardrobe
advising on fire precaution, ventilation and
what to do in case of fire.
In case of fire
1. Get everyone out of the caravan as quickly
as possible using whichever exit is the
quickest, including windows. Do not stop to
collect any personal items.
Note: The alarm cover can't be installed
without a battery fitted.
Note: Upon delivery the battery may be
fitted with a protective cover. Please ensure
this is removed before use.
Carbon-Zinc type:
Eveready Energizer 1222;
Gold Peak 16045 (UL).
2. Raise the Alarm. Call the Fire Brigade.
Alkaline Type:
3. Turn off the gas supply valve if it is safe to
do so.
Energizer 522; Duracell MN 1604; Duracell 9V
4. Turn off the electricity supply at
supply point.
Lithium (long life) type:
Model-si 601 smoke
alarm operation
1. Remove the alarm from its mounting plate
by turning anti-clockwise
Ultra; Energizer 9V Ultra+; Gold Peak 1604A.
Ultralife U9VL
Normal condition
The red LED on the front should flash once
every 40 seconds to show the alarm is active.
Low Battery Condition
Important: Your smoke alarm requires a
battery with a sufficient capacity of power to
operate correctly. This must also be correctly
installed.
Should your smoke alarm enter a low battery
condition, the unit will emit an audible ‘chirp’
once every 40 seconds. When this occurs you
must replace the battery immediately. Your
smoke alarm will continue to warn of this low
battery condition for at least 7 days, however,
failure to change the battery after this time
would mean your smoke alarm has insufficient
power to alert you in a real fire situation.
Battery replacement
Important: Only the following batteries can be
used for replacement. Use of a battery other
than those recommended below may have a
detrimental effect on the detector’s operation.
Use of a lithium (long-life) battery could provide
power for 10 years under normal operating
conditions, meaning there is no need for an
annual battery change.
38
2. Remove the existing battery and replace
with a new battery from the above list,
making sure that the positive and negative
connections are in the correct position. If
unsure see the alarm user manual.
ALARM TEST
4. Test your alarm as explained in the next
section ‘Alarm Test’.
Alarm test
1. Press the test button in the centre and
release.
SA F E T Y A ND S E CURIT Y
3. Replace the alarm on its mounting plate,
lining up the large central vent on the front
of the alarm, with the ‘X’ that is moulded
into the plastic on the mounting plate
(if unsure see page 13 of the alarm user
manual). Ensure the unit is securely fitted.
2. The unit will emit a loud (85dB at 3 meters)
alarm for around 5 seconds and stop
automatically.
3. The red LED on your alarm will flash rapidly
during the audible signal.
39
S A FE T Y A ND S E CURITY
FIRE ALARM
Note: The test button accurately tests
the alarm’s smoke sensing circuit, there is
no need to test your alarm with smoke. If
your smoke alarm fails to give an audible
test signal, please refer immediately to the
troubleshooting guide at the end of the
alarm user manual.
! WARNING: Test your smoke alarm at
least once per week.
Your smoke alarm has been designed to be as
maintenance - free as possible and although
the unit requires only battery maintenance for
its entire life, there are several things you must
do to keep it working properly.
! WARNING: Your smoke alarm is a
sealed electrical device and no attempt
should be made to open the case.
Attempting to open the case will invalidate
your Warranty.
Testing: Test your smoke alarm once every
week, see page 39 on how to do this.
Cleaning: As a minimum your smoke alarm
should be cleaned once every 3 months using
your vacuum cleaner fitted with the soft brush
attachment.
! WARNING: Do not use solvents or
cleaners on your smoke alarm, as they may
cause damage to the sensor or circuitry.
The unit can be wiped with a slightly damp
cloth.
! WARNING: The electronic test button
provides a full test of the unit’s functionality.
DO NOT try to test the alarm with a naked
flame, as this may present a potential fire
hazard.
! WARNING: Never use portable cooking
or heating equipment other than electric
heaters that are not of the direct radiant
type, as it is a fire and asphyxiation hazard.
! WARNING: Appliances such as cookers
must not be used for heating.
Fire Extinguisher
It is recommended that a dry powder fire
extinguisher be carried inside your caravan at
all times.
When using a dry powder extinguisher it is
suggested that the caravan be evacuated until
the powder has settled, to avoid inhalation.
A fat pan fire should not have a fire
extinguisher aimed at it. It should be
smothered with a fire blanket.
! WARNING: Provide one dry powder
fire extinguisher of an approved type or
complying with EN 3-7, of at least 1kg
capacity, by the main exterior door and a fire
blanket next to the cooker.
Familiarise yourself with the instructions
on your fire extinguisher and the local fire
precaution arrangements.
! WARNING: Your smoke alarm may
false alarm when it is being cleaned using a
vacuum cleaner.
40
Escape paths
It is important that you do not block escape
paths to emergency exits with obstructions
or hazards.
CO ALARM
What to do during an alarm
Do not leave children alone in the caravan
in any event. Keep potentially dangerous
items out of reach, as at home e.g. matches,
medicine etc.
• Keep calm and open the doors and windows
to ventilate the caravan.
CO alarm
Fireangel CO-9D Carbon Monoxide Alarm
! WARNING: Please read the full user
instructions provided.
Carbon monoxide
• Stop using all fuel burning appliances and
ensure, if possible, that they are turned off.
• Evacuate the caravan leaving the doors and
windows open.
• Do not re-enter the caravan until the alarm
has stopped. When exposed to fresh air it
can take up to 10 minutes for the sensor to
clear and the alarm to stop depending on the
level of carbon monoxide detected.
What are the symptoms of carbon
monoxide poisoning?
• Get medical help immediately for anyone
suffering the effects of carbon monoxide
poisoning (headache, nausea), and
advise that carbon monoxide poisoning is
suspected.
Early symptoms of carbon monoxide (CO)
poisoning can mimic many common ailments
and may easily be confused with flu or simple
tiredness. Symptoms to look out for include:
• Do not use the appliance again until it has
been checked by an expert. In the case of
gas appliances the engineer must be Gas
Safe registered.
Known as the silent killer, Carbon Monoxide is
an invisible, odourless and tasteless gas.
• tiredness
• drowsiness
• headaches
• giddiness
• nausea
• vomiting
• pains in the chest
SA F E T Y A ND S E CURIT Y
Children
! WARNING: A loud alarm is a warning
that unusually high and potentially lethal
levels of carbon monoxide are present.
Never ignore this alarm, further exposure
can be fatal. Immediately check residents for
symptoms of carbon monoxide poisoning,
and contact the proper authorities to resolve
all CO problems.
NEVER IGNORE ANY ALARM.
• breathlessness
• stomach pains
• erratic behaviour
• visual problems
Anyone with these symptoms should
immediately turn off all appliances and
seek medical attention.
Please carefully review this owner’s manual to
ensure that you know what actions to take in
the event of an alarm.
Note: If the level of CO in the sensor
doesn’t reach 50ppm then the Sensor Test
mode will time out and finish automatically
after 3 minutes. Even if the level doesn’t
reach 50ppm, as long as the display shows
a reading of CO then you can be confident
that the alarm is working correctly. If you
have any questions about testing the sensor
please contact the technical support team.
41
S A FE T Y A ND S E CURITY
CO ALARM
Power Pack Activation
See diagram below
Your detector comes complete with an
integrated power pack that will provide power
for its entire operational life. To activate the
power pack you need to pull the disabling
tab (see image). This will in turn pull out the
metal disabling clip, which is attached to the
end of the tab, from the disabling socket
which is situated on the underside of the
detector. Retain the disabling tab for future
use by taping it to page 22 of the CO-9D user
manual.
When the detector is activated the screen
will display all of the icons, then after a few
seconds will show the current CO level. The
symbol
power indicator LED below the
will also flash green once every minute to
indicate that the detector is receiving power
from the power pack and is fully operational. A
symbol will also flash briefly on the LCD
screen approximately once every minute.
Test the sounder, power pack and circuitry by
pushing the centre of the Test/Mode button
briefly to confirm that the detector is operating properly. The sounder will sound as soon
as the button is pressed, and the Alarm LED
will illuminate red indicating that the sounder
is working and the power pack is providing
power to the unit. You'll notice that the display
will switch to temperature mode, this is explained later in the manual, press button again
to return to the CO display. This test for the
sounder, power pack and circuitry should be
performed on a weekly basis. This should be
continued for the lifetime of the product.
42
! WARNING: Prolonged exposure to the
sounder in close proximity to your ears may
damage your hearing.
Under normal operating conditions, the power
pack will last for the lifetime of the product i.e 7
years. The detector will not protect against the
risk of carbon monoxide poisoning when the
power pack has drained.
! WARNING: Prolonged exposure to
extreme high or low temperatures may
reduce the life of the power pack.
Power Pack Deactivation
Your CO-9D is portable making it ideal for
taking with you on holiday. You will need to
deactivate your detector when traveling or
even when storing e.g when decorating.
Fitting is reverse of removal. To deactivate the
detector the two ends of the metal clip must
be inserted into the corresponding holes in the
disabling socket located on the underside of
the detector (see image). You can ensure that
the product is disabled by pressing the test
button- If there is no sound from the sounder
then the clip has been fitted correctly.
Note: If the disabling tab is no longer
available then the clip can be replicated by
opening out a thin metal paper clip into a
U-shape.
Operating Features
Standby Mode
The alarm can display two views when in
normal standby mode, the current level of CO
or the current room temperature in degrees
centigrade (ºC). When the alarm is showing the
CO ALARM
Note: If the alarm is in temperature view and
detects CO it will automatically switch back
to CO display mode.
Power pack, sounder and circuitry test
FireAngel's unique digital read out displays
the amount of CO that the sensor is detecting
shown in parts per million (PPM). It is designed
to indicate levels from 10PPM to 999PPM.
Note: Ambient background levels between
0PPM and 10PPM will show as 0PPM
When the alarm is showing the current
temperature you will see something similar to
the following.
In both modes you will notice a
symbol
appear briefly in the top left hand corner of the
screen once every minute. This is an additional
indication to show you that the alarm is
operating as well as the flashing green LED.
To switch between CO and temperature view,
simply press the Test/Mode button briefly. The
unit will also sound when pressing the button
to switch between the two display modes.
You will also notice that when switching
between modes the display will change
slightly, this is because the alarm is displaying
the Peak Level CO reading that it has recorded
in the last 4 weeks, please see the following
peak level reading feature section for further
description.
Pressing the Test/Mode button will also test
the power pack, sounder and circuitry of
the alarm. The unit will sound and the alarm
LED below
will illuminate red. You should
perform this test once per week.
Peak Level Reading feature.
SA F E T Y A ND S E CURIT Y
current CO Level you will see something similar
to the following.
The alarm will record the highest reading of
CO that it has detected in the last 4 weeks.
This information is useful if your alarm has
sounded so you can see the highest level of
CO detected during that time. It is also useful
to check periodically to see if a readable level
of CO has been detected for a short time, but
not long enough to trigger a full alarm. The
peak level reading is shown briefly every time
you press the Test/Mode button and will look
something like the image below.
Note: It is possible and quite normal for the
peak level to remain at 0ppm, i.e. this simply
means that the alarm has not detected any
CO in the last 4 weeks.
The Peak Level reading will be reset to 0ppm
whenever a Sensor Test is carried out. (See
the next section for Sensor Test).
Sensor Testing
! CAUTION: Sensor testing should only
be performed by a responsible adult.
This test should only be performed once a
month. Excessive testing will shorten the life
of the power pack.
43
S A FE T Y A ND S E CURITY
CO ALARM
Step 5: Put out the incense stick or cigarette
by placing it into a dish of water. Ensure that
all flames have been extinguished.
Note: We suggest the use of an incense
stick or cigarette as the way in which
these products burn produces a readable
localized amount of CO. A readable level
of carbon monoxide will not be given off
by other sources of smoke, for example an
extinguished candle or match.
Note: If the level of CO in the sensor doesn’t
reach 50ppm then the Sensor Test mode
will time out and finish automatically after
3 minutes. Even if the level doesn’t reach
50ppm, as long as the display shows a
reading of CO then you can be confident
that the alarm is working correctly. If you
have any questions about testing the sensor
please contact the technical support team
Understanding the Product's
Indicators
Digital Display
The LCD screen has many icons with one or
more being shown at any one time.
Step 1: If the alarm is wall mounted unhook it
from the fixing screws.
Step 2: Hold the Test/Mode button down
until the spanner icon appears in the bottom
left hand corner of the screen and the bar
graph ‘scans’ from left to right. This indicates
the alarm is in sensor test mode where the
sampling rate of the sensor has increased and
the alarm can be tested using a known source
of CO.
Step 3: Light an incense stick or cigarette
using a match or lighter. Extinguish the
lighter, or put out the match and place it into
a dish of water.
44
Step 4: Hold the incense stick or burning
cigarette 15cm (6 inches) below the
detector, so that the smoke goes into the
holes at the bottom of the detector. As the
smoke gets into the alarm the display will
show the amount of CO being detected.
When the level of CO in the sensor reaches
50ppm the alarm will sound a single alarm
cycle, this confirms that the sensor is working
correctly and is the end of the sensor test.
The alarm will return to normal standby
mode.
Bar Graph to show early build up of CO.
To understand the role of the product
indicators please refer to section ‘Carbon
Monoxide and how it can affect your family’
on page 3 of the CO-9D User Manual. The
alarm has a bar graph which mimics the way
CO levels build up in the blood stream. The
response times of the alarm are determined by
the European Standard BS EN 50291:2001 so
the alarm will only sound when it has detected
CO for a prescribed length of time, the higher
the level of CO the quicker the alarm must
sound. However with FireAngel’s CO-9D
there is an early visual warning that CO is
present. When CO is first detected the alarm
indicates it’s presence by displaying the level
on the screen in parts per million (ppm). If CO
continues to be present additional bars will
appear on the graph. When the graph is full
CO ALARM
The Alarm will sound
• Between 60 and 90 minutes when exposed
to a minimum of 50ppm of CO.
• Between 10 and 40 minutes when exposed
to a minimum of 100ppm of CO.
• Within 3 minutes when exposed to a
minimum of 300ppm of CO.
technician and have the problem investigated
and rectified immediately.
Error signal
The unit continuously checks the settings of its sensor and circuitry. If any of these
settings are found to be incorrect, the detector
will emit a single chirp once per minute and
the display will show “Err” for error and an
error code,cycling between “Err”and the particular error code.
SA F E T Y A ND S E CURIT Y
(i.e. the 6th segment is shown the unit will
sound a loud audible alarm (85 dB at 1m
(3 feet)) and the Alarm LED below the
symbol on the front of the detector will flash
red once every second.
Low power pack signal
If the power pack becomes low then
the detector will emit a single chirp once per
minute and the low power pack icon will flash
on the screen.
Alarm silence
It is possible to temporarily silence the
alarm up to two times if the level of CO that
triggered the alarm is less than 200ppm. After
ventilating the caravan you can temporarily
silence the alarm by pressing the Test/Mode
button, the alarm will stop and the silence
mode symbol will appear on the screen. The
silence mode will last for up to 3 minutes. If the
CO level remains too high the alarm will trigger
again or if the level of CO rises above 200ppm
then the detector will automatically re-enter
alarm mode. If the level of CO has fallen to a
satisfactory level the silence mode icon will
disappear, the unit will exit alarm mode and
the segments of the bar graph will slowly
disappear as the CO in the sensor clears.
! IMPORTANT: A single chirp once per
minute together with an error signal 14 or
low power pack warning does NOT mean
that the detector has detected carbon
monoxide.
If you experience an error condition or low
power pack warning and the product is still
within warranty then contact technical support.
If the product is no longer in warranty replace
immediately!
Alarm in absence:
If the Peak level reading symbol is
showing on the screen but there is no full
alarm sound and you are not pressing the
test button, then your detector is warning
that it has detected Carbon Monoxide in your
absence. Immediately vacate the caravan and
seek medical attention for anyone suffering the
effects of CO poisoning (headache, nausea).
Treat this as a serious warning. Call a qualified
45
S A FE T Y A ND S E CURITY
CO ALARM
! IMPORTANT: The selected power pack
was chosen to provide power beyond the
lifetime of the product, in particular the
sensor (under normal operating conditions).
The operational life of the sensor is seven
years, for this reason, the detector should
be replaced after seven years from the date
of installation.
FireAngel Technical Support Line
9.00am – 5.00pm, Monday – Friday
Telephone: 0800 141 2561
(1-800 523171 in EIRE)
e-mail: [email protected]
Maintenance
Your detector will alert you to potentially
hazardous CO concentrations in your caravan
when maintained properly. To maintain your
FireAngel detector in proper working order,
and to ensure that the sensor will last for the
lifetime of the product, it is recommended that
you:
• Test the sounder, power pack and circuitry
of your detector at least once per week by
pressing the Test/Reset button briefly (see
above).
• Perform the Sensor Test once every month
(See p43).
• Keep the detector free of dust by gently
vacuuming the case with a soft brush
attachment once per month.
To prevent the possibility of contaminating the
sensor in your detector and thus affecting its
reliability:
• Never use cleaning solutions on your
detector. Simply wipe with a slightly damp
cloth.
• Do not paint the detector.
• Do not spray aerosols on or near the
detector.
• Do not use any solvent based products near
the detector.
• Move the detector to a safe location and
store in a plastic bag before painting, wall
46
papering, or performing any other activities
using substances that emit strong fumes.
Remember to remove it from the bag and
replace the detector when these activities are
finished.
Failure of any test should be reported to the
Fireangel Technical Support Team. Do not
attempt to repair your CO detector. Do not
remove any screws or open the main casing
of your detector. Any attempt to do so may
cause malfunction and will invalidate the
warranty.
Disposal
Waste electrical products should not be
disposed of with regular household waste.
Please recycle where facilities exist. Check
with your local authority, retailer or manufacturer for recycling/disposal advice as regional
variations apply. The power pack should be
deactivated before disposal. To do this, insert
the two ends of the metal clip on the end of
the disabling tab back in to the socket located
on the underside of the detector.
If the disabling tab is no longer available then
the clip can be replicated by opening out a thin
metal paperclip into a U-shape. You can also
return your carbon monoxide detector to
Fireangel for disposal. For return address
contact Fireangel Technical Support. Please
include a note confirming the product is being
returned for disposal.
Technical Information
Detector Specifications: Model CO-9D
Sensor Type: Electrochemical
Sensor Life: 7 Years
Alarm Sound Level: 85dB at 1 metre (3 feet)
Power Pack Life: 7 years (Life of product)
Temperature Range: -10ºC (14ºF) to 40ºC
(104ºF)
Operating Humidity Range: 30 - 90% RH
Weight: 120 grams (4.23oz)
Certified to: BS EN 50291:2001
This FireAngel carbon monoxide detector is
designed to continuously monitor for CO.
Its response times meet the requirements of
BSI standard BS EN 50291:2001.
CO ALARM
! WARNING: APPARATUS
CONFORMING TO THIS STANDARD
MAY NOT PROTECT PEOPLE WHO ARE AT
SPECIAL RISK FROM CARBON MONOXIDE
EXPOSURE BY REASON OF AGE,
PREGNANCY OR MEDICAL CONDITION.
IF IN DOUBT, CONSULT YOUR DOCTOR.
SA F E T Y A ND S E CURIT Y
! WARNING: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO
OPEN - DO NOT BURN
A CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTOR IS
NOT A SUBSTITUTE FOR A SMOKE
ALARM OR A COMBUSTIBLE GAS
DETECTOR.
REPLACE UNIT AFTER 7 YEARS OF
OPERATION.
47
S A FE T Y A ND S E CURITY
VENTILATION/SECURITY
48
7 Year Warranty
Ventilation
FireAngel Ltd warrants to the original
purchaser that its enclosed carbon monoxide
alarm be free from defects in materials and
workmanship under normal residential use and
service for a period of 7 (seven) years from
the date of purchase. Provided it is returned
with postage paid and proof of purchase date,
FireAngel Ltd hereby warrants that during the 7
(seven) year period commencing from the date
of purchase FireAngel Ltd, at its discretion,
agrees to replace the unit free of charge. The
warranty on any replacement CO-9D alarm,
will last for the remainder of the period of
the original warranty in respect of the alarm
originally purchased – that is from the date
of original purchase and not from the date of
receipt of the replacement product. FireAngel
Ltd reserves the right to offer an alternative
product similar to that being replaced if the
original model is no longer available or in
stock. This warranty applies to the original
retail purchaser from the date of original retail
purchase and is not transferable. Proof of
purchase is required.
This warranty does not cover damage resulting
from accident, misuse, disassembly, abuse
or lack of reasonable care of the product, or
applications not in accordance with the user
manual. It does not cover events and conditions outside of FireAngel Ltd’s control, such
as Acts of God (fire, severe weather etc.). It
does not apply to retail stores, service centres
or any distributors or agents. FireAngel Ltd will
not recognise any changes to this warranty by
third parties.
FireAngel Ltd shall not be liable for any incidental or consequential damages caused by the
breach of any expressed or implied warranty.
Except to the extent prohibited by applicable
law, any implied warranty of merchantability
or fitness for a particular purpose is limited in
duration for 7 (seven) years.
This warranty does not affect your statutory
rights. Except for death or personal injury,
FireAngel Ltd shall not be liable for any loss of
use, damage, cost or expense relating to this
product or for any indirect, or consequentia
loss, damages or costs incurred by you or any
other user of this product.
All caravans comply with BS EN 721. The
ventilation points on your caravan are fixed
points of ventilation which are required by the
European Standards.
All caravans have ventilation at high level and
low level which have been calculated to suit
the individual needs of your caravan.
High level ventilation is achieved by means of
the roof lights and washroom roof ventilators.
The low level ventilators are positioned
underneath the oven housing.
Under no circumstances must these vents be
blocked or obstructed in any manner as this
could lead to insufficient fresh air. In this case
the confined atmosphere becomes depleted of
oxygen which could lead to dangerous levels
of carbon dioxide (CO2) build up leading to risk
of asphyxiation.
The risks of carbon monoxide (CO) build
up, which is a colourless, odorless and
tasteless gas, will also be reduced with
ventilation. Carbon monoxide is produced
from incomplete combustion and should the
CO detector be activated the cause of the
incomplete combustion must be investigated
prior to reusing the appliance in question.
It is advised that fixed ventilation points
are checked and cleaned (if necessary) on
a regular basis using a small brush and a
domestic vacuum cleaner.
Additional night time ventilation is obtained
by releasing the window catches and placing
them in the second groove. Note the windows
are not sealed from rain in this position.As
the ventilation levels are calculated to suit
each models requirements there should be
no modifications made which may result in
reduced ventilation levels.
! WARNING: Do not obstruct ventilation
Petrol/Diesel Fumes
The fitting of a tail pipe extension to your
car exhaust will reduce the possibility of
fumes entering your caravan through the
ventilation points.
SECURITY
Caravan theft
It is essential to check with your car insurance
company to ensure you are covered when
towing your caravan.
The theft of a caravan can occur in the most
unlikely circumstances; from a motorway
service area, even from an owner’s driveway.
AL-KO Secure immobiliser
(when fitted)
Secure all windows and doors when your
caravan is unoccupied even if only for a short
length of time.
Security chips
A special security chip is concealed within
the body of every caravan. This chip contains
the individual identity of your caravan and can
only be read using a special decoder by police
officers.
Chassis number
Your 17 digit serial number chassis number
can be found on your windows and on the
offside chassis member of the drawbar. It is
also stated on the manufacturers weight plate
next to the doorway.
Make a note of this number in the space
provided at the front of this handbook and
make a separate note of the number to keep
safe at home.
Additional security
Consider fitting any device which might deter
or prevent intrusion by thieves.
A hitch lock cover prevents towing of
the caravan.
A wheel lock prevents towing of the caravan
and removal of the wheel (some models are
provided with an AL-KO Secure device).
Customers are advised to identify their caravan
with a method for subsequent identification if
other forms of identification have been altered
or removed.
Free crime prevention advice about securing
your caravan, protecting your valuables,
property marking, either at home or whilst
on site, can be obtained from the Crime
Prevention Officer through your local
Police Station.
The AL-KO immobiliser is fitted as standard
on some models, optional on others (except
Sprite Freedom). The AL-KO part numbers for
the Scorpion design of wheels is as follows,
14" AL-KO part number 1557076 (number 36),
and the 15" 1555857 (number 34). When fitted
the 4 part kit specified below is supplied with
your caravan. Your kit will contain : -
SA F E T Y A ND S E CURIT Y
Security
Part A
Box containing security components.
consisting of:
- 1off High security locking bolt.
- 1off High security locking bar socket key.
- 1off Barrel lock.
- 2off Barrel lock keys.
- Instruction manuals in CD and paper format.
- Security registration card and reference
number.
Part B
Wheel specific insert assembly consisting of:
- Red coloured wheel insert lozenge
assembled with the locking bar and clip.
Part C
- 1off Wheel spanner.
Part D
- Kit bag.
Note: Two lock kits will be supplied with
twin axles
You must register your key within one
month of the date of purchase. Should
you fail to do this, you will not be able to
order a spare key!
Caravan insurance
- Within your AL-KO kit you will find an
exclusive security number.
It is recommended that the caravan and its
contents should be insured against theft.
- Please register your card by telephoning
0870 7576788 or 0044 1926 818500.
49
S A FE T Y A ND S E CURITY
TRACKER RETRIEVE UNIT
- You will need to provide a password
and provide an answer to a prompting
security question.
- Make a note of your password and keep it in
a safe place.
- Keep your registration card safe.
- Take your registration card with you when
you are travelling with the caravan.
- Always keep your registration separate from
the lock.
Safety information
(AL-KO Secure)
- Always secure the caravan against rolling
away (chock or couple to a towing vehicle).
- Always remove AL-KO Secure before moving
the caravan.
- After any attempt of theft has been made on
a locked AL-KO Secure, the caravan must
be inspected at an AL-KO Approved Service
Workshop.
- Always keep the key in a safe place.
- Keep the lock set and registration card
separate from the key.
- The lock parts and key do not have a
registration number, therefore keep the
registration card in a safe place.
- Caravans with twin axles have two locks,
keep each lock set in a separate place.
The sets are not interchangeable!
AL-KO operating instructions
- Read the AL-KO operating instructions and
act in accordance with them.
- Follow all safety instructions as well as the
warning information.
- It is recommended for ease of fit that a sidelift jack be used.
- Keep the operating instructions
The AL-KO side lift jack
(Supplied as standard on specific models only).
The AL-KO Side Lift Jack has been
specifically developed to aid the often difficult
process of changing a wheel on caravans.
It is suitable for fitment to the AL-KO
chassis, located in the pre-drilled holes in the
longitudinal members.
Note: The fitment of some aftermarket
motor movers may inhibit the use of the ALKO jacking system.
Tracker battery powered
retrieve unit
Your vehicle is fitted with a ‘TRACKER Battery
Powered Retrieve’ unit. This is a self contained
security device which has been positioned
discreetly within the vehicle during the
manufacturing process. There are numerous
fitting positions for the device, the locations
of which are kept secret and known only to
TRACKER and the Swift Group.
This unit has a self contained battery, which
has a minimum five year life. The unit draws
no power from the vehicle battery or leisure
battery. This unit is a tracking device only and
is not an alarm.
The tracking device requires an active
subscription to be in place with TRACKER.
Your vehicle is supplied with a free 3 month
subscription (from date of purchase), which is
activated once you have registered your details
with TRACKER (normally your dealer would
do this with you at the time of collection of
your new vehicle). If you chose not to register
your device the unit is not activated and the
50
ALARM SYSTEM
If in the unfortunate event your vehicle is
stolen you should;
• Notify the police immediately.
• Contact TRACKER and confirm to them that
your vehicle has been stolen and provide a
police crime number.
• TRACKER will then activate the tracking
device in your vehicle.
• The police can then track the vehicle using
VHF tracking technology from the tracking
computers inside police vehicles and aircraft.
Mobile alarm system
Stinger 310 alarm (if fitted)
To ensure your STINGER 310 system is
operated correctly, please read all sections of
these instructions before attempting to use the
alarm. If you are unsure of any content, please
contact your dealer in the first instance or
Sargents Electrical direct.
SA F E T Y A ND S E CURIT Y
vehicle can therefore not be tracked in the
event of theft. At the end of the free 3 month
subscription period your subscription will
end. Owners can however choose to either
subscribe to TRACKER for a further 12 months
at £60 per year or for a period of five years
from date of purchase at £199. The TRACKER
unit subscription cannot be subscribed to
for longer than five years from the date of
purchase and a new TRACKER unit would
need to be installed and registered separately
after the five year period has elapsed.
Operation - using the key fob
Each STINGER 310 is supplied with two key
fob style radio controllers, which are used to
operate the alarm system. Each key fob has
four buttons which can be used as follows;
LED Torch button
Press and hold the button to use
the torch for night time convenience
• Once located TRACKER will inform you.
The device works in some (but not all)
European countries (further details of which
can be obtained from TRACKER). http://www.
TRACKER.co.uk/
Press and release the button to arm
the alarm (one beep)
TRACKER’s telephone number is:
0845 602 2356
Press and release the button to
disarm the alarm (two short beeps)
Arm / Disarm button
To arm the alarm without the PIR
movement sensor (if you leave pets
inside etc)
Press and hold the arm button and
release after you hear one beep
followed by two beeps
Awning Light button
Press and release the button to
turn the awning light on or off (note:
awning light control is an optional
feature not present in all caravan
models)
51
S A FE T Y A ND S E CURITY
ALARM SYSTEM
Programming Mode button
Press and hold the button for
10 seconds to access the 3
programming modes, which are
indicated by series of long beeps, as
follows:
One long beep
- Tilt sensor sensitivity adjustment
Press the arm/disarm button to select the
required setting. 1 beep = low sensitivity
for windy conditions. 2 beeps = standard
sensitivity (default). 3 beeps = High sensitivity.
Press the program mode button to move to
the next setting.
Two long beeps - Beeper volume
Press the arm/disarm button to cycle through
the 7 available volume levels. When you are
happy with the selected volume, press the
program mode button to move to the next
setting.
Three long beeps
- PIR movement detector sensitivity
Press the arm/disarm button to select the
required setting / pulse count. 1 beep = high
sensitivity 2 beeps = standard sensitivity
(default). 3 beeps = Low sensitivity for hostile
environments.
Press the program mode button again
to exit programming mode, which is
indicated by one extra long beep.
Operation - the PIR internal
movement sensor
The STINGER 310 comes complete with
a 120° Passive Infra Red (PIR) internal
movement sensor that detects body
movement within the vehicle.
If you are leaving pets
within the vehicle the
system should be armed
without the PIR sensor
active (see key fob arm/
disarm section) to prevent
your pet from triggering the
alarm.
Please be aware that direct sunlight onto the
PIR lens, or extremes of temperature (above
30 deg C) may affect the operation of the
detector. Always ensure roof light blinds are
closed if sunlight could shine directly onto
the PIR.
Operation - the tilt sensor
The STINGER 310 incorporates a new
electronic tilt and motion sensor with
automatic calibration and easy sensitivity
adjustment from the key fob. This feature
provides excellent tilt detection with no
moving parts.
The tilt sensor works automatically and does
not need adjustment for normal use even if you
park on a steep incline. The sensitivity of the
sensor can be adjusted as described in the
key fob programming section.
Operation - awning light
(model specific)
When the STINGER 310 alarm system is
armed or disarmed the Awning light will be
activated for a period of one minute to provide
illumination whilst entering or exiting the
caravan. The Awning light can be turned off
during this period by pressing the Awning light
button on the key fob if required.
(Note: awning light control is an optional
feature not present on all caravan models)
The Awning light can be turned on or off at
any time by pressing and releasing the
Awning light button.
52
ALARM SYSTEM
Alarm siren
The STINGER 310 system unit uses a special
4.8 volt Nickel Metal Hydride battery pack that
supplies backup battery power to the system
should the supply from the leisure battery fail
or be disconnected.
The STINGER 310 contains a dual sounder
unit that provides the loud alarm siren and the
volume adjustable beeper sound.
It is recommended that the alarm system
is permanently connected to a 12 volt
supply. When fully charged the battery will
provide approximately 6 months standalone operation, depending on temperature
conditions. It is recommended that this battery
pack is replaced every 3 years.
Before placing your caravan in storage please
ensure the caravan has had a fully charged
leisure battery fitted or the mains charger
switched on for at least 14 days prior to
storage to ensure the internal backup battery
is fully charged. It is recommended that a
leisure battery remains connected to the
caravan during storage.
Always dispose of old batteries in accordance
with local regulations.
When the alarm is triggered the siren will
sound for 2 minutes. Following the 2-minute
period the alarm will then deactivate for 15
seconds and then rearm.
The alarm siren can be turned off at any point
by pressing the key fob arm/disarm button.
When the alarm is disarmed the Beeper will
sound two beeps to confirm the disarm. If the
alarm has been triggered during the armed
period the beeper will sound three beeps if the
PIR triggered the alarm or four beeps if the Tilt
Sensor caused the alarm. If you hear multiple
pips (short beeps) when you disarm the alarm,
this indicated that the internal backup battery
is low and therefore should be charged.
The beeper volume can be adjusted using the
key fob programming feature described earlier.
System specification
Battery - key fob
System base unit:
The STINGER 310 key fob controllers use
two lithium button cells (CR 2032) in each key
fob. Please note that excessive use of the
LED torch will reduce the life of the batteries
considerably.
• Supply voltage 6 to 15v DC
To replace the batteries, firstly remove the four
cross head screws from the underside of the
fob, then pull apart the two halves of the fob.
Remove the used batteries from the lower half
of the case, then insert the new batteries in the
same manner, noting that the battery positive
faces away from the green circuit board.
Now reassemble the fob casing and refit the
screws, taking care not to over tighten.
SA F E T Y A ND S E CURIT Y
Battery - system base unit
• Supply current 500mA max 5mA typical
• Operating temperature -5 to +30 deg Celsius
• Battery capacity 9Ah at 4.8v
• Siren output 110dB +/- 10% @ 1M
• Comprehensive interface connector (details
on request)
PIR movement sensor:
• Range 120 deg x 6M
Key fob controller:
• Range 6M typical
• Battery 2x CR2032 lithium button cell
• Typical battery life 1 year
53
S A FE T Y A ND S E CURITY
ALARM SYSTEM
Spare parts & service
The STINGER 310 system is supplied with
two key fob controllers as standard, but can
accommodate up to four controllers per
system. Extra fob can be purchased from your
supplier of direct from the manufacturer, and
can be added to the system by following a
simple procedure.
For accessories, interface harnesses,
installation documentation, spare parts,
local supplier contact details or other service
information please contact: Sargent Electrical
Services Ltd. service desk on 01482 678981
during normal office hours.
Further technical information is available at
www.sargentltd.co.uk
For future reference it may be useful to note
your alarm system serial number below, which
can be found on the sticker attached to the
alarm system base unit.
Serial number:
……………………………….…….
54
SERVICES
Plumbing connections............................................................................................................ 58
Plumbing troubleshooting....................................................................................................... .58
SE RVICE S
Water System......................................................................................................................... 56
Pressure switch adjustment..................................................................................................... 60
Ultraflow Water Intake Housing............................................................................................... 60
Sanitising water system.......................................................................................................... 61
Water Fault Finding................................................................................................................. 63
Typical gas schematic drawing............................................................................................... 65
Gas ....................................................................................................................................... 66
Types of gas .......................................................................................................................... 68
Gas safety advice .................................................................................................................. 68
Awning space ventilation ....................................................................................................... 68
Changing a gas cylinder ......................................................................................................... 69
Gas Fault Finding ................................................................................................................... 70
Electrical system .................................................................................................................... 71
Overseas connection ............................................................................................................. 71
13 Pin tow vehicle connections .............................................................................................. 72
230V mains electrical equipment power consumption ........................................................... 73
Wiring of connecting cable and caravan mains inlet ............................................................... 74
Typical appliance consumption figures .................................................................................. 75
55
S E RVICE S
WATER SYSTEM
Water system- Introduction
All Swift Group caravans water systems have
been designed around a pump fitted within
the caravan. This pump draws water from an
external source, to provide water pressure
within the caravan, whenever it is switched on
and water is available.
The schematic below shows the basic
configuration of the water system with inboard
pump and no internal water tank:
When power is supplied to the pump, it will
draw water from the external container through
the water inlet mounted on the side of the
caravan, and pump it to the caravan taps,
shower and water heater.
The pump is fitted with its own pressure
switch, and the pump will continue to pump
water, until the pressure of water on the output
of the pump reaches a pre-set level. For this
pressure to be achieved, the taps must be
closed.
When the taps are opened, water will leave
the tap via the spout, and the pressure in the
pipes between the pump and the taps will
reduce. Because of this reduction in pressure,
the pressure switch on the pump will switch
back on and the pump will again run to pump
more water.
56
Close to the pump, the water under pressure
is split into two paths:
1. Through blue water pipes routed directly to
the cold connection of each tap.
2. To the water heater.
Water from the pump enters the bottom of the
water heater. Once the water fills the water
heater (typically 10 litres), water then leaves the
water heater via a connection at the top of that
water heater. This water, which is still under
pressure, then routes to the hot connection of
each tap via red pipes.
WATER SYSTEM
• Ensure that the external water container
is full. An umbilical hose with baffle is
supplied with your caravan to connect
between the inlet and aqua roll or similar
container.
SE RVICE S
On Arrival at the campsite /
Priming the system
• Close all of the taps (kitchen sink, bathroom,
shower) except one, which should be open
in the hot position.
• Ensure that the water heater drain valve is
closed (move the Yellow handle on the floor
near the water heater to a
horizontal position).
• Switch the pump on using the button on the
control panel. Water will flow through the
open tap after a short time. This tap can then
be moved to the cold position and again
after a short time water will flow.
• Repeat the procedure at each tap, including
the external shower point
(model specific)
• When using a mains water connection
the pump will still need to be switched on to
supply water to the water heater,
taps and shower.
• If a mains water connection is used, please
ensure this is a Truma Waterline connection,
which has a built in pressure reducing valve.
• To drain / winterise the system please see
separate details later in this handbook.
57
S E RVICE S
WATER SYSTEM
Plumbing Connections
Troubleshooting
In most cases, speed fittings are used,
which allow easy and quick connection of
water pipes.
Pump will not start, when the tap is
opened:
To connect a pipe to a fitting, simply push the
pipe into the connector. To remove the pipe,
push the collar of the fitting inwards, and then
withdraw the pipe.
• Check power source(s), and ensure there is
sufficient voltage to run the pump.
• Check fuse(s).
• Ensure 'pump' LED is illuminated.
• Using a multi-meter, ensure there is power at
the pump. If not, refer to your dealer as there
maybe damaged cabling or a fault with the
fusebox.
• Is the pump hot? If so, allow to cool
before retrying.
• Has the vehicle been stored over winter?
Was it correctly winterised? If no, the pump
may have frozen, causing permanent
damage.
To connect a pipe, simply push the pipe into
the connector.
• The pressure switch may need adjusting.
See page 60 on how to do this.
Pump runs, but will not pressurise system
(i.e. no or little water being discharged
from taps) - Not Pulsing:
• Ensure water in source is present (onboard
tank or aqua roll).
• Check in-line pump filter is free from debris
and correctly fitted.
• Ensure water system has been primed
correctly, (see page 57) and there are no
air-locks present.
To remove a pipe, push the collar inwards, and
then remove the pipe.
• Ensure there are no restrictions
in the plumbing.
As a note, when refitting the pipe, ensure
the end of the pipe is round (not oval) and
the cut is square. If not, it could lead to
water leaks.
• Using a multi-meter, ensure there is power at
the pump. If not, refer to your dealer as there
maybe damaged cabling or a fault with the
fusebox.
• Ensure the inlet side of the pump (including
Truma inlet and in-line filter)
are watertight and not allowing air into
the system.
• Ensure the pump has good voltage.
• Check (using a mulit-meter) that the voltage
at the pump is between 10v-14.5v.
58
WATER SYSTEM
• Check for leaks on the high pressure side of
the pump.
SE RVICE S
Pump continues to run (for more than 5
seconds) after taps are closed or pump
turns on for no reason:
• Ensure water system has been primed
correctly, (see page 57) and there are no
air-locks present.
• Ensure the pump is securely mounted.
• Ensure the piping on the high pressure side
of the pump is in good condition (not blowing
or deforming).
• The pressure switch may need adjusting.
See page 60 for information on how to do
this.
Noisy or rough operation
• Check for leaks on the high pressure and
low pressure side of the pump.
• Ensure that all pipes (especially those within
150mm of the pump) are not touching any
furniture.
• Ensure the pump is securely mounted.
Pump rapidly cycles (switches on or off)
or water pulses from taps, including temperature pulsing:
• Check for leaks on the high pressure and
low pressure side of the pump.
• Ensure there are no restrictions in the
plumbing
• The pressure switch may need adjusting.
See page 60 for information on how to do
this.
59
S E RVICE S
WATER SYSTEM
Water pump pressure switch
The purpose of a pressure switch is to monitor
the pressure on the outlet side of the pump.
When a tap is closed, and the pump continues
to run, there is an increase of pressure in the
system, and when that pressure reaches a
pre-set limit, the pressure switch will turn the
pump off.
Water pump pressure
switch adjustment
Pressure switch
adjusting screw
Ultraflow water intake housing
Pressure Switch Adjustment, Truma/Flo-Jet
pump. (Normally Grey upper section with
White lower section/valve housing)
Operating instructions
• All of the Truma/Flo-Jet pumps used by Swift
are pre-set at 25psi - 31psi.
Plug the intake connector into the socket.
• To further adjust the pressure switch setting,
a cover cap must be first be removed from
the end of the pump to reveal a pressure
adjusting screw, as shown in the photos.
A maximum of 1/4 turn clockwise or
anti-clockwise, from the factory setting, is
advised. Turning the screw clockwise 1/4
turn will increase the pressure switch cut-out
pressure, turning the screw anti-clockwise
will reduce the pressure setting.
• Please note a second screw mounted
below the cover cap is set in position with
threadlock, this should not be disturbed.
Cover cap
Raise the lid, clean both the water socket and
the plug of the Intake Assembly.
Place the assembly into the water container,
ensuring that it is fully submerged before
operating the system. The Dust cover is to
stop contaminates falling into the
water container.
When water is first introduced, or the water
supply in the internal tank, or aquaroll, runs
out, air will be present in the pipework. It is
important that every tap is run to remove
any air in the system before, for instance, the
shower is used. Air left in pipework local to a
tap can act as an accumulator and affect the
ratio of hot and cold water flowing from other
taps or shower mixers in the system.
If the pump fails to deliver water the most likely
cause will be air in the system. Switch off the
pump and shake the pump assembly in the
external water container. Then switch on again.
60
SANITISING WATER SYTEM
Guidance on cleaning portable water
tanks and the water system in touring
caravans.
To remove the Intake Assembly from the Water
Intake Housing. To remove, pull the lower
trigger and pull out the hose plug.
! WARNING: Do not remove by pulling the
hose. Please ensure that the lid is properly
closed before driving!
Routine maintenance
Ensure that the O-ring seal on the hose plug
and the socket are free from dirt. To aid fitting
of the plug assembly smear the O-ring with
vegetable oil.
Notes
Before winter storage the water system must
be completely drained (see winterisation /
storage in the maintenance section).
Clean the water system at the start and end
of the season with sterilising fluid (see notes
under sanitising).
System care
Allowing water to freeze in the system may
result in damage to the pump and plumbing
system.
Non-Toxic antifreeze for potable water may be
used with Truma pumps. Follow manufacturers
recommendations.
! WARNING: Do not use automotive
antifreeze to winterize potable water
systems. These solutions are highly toxic
and may cause serious injury or death
if ingested.
SE RVICE S
Sanitising
The water systems, and in particular water
tanks, in caravans are susceptible to
contamination by bacteria if care is not taken
with their use and cleaning. The symptoms
caused by bacterial contamination are not
purely limited to gastro-intestinal diseases,
but may also manifest themselves as ear,
nose, throat, eye or skin infections. It is
therefore important that you carry out the
following procedure prior to using the caravan
each time, even if you boil or filter all water you
use for drinking.
Separate Water Containers
1. All water remaining in the container
should be disposed of so that the container
is empty.
2. The outside of the container should be
thoroughly cleansed and washed down to
remove any dirt, dust or other contaminant.
Water at a suitably hot temperature
containing an appropriate detergent is
recommended for this purpose.
3. Water should be put in the container, swirled
around, then emptied out.
4. The container should then be totally filled
with water containing an appropriate
sterilant solution and allowed to stand for
the recommended contact time.
5. The solution should be emptied from
the container.
6. The opening of the container should be
cleaned thoroughly with an appropriate
prepared wipe impregnated with a sterilant.
7. The container should be inverted whilst
stored overnight (if possible).
8. The container must be filled with mains
water only and mains water only should be
used for the above cleaning procedure.
9. On no account should garden hoses be
used to fill water tanks.
61
S E RVICE S
SANITISING WATER SYTEM
For Systems:
1. Drain down the system (open all taps
to allow air in, enabling the system to
drain quickly).
2. Remove any after market water filters fitted,
and replace with a short length of hose or
empty filter cartridge (this will ensure the
filter is not affected by the disinfectant/
sterilant solution).
3. Fill the system by using the pump with a
disinfectant/sterilant solution (check that
the solution at full strength appears at
all taps/showers). Allow to stand for the
recommended period of time.
4. Drain the system completely.
5. Thoroughly clean the outside of all taps/
connectors with a cloth soaked in the
disinfectant/sterilant.
6. Flush the system through with clean drinking
water until no traces of disinfectant/sterilant
can be detected at any tap.
7. Replace the filter.
Suitable sterilising chemicals are available from
your caravan dealer, accessory shop, chemist
or home-brew shops. It is not, however,
recommended to use bleach or sodium
metabisulphite.
Do not use products that contain aggressive
agents for sterilising the water system. Always
use a product designed for use within stainless
steel tanks available from your caravan
accessory superstore.
NOTE: Never use the water heating system
when disinfectant/sterilising fluid is present.
Doing so may damage the system.
62
WATER FAULTS
Fault
Cause
Remedy
Water not
flowing from
any tap when
operated but
pump runs
Freshwater tank empty
Check
Pump wired in reverse
Check wiring, refer to pump manufacturers
instructions
Pipe inlet or outlet pipe
disconnected
Check connections
Pump pipes restricted
by kinking
Check pipes run
Blockage in pump inlet or
outlet pipe
Check, starting inside freshwater tank
Blocked in-line filter of
pump filter
Dismantle and clean
Air leak in suction line
to pump
Check for bubbles.
Pump or tap
incorrectly wired
Refer to pump/tap manufacturers instructions
Pump fuse blown
Check wiring connection and then replace with
fuse of correct rating
Battery disconnected
Check connections
Pump seized or overheated
Refer to pump manufacturers servicing
instructions
Pressure pump sensing
switch may have failed
Refer to pump manufacturers servicing
instructions
Contacts may be faulty
Check contacts in plug and socket are clean
and making contact
Wiring connections may
be faulty
Check wiring connections
Feed pipe to water heater
incorrectly connected to the
heater outlet
Refer to installation instructions
Blockage in hot pipeline
Disconnect pipes and inspect.
Heater inlet or outlet pipes
kinked preventing flow
Check and re-route if necessary.
Pump does
not run
Water flows
from cold tap
but not from
hot
Hot tap not connected
Hot tap failed or blocked
SE RVICE S
Water
Check pipe and connect where required.
Disconnect and inspect.
Refer to dealer.
Heater non-return valve
jammed
63
S E RVICE S
WATER FAULTS
Water
Fault
Cause
Remedy
Water flows
from hot
tap but has
reduced flow
from cold
Cold water pipe kinked
preventing flow
Check and re-route if necessary
Blockage in cold pipe line
Disconnect pipes after 1st connector and
check up to tap
Cold tap not connected
Refer to installation instructions
Cold tap failed or blocked
Disconnect and inspect
Battery condition low
causing pump to
run slowly
Check battery state of charge,
refer to electrical supply note
If new taps have been fitted
they may be restricting flow
Disconnect and check that they have at least
1/4” (6.3mm) bore
Pump needs servicing
Refer to pump servicing instructions
Partially blocked pump filter
or in-line filter, if fitted
Dismantle and clean if necessary
Pump outlet pipe kinked
restricting flow
Check and re-route if necessary
Reduced flow
from both hot
and cold taps
64
Water leak
Check all water connections
Reduced flow
from either tap
Pipe kinking restricting flow
Check and re-route if necessary
If pump motor
runs steadily
and will not
stop
Battery voltage may be
too low (below 10.5 volts)
Check that there is water in the container
Adjust switch and/or re-charge battery
Check all connections in pipework.
Pressure Switch setting
problem
Adjust settings.
Regulator
Alde or Truma
heating Appliance
Manifold
Fridge
Hob/Grill/Oven
Or
Hob and Grill
SE RVICE S
Note: Depending on the caravan model, the gas isolation tap for the water heater maybe located close to the appliance.
BBQ (when fitted)
Typical gas schematic drawing with
Alde or Truma heating appliance
GAS SCHEMATIC
65
S E RVICE S
GAS
Gas
General information
Gas Cylinders
Bottled Liquified Petroleum Gas (LPG) is the
most convenient portable source of fuel for
your caravan. Make sure that heating and
cooking appliances and the gas cylinders are
switched off before you move the caravan.
Regularly check flexible gas hose, joints and
connections for tightness.
Finally make sure that each gas appliance is
working efficiently to the recommendations of
the appliance manufacturers.
and BP Gas Light cylinders and two universal
support cradles with straps for retaining the
bodies of the cylinders at mid to high level and
two universal support cradles with straps for
retaining the bodies of the cylinders at mid to
high level.
! WARNING: Ensure that the hose
assembly is not under stress when
connected to the cylinder.
Regulators
Only use gas bottle cylinders that are located
within their dedicated position within the front
gas bottle housing, never extend hose - hose
lengths must not exceed 400mm.
Gas Hoses
A high pressure hose must be used with the
regulator to connect to the gas bottle.
LPG cylinders i.e. Propane, Butane and
Camping Gaz cylinders all have varying
cylinder adaptor connections. It is important to
check you have the correct hose and adaptor
to suit your gas cylinders. Push on hoses are
no longer permitted under the new regulations,
The new high-pressure hoses have threaded
connections and must be securely attached to
the regulator and to the gas cylinder.
Ensure that there is a constant rise in the
flexible gas hose between the gas cylinder
outlet and the regulator elbow.
! WARNING: Inspect flexible gas hose(s)
regularly for deterioration and renew as
necessary with the approved type, in any
case no later than 5 years after the date of
manufacture marked on the hose.
! WARNING: Ensure hoses do not
become entangled in door mechanism.
Cylinder compartment
All cylinder compartments have two universal
plastic mouldings fitted to the floor of the
compartment that are designed to fit both steel
66
Your caravan is supplied with a wall mounted
gas regulator plumbed inside the gas cylinder
compartment. The regulator and all appliances
work at a harmonised 30mb pressure, which
work with Butane and Propane gas.
Pressure regulation system in this vehicle has
a fixed working pressure of 30 mbar with a
flow rate of 1.5 kg/h and complies with the
requirements of EN 12864 annex D.
Note: Regulator valves and cylinder valves
should always be in the ‘OFF’ position when
towing and storage.
! WARNING: When leaving the caravan
for any period of time or storage always turn
off the gas at the gas cylinder.
Note: Never allow modification of electrical
or LPG systems and appliances except by
qualified persons.
GAS
To use safety devices:
1. Open cylinder valve
2. Firmly press the hose rupture protection
(green button) on the high pressure hose
SE RVICE S
DuoControl (Model Specific)
3. If necessary (eg. after a new installation
or inadvertently striking the gas cylinder
against the gas pressure regulation system),
press the green rest button (crash sensor
triggering element reset) on the regulator
The DuoControl combines the gas pressure
regulator and the changeover valve in one unit
for operation as a two-cylinder system. When
the operating cylinder is empty, DuoControl
automatically changes over to the reserve
cylinder.
! WARNING: Isolate cylinders when
re-fuelling
General
• Combines a gas pressure regulator and a
changeover valve in one unit
Regularly check flexible gas hose, joints and
connections for tightness. Finally make sure
that each gas appliance is working efficiently
to the recommendations of the appliance
manufacturers.
• Automatically switches over to the
reserve cylinder
The LPG system should be inspected annually
by a competent person.
• Complies with EN 13786
Only use gas cylinders that are located within
their dedicated position within the gas bottle
housing, never extend the hose - hose lengths
must not exceed 400mm.
The Truma Drive Safe Regulator approved
for en-route heating (model specific)
We do not recommend the use of an inline
LPG BBQ with the 1.2kg/H regulator when
other LPG appliances are in use.
! WARNING: Unless en-route heating is
in use the LPG cylinder valve should be
closed when driving.
Safety cut off devices
(Suitable for use when
travelling)
Fig. 1
Approved for en-route heating if your caravan
has a factory fitted habitation en-route LPG
heating system that can be used whilst
travelling. Fig 1 shows the two safety valves
features that are part of the system, these are
there for your safety whilst using the system
when travelling. When in use ensure all other
gas appliances are separately isolated.
67
S E RVICE S
TYPES OF GAS
Types of gas
Propane
Propane is supplied in red, or partly red
bottles which have a female left hand threaded
connector.
Scandinavian countries use the same
connector.
Germany and Austria supply propane with a
male connection.
Propane will work at temperatures as low as
-40°C and is therefore suitable for all winter
caravanning.
Butane
Butane is supplied in the U.K. in green or
blue cylinder.
All these have a male left hand thread
EXCEPT for Camping Gaz which has a special
female right hand thread and Calor 7kg and
15kg and aluminium cylinders which have a
special clip-on connection.
There is no danger of pollution of an enclosed
awning space by the LPG exhaust from a
refrigerator venting into it, as awning spaces
are generally well ventilated.
Space heaters may produce sufficient exhaust
to pollute the awning space, if it is totally
enclosed, from a general comfort, smell and
hygiene point of view. In the extreme case
there could be a build up of carbon dioxide to
a dangerous level.
Caravan owners are advised to allow some
fresh air circulation in the awning space when
such appliances are in use.
Precautions
a. Never look for a leak with a match. Always
use a soap solution or its equivalent when
testing connections. Do not operate any
electrical apparatus whatsoever, especially
light switches. If the leak is not obvious, the
caravan should be evacuated and qualified
personnel consulted.
Continental cylinders usually have a male left
hand thread similar to but not identical with
U.K. butane.
b. Avoid naked lights when connecting or
changing a cylinder.
Butane is only suitable for use at temperatures
down to 2°C and will not work below that.
d. The gas is heavier than air and therefore
sinks to the lowest point.
Gas safety advice
e. Keep bottle gas containers outside (and
protected against frost). If they must be
kept inside make sure they are well away
from heat.
! WARNING: If you smell gas or suspect
a leak or in the event of a fire and if it is safe
to do so, isolate the gas appliances and turn
off the gas bottles at the regulator. Evacuate
the caravan and ventilate. Seek professional
advice as to the cause of the leak.
Facts about LPG
• LPG is not poisonous.
• Bi-products are harmless.
• There is danger if all air and oxygen
were excluded.
• (Ventilation holes must be kept clear
at all times).
68
Awning Spaces LPG Appliance Exhaust
• LPG has been given a smell by the
manufacturers in order to identify leaks.
c. Check the flexible hose frequently.
! WARNING: Do not use appliances with
a different working pressure to 30mbar.
! WARNING: Maintain adequate spacing
of combustible materials from sources
of heat.
! WARNING: Do not use independent
portable gas appliances inside the vehicle.
Cookers shall not be used as heaters
! WARNING: A BBQ point inlet valve, if
fitted, must only be used for the connection
of portable LPG appliances.
ON
Changing a gas cylinder
Please use the correct size spanner for the gas
hose connectors as this will prevent damage
to the screw fittings and ensure that the fitting
is tightened sufficiently.
• Close the empty gas cylinder's valve
• Remove the high pressure hose from the gas
cylinder.
• Attach the high pressure hose to the full gas
cylinder.
• Open the full cylinder's valve.
• Press the hose-break safety device.
Check the hose connection to the cylinder
valve for leaks
Ensure that the gas regulator hose is correctly
connected to the gas cylinder in gas bottle
compartment and that the hose connection
is tight.
Gas bottles must be fully located, seated at
the base of the bottles and restrained by the
strap provided in the dedicated compartment
position. Straps are positioned to suit 6kg
Calor Lite cylinders.
! WARNING: If using cylinders other
than those recommended, the user must
ensure these are adequately supported,
ventilation openings must not be obstructed
and the cylinders must not cause damage
to other fixtures and fittings located in the
compartment.
Open ended gas hoses must always be
protected from dirt and insects.
Before turning on the gas supply at the
regulator, ensure that all gas operated
equipment in the caravan is turned off.
All gas equipment (except barbecue and
some water heaters) is supplied through
a central Gas Manifold System which has
individual isolation taps for each appliance
(Fig A), as follows:
SE RVICE S
! WARNING: Always read individual
appliance instructions
OFF
Fig. A
WHITE -Combi / Alde boiler
BLUE -Fridge
GREEN - Oven
Note: the external barbecue point is
fed from the main feed through a built in
integrated isolation valve. See schematic
layout for details.
Note: In some installations the water heater
is fitted with a separate isolation valve.
Flue installations
All flue installations should be inspected
once a year throughout their length for
corrosion. Flues should be replaced if any
sign of perforation is found. Ensure that the
replacement is of an approved type and fitted
by a qualified and competent person.
Thermal insulation heating
Your caravan has been designed and
manufactured to a grade 3 thermal insulation
and heating level for specific climatic
conditions and tested according to the
procedure in EN1645-1.
The classifications are as follows:
Grade 1
A caravan with an average thermal
transmittance (u) that does not exceed
1.7w/(m2k).
Grade 2
A caravan with an average thermal
transmittance (u) that does not exceed
1.7w/(m2k) and which can achieve an average
temperature difference of at least 20ºC
between inside and outside temperatures
when the outside temperature is 0°C.
69
S E RVICE S
GAS FAULTS
Grade 3
A caravan with an average thermal
transmittance (u) that does not exceed
1.2w/(m2k) and which can achieve an average
temperature difference of at least 35ºC
between inside and outside temperatures
when the outside temperature is -15°C.
GAS
Fault
Cause
Remedy
Hob does
not light
No gas
Check level of gas in the cylinder
Check gas cylinder valve is on
Check gas taps are on
Air in pipe
Purge system
Refer to hob manufacturers instructions
No gas
Check level of gas in the cylinder
Check gas cylinder valve is on
Check gas taps are on
Air in pipe
Purge system
Refer to oven manufacturers instructions
No gas
Check level of gas in cylinder
Check gas cylinder valve is on
Check gas taps are on
Check exhaust outlet is clear
Over gassed
Air in pipe
Turn off appliance, wait 2 minutes and try
again
Purge system
Refer to space heater or boiler manufacturers
instructions
No gas
Check level of gas in the cylinder
Check gas cylinder valve is on
Check gas taps are on
Air in pipe
Purge system
Refer to fridge manufacturers instructions
Oven does
not light
Combi boiler
or Alde
appliance will
not light.
Fridge does
not light
70
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
General Information
It is strongly advised that the mains installation
is inspected periodically to ensure safe
use. The IET (BS7671) wiring regulations
recommend that mains installations in touring
caravans are re-inspected every 3 years.
The National Caravan Council lists the
qualifications necessary to perform this
inspection, but an NICEIC approved contractor
is probably the first choice.
On arrival at the campsite
• Disconnect hitch and 13 pin plug from the
towing vehicle.
• Place the 13 pin plug in the holder provided
to prevent damage.
• Switch on the main switch at the site supply
point.
Care point: It is good practice to test the RCD
(Residual Current Device) in the PSU before
switching on. There is a test button on the
RCD to test the lever, put the lever in the up
position (on) before testing.
SE RVICE S
The electrical system
Care point: As with the RCD it is good
practice to check the Miniature Circuit Breaker
(MCB) in the PSU. Switch all to the on position
(lever up). If any do not stay up then there is
a fault.
On departure from the campsite
• Switch off supply from the site, disconnect
the cable at both ends.
• Switch off RCD.
! WARNING: Current consumption in the
caravan must not exceed 16 amps or the
pitch permitted maximum if this is less than
16 amps.
Overseas connection
• Connection to a mains voltage overseas
requires particular attention.
13 pin plug example
• Check the suitability of the supply,
is it AC or DC, is the voltage and frequency
correct.
• Ensure that there is a proper earth
(3 pin socket outlet).
• Overseas supplies can be of
reverse polarity.
• Reverse polarity results in equipment not
necessarily being isolated when turned off,
reverse polarity indicator on the PSU will light
in the event of reverse polarity.
• If in doubt consult site staff.
• The only sure way to make equipment safe is
to unplug it.
• Make sure that the supply from the site is
switched off.
• It is useful to have a means of checking
polarity when overseas.
• Make sure that the charger switch on the
PSU is switched off.
• If it can be achieved then connect live to live,
and neutral to neutral to achieve full electrical
protection.
• Lift the cover on the electricity inlet on the
caravan, and insert the connector on the
flexible supply cable.
• At the site supply point, connect the other
end of the supply cable to this using the
socket provided.
! WARNING: Never allow modifications
of electrical or LPG systems and appliances
except by qualified persons.
71
S E RVICE S
13 PIN CONNECTION
13 pin connection
When using the 13 pin connector system for
the first time it is worth taking a few minutes
to familiarise yourself with the basic features of
the connectors.
Fig. 1 - Correct
alignment
Fig. 2 - Incorrect
alignment
degrees clockwise until a click is felt or heard,
at this point the cover flap can be allowed to
fall over the circular surface of the plug top
(figs 6 & 7).
To remove the plug it is important to rotate the
outer body a full 90 degrees anti-clockwise,
again until a click is heard or felt before
withdrawing the plug from the socket. This will
ensure that the inner and outer parts of the
plug are returned to a locked condition.
If the connector is not fully rotated anticlockwise prior to removing it from the socket
it is possible that the inner ring will become
'floating' and may result in a condition where
the protrusion will be incorrectly aligned (see
fig 2 & 3).
If this situation does occur then it can be
corrected by inserting the edge of the
protrusion on the plug into the groove in the
socket (fig 8) and rotating the plug body anticlockwise until a click is felt. This process will
re-establish the lock between the inner and
outer parts allowing the correct insertion of the
plug into the socket.
Fig. 3 - Incorrect
alignment
Fig. 4 - Alignment
marks
The important difference with the new 13 pin
plug, when compared to the old 12N/S type,
is that the plug has an inner ring assembly that
is independent from the outer body. Under
normal circumstances the inner ring and the
outer body will be locked in one position (see
fig 1).
72
When the plug is first inserted in the socket
body ensure that the locating protrusion (key)
matches the groove (keyway) in the socket
body. The outer body can then rotated a full 90
Fig. 5 - Socket
body (containing
female socket
terminals) fitted to
the car
Fig. 6
Fig. 7
Note: It is possible that the 230v mains
electrical equipment may not all operate
simultaneously. A typical UK site mains hook
up point provides a maximum output of 10
amps and on some continental sites the
available output may be as low as 5 amps.
If your loading exceeds the site supply it may
trip the site circuit breaker. Please check the
available mains supply with your site operator.
SE RVICE S
230V mains electrical equipment
power consumption
Similarly loadings on each circuit breaker
within the caravan should be observed.
A label positioned close to the MCB’s
(Miniature Circuit Breakers will identify which
appliances within the caravan are fed from
which MCB. Consulting the typical appliance
consumption figures table in conjunction
with this label, will give an indication of which
appliances can, and cannot, (site supply
allowing), be operated simultaneously.
Fig. 8
Plug inner ring
(containing
male pin
terminals fitted
to the caravan)
Plug outer
body with locating
groove and hood
fitted to the
caravan)
Fig.9
73
74
NEUTRAL BLACK
EARTH GREEN & YELLOW
EARTH
BROWN
LIVE
LIVE
EARTH
NEUTRAL
VIEW OF
SOCKET TUBES
NEUTRAL
EARTH
LIVE
VIEW OF
PINS
BLUE
NEUTRAL
EARTH
YELLOW & GREEN
BROWN
LIVE
VIEW OF
TERMINALS
FLEXIBLE 3 CORE CABLE 2.5mm2
The legal length of the mains inlet cable is 25 ± 2 metres. When in use it must be fully uncoiled and protected from traffic.
EARTH
GREEN &YELLOW
BLUE
NEUTRAL
VIEW OF
TERMINALS
EARTH
YELLOW & GREEN
BLUE
NEUTRAL
VIEW OF
TERMINALS
BROWN
LIVE
CABLE COUPLER
LIVE RED
FIXED WIRING
EARTH
LIVE
VIEW OF
PINS
NEUTRAL
EARTH GREEN & YELLOW
LIVE
NEUTRAL
VIEW OF
SOCKET TUBES
NEUTRAL BLUE
RED
LIVE
LIVE BROWN
FLEXIBLE WIRING
EARTH
GREEN &YELLOW
BLACK
NEUTRAL
VIEW OF
TERMINALS
PITCH SUPPLY
OUTLET
Wiring of connecting cable and caravan mains inlet
S E RVICE S
WIRING OF CONNECTING CABLES AND
CARAVAN MAINS INLET
Truma Combi 6kw Heating system
Not applicable
12 Volt
Watts
Amperes
Only when driving
Only when driving
13 W
1.1 amp
(avg)
13 W
1.1 amp
(avg)
12W
1.0 amp
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
Not applicable
0.4W 0.05 amp 6.1W
0.5amp
48 W
4.0 amp
Not applicable
245 - 460 g/h
Not applicable
70 - 161 g/h
Not applicable
117 g/h
125 g/h
Not applicable
Not applicable
480 g/h
320 g/h
LP Gas
grams/hour
13 g/h
16 g/h
SE RVICE S
Note: These are approximate figures for guidance only, and are subject to changes in specification. The figures show energy consumption
when an item or appliance is operating – i.e. a light is illuminated, or a heating system is providing space heating or water heating. Appliances
which feature LCD or illuminated control panels can have a low current consumption when in stand by mode, or have a constant low current
draw in the background to run their displays and electronic systems - these figures are typically 0.4 amps or less, for each applicable item.
These electronic items can in most cases be switched off individually, or, use of the System Shutdown button on the power supply unit isolates
all of these items.
Alde Heating System
Microwave (factory fit)
Aspire or Mini Grill Hob burners
Aspire Electric Hotplate
Aspire or Mini Grill burners
Aspire Oven
Battery Charger
12V LED Lights
(each, depending on size of light)
Pressure switched pump
3.9 / 7.8 amp
Amperes
0.6 amp
0.8 amp
3.9 / 7.8 amp
1050 / 2100 / 3150 W
4.6 / 9.1 / 13.7amp
1270 W
5.5 amp
Not applicable
850W
3.7 amp
Not applicable
Not applicable
690 W
3.0 amp
Not applicable
900 / 1800 W
Thetford Refrigerator
Dometic Refrigerator
Truma Combi 4kw Heating system
Appliance/ Item
230 Volt
Watts
140 W
190 W
900 / 1800 W
Typical appliance consumption figures
TYPICAL APPLIANCE CONSUMPTION FIGURES
75
S E RVICE S
SERVICES
76
ELECTRICS
Control Panel Operation ........................................................................................................... 81
Residual Current Device & Miniature circuit breakers................................................................. 82
Battery charger.......................................................................................................................... 83
E L E CT RICS
EC400 Power Control System................................................................................................... 78
Leisure Battery ......................................................................................................................... 83
12 Volt DC Fuses...................................................................................................................... 86
Electrical faults........................................................................................................................... 89
Technical Data & Approvals ...................................................................................................... 92
Battery box .............................................................................................................................. 93
Battery installation .................................................................................................................... 94
Solar panel connection point .................................................................................................... 95
Generator usage ....................................................................................................................... 96
Habitation relay.......................................................................................................................... 96
Exterior 230v socket.................................................................................................................. 97
77
E LE CTRICS
EC400 POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
EC400 Power control system
2.1 Power Supply Unit - Models
1. Introduction
A number of different PSU versions are used
within the system. The operation of each
model is very similar and is detailed below.
This section of the handbook will guide you
through the operation of the electrical system.
Further technical details are contained in
section 3 from www.sargentltd.co.uk
For the safe operation of all electrical
equipment within your Leisure Vehicle it is
important that you read and fully understand
these instructions. If you are unsure of any
point please contact your dealer / distributor
for advice before use.
The system has a number of key components
that you will need to be familiar with before
attempting to use the system, these are:
• The EC series Power Supply Unit (PSU)
a combined mains consumer unit and 12V
controller located in the front locker or bed
box area.
On locker mounted caravan versions this unit
also contains the provision for the Radio/CD
head unit.
• The EC series Control Panel (CP)
- a remotely located user control panel used
to turn circuits on and off and to display
battery and water tank information. This
panel uses simple straightforward controls
and reliable data communication to the PSU.
• Road Light Fuse Box
This small unit, which is unique to caravans,
is located in the front bed box. The unit
houses fuses for the road lighting circuits
and supplies from the tow vehicle, and also
has connectors for the optional alarm system
and Automatic Trailer Control (ATC) unit.
2 Using the System
The PSU is located in the front offside locker
area or front bed box in caravans.
78
EC400
EC400 POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
230V Components
Combi or
Alde installations
Space heater /Water
heater installations
Red indicator – Reverse polarity indicator, lights up
when the 230V supply polarity is reversed.
E L E CT RICS
2.2 Power Supply Unit - Component Layout
Green push switch – Charger switch, this switch
turns the 12V battery charger on or off. “In” is on
“out” is off.
Amber push switch – Combi or Alde boiler, this
switch turns the 230V supply to the combination
heater / central heating system on or off. In is on
out is off.
White - Spare
Black lever switch, far left – Residual Current
protection Device (RCD) and main 230V on / off
switch.
Yellow button, far left – RCD test button.
Red lever switches, right – 3 x 10A Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB) or 2 x 10A and
1x16A MCB’s.
12V Components
Black push switch, far left – System shutdown
switch, this switch turns the power control
system on or off. In is on out is off.
NOTE: LCD screen is not present on all
models.
Yellow push button, top right – Select button,
this button is used to scroll through the display
items on the LCD screen.
Red push button, bottom right – Set button,
this button is used to change the setting of the
displayed item on the LCD screen.
12V DC circuit protection fuses.
Fuse number 1 is top left;
Fuse number 14 is bottom, right.
See section 3.5 for full fuse allocation details.
79
E LE CTRICS
EC400 POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
2.3 Activating the System
The EC400 system has a shutdown feature
that should be used when the vehicle is in
storage or is not being used for long periods of
time. This allows the leisure electronics to be
turned off when not required to save battery
power. When in the off state the alarm and
tracking system supplies are still active, most
other supplies are turned off.
Before using the system please ensure the
shutdown switch is in the system on position
(button in).
2.4 Connecting to the Mains 230V supply
and Safety checks
For your safety it is IMPORTANT that you
follow these connection instructions each time
your Leisure Vehicle is connected to a mains
supply. This section assumes that the system
is complete and that a Leisure battery has
been installed (see 3.4).
a. E
nsure suitability of the Mains Supply. Your
Leisure Vehicle should only be connected
to an approved supply that meets the
requirements of BS7671 or relevant
harmonised standards. In most cases the
site warden will hold information regarding
suitability of supply. If using a generator you
also need to comply with the requirements /
instructions supplied with the generator.
Please note that some electronic generators
may not be compatible with your leisure
system. Further generator operational
information is contained elsewhere in this
manual.
b. Switch the PSU internal Power Converter
OFF. Locate the green ‘Charger’ power
switch on the PSU and ensure the switch
is in the off position (button out) before
connection to the mains supply.
c. C
onnect the Hook-up Lead. Firstly connect
the supplied hook-up lead (orange cable
with blue connectors) to the Leisure Vehicle
and then connect to the mains supply.
80
d. Check Residual Current Device operation.
Locate the RCD within the PSU and
ensure the RCD is switched on (lever in
up position). Press the ‘Test’ button and
confirm that the RCD turns off (lever in
down position). Switch the RCD back to
the on position (lever in up position). If the
test button failed to operate the RCD see
section 3.10.
e. Check Miniature Circuit Breakers. Locate
the MCB’s within the PSU (adjacent to the
RCD) and ensure they are all in the on (up)
position. If any MCB’s fail to ‘latch’ in the on
position see section 3.10.
f. Turn the PSU ON. Locate the black
‘Shutdown’ button and ensure it is in the on
position (press button in). Locate the green
‘Charger’ switch on the PSU and turn to the
on position (press button in). The charger
switch will illuminate when turned on.
g. Check correct Polarity. Locate the ‘Reverse
polarity’ indicator on the PSU and ensure
that the indicator is NOT illuminated. If the
indicator is illuminated see section 3.10.
h. Check operation of equipment. It is
now safe to operate the 12v and 230v
equipment.
2.5 Control Panel - Component Layout
Depending on your type of caravan the control
panel will vary in specification.
Not all features are present in all vehicles.
Please refer to the following diagrams to
identify your control panel.
EC400 POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
E L E CT RICS
EC400 - Control Panel
Mains supply
& charger on
Leisure battery
selected LED
Vehicle battery
selected LED
Vehicle battery
selection button
Vehicle battery
voltage gauge
Leisure battery
voltage gauge
Power on/off button
Water pump
on/off button
2.6 Control Panel Operation
• Power Button. Press the power button to
turn the leisure power on. Press the button
again to turn the power off. The adjacent
LED will illuminate when the power is on, and
also the voltage of the selected battery will
be displayed on the voltage gauge.
• Pump Button. With the power on, press
the pump button to turn the water pump on.
Press the button again to turn the pump off.
The adjacent LED will illuminate when the
pump is on, and also the level of the water
tank will be displayed on the water gauge.
• View Levels. To display the battery voltage
levels and the water tank levels on the
control panel gauges, press the levels
button. The display will remain illuminated for
10 seconds. It is possible to lock the display
‘on’ to allow continuous display. This can be
achieved by pressing and holding the view
levels button for 2-3 seconds until you hear
a beep. To turn this locked feature off, either
press and hold the view levels button again
for 2-3 seconds or turn the power off and
back on.
View levels button,
press to show
battery levels
• Battery Select. By default, the leisure
battery is selected as the power source if no
mains supply is present, or as the battery
to be charged when the mains supply is
available. To change the selected battery,
press the vehicle battery select button. The
selected battery is indicated by an LED
adjacent to the caravan or car logo.
• Mains on indication. When connected to a
230v supply the LED with a “lightning strike”
shown will be illuminated.
• Charging when the vehicle engine is
running. When the vehicle engine is running
both the vehicle battery and the leisure
battery LED’s will flash in unison to indicate
that they are connected together and are
being charged by the vehicle.
81
E LE CTRICS
EC400 POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
2.7 Operation while driving
The EC system is designed to shutdown parts
of the system while the engine is running.
This is to meet Electro Magnetic Compatibility
(EMC) regulations and to ensure the safe
operation of the caravan. This is indicated by
the two battery LED’s flashing together.
Please ensure the system shutdown switch
on the PSU is in the “on” (button in) position
before driving (see 2.2). This will ensure the
electronic system is active and will therefore
be able to control the charging process,
supply the refrigerator and monitor other
system circuits.
3.1 Residual Current Device &
Miniature Circuit Breakers
Residual Current
Device (RCD)
Miniature Circuit
Breakers (MCB’s)
RCD
Te st
button
3. System Technical Information
The following section provides further technical
information relating to the electrical system.
You can also access the supporting technical
manual from www.sargentltd.co.uk
The Residual Current Device (RCD) is basically
provided to protect the user from lethal electric
shock. The RCD will turn off (trip) if the current
flowing in the live conductor does not fully
return down the neutral conductor, i.e. some
current is passing through a person down to
earth or through a faulty appliance.
To ensure the RCD is working correctly, the
test button should be operated each time the
vehicle is connected to the mains supply (see
section 2.4)
The Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB’s) operate
in a similar way to traditional fuses and are
provided to protect the wiring installation from
overload or short circuit. If an overload occurs
the MCB will switch off the supply. If this
occurs you should investigate the cause of the
fault before switching the MCB back on.
82
EC400 POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
MCB
Rating
1
10 Amps
White
Output wire colour
230v Sockets
2
16 Amps
White
(Yellow for heating system)
Extra 230v Sockets /
heating system
3
10 Amps
Black
(Blue for water heater)
Fridge / Water heater / 12v
Charger (internally connected)
3.2 Battery Charger
The EC400 system incorporates an intelligent
three-stage battery charger / power converter.
During stage 1 the battery voltage is increased
gradually while the current is limited to start the
charging process and protect the battery. At
stage 2 the voltage rises to 14.4V to deliver the
bulk charge to the battery. When the battery
is charged, the voltage is decreased at stage
3 to 13.6V to deliver a float charge to maintain
the battery in the fully charged state. The
charger can be left switched on continuously
as required.
The battery charger / power converter also
provides power to the leisure equipment
when the mains supply is connected. This
module supplies DC to the leisure equipment
up to a maximum of 25 Amps (300 Watts),
therefore the available power is distributed
between the leisure load and the battery,
with the leisure load taking priority as per the
following example:
Lesiure Load
Available power
for battery
charging
5A
20A
10A
15A
15A
10A
20A
5A
Description
E L E CT RICS
The following table shows the rating and circuit
allocation for the three MCB’s
! WARNING: Under heavy loads the
Charger case may become hot. ALWAYS
ensure the ventilation slots have a clear flow
of air. Do not place combustible materials
against / adjacent to the Charger
3.3 Leisure Battery
a. Type / Selection
For optimum performance and safety it
is essential that only a proprietary brand
LEISURE battery is used with a typical
capacity of 75 to 120 Ah (Ampere / hours). A
normal car battery is NOT suitable.
This battery should always be connected
when the system is in use. The PSU is
configured to work with standard lead acid
leisure batteries, and in most cases is also
compatible with the latest range of Absorbed
Glass Matt (AGM) batteries. Before fitting
non-standard batteries please check that the
charging profile described in 3.2 is suitable for
the type of battery by referring to the battery
documentation or battery manufacturer.
The battery feed is fitted with an inline fuse
between the battery and the electrical harness,
and is usually located immediately outside the
battery compartment or within 500mm of the
battery. The maximum rating of this fuse is 20A
per battery.
83
E LE CTRICS
EC400 POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
b. Installation & Removal
Always disconnect the 230v mains supply
and turn the PSU green charger switch to the
off position (button out) before removing or
installing the battery.
When connecting the battery, ensure that the
correct polarity is observed (black is negative
[-] and red is positive [+]) and that the terminals
are securely fastened. Crocodile clips must not
be used.
! WARNING: Explosive gases may be
present at the battery. Take care to prevent
flames and sparks in the vicinity of the
battery and do not smoke. Switch off all
appliances and lamps before connecting or
disconnecting the leisure battery.
c. Operation / Servicing
Under normal circumstances it should not
be necessary to remove the battery other
than for routine inspection of the terminals
and “topping up” of the battery fluid where
applicable. Please see instructions supplied
with the battery.
Note: Do not over discharge the battery.
One of the most common causes of
battery failure is when the battery is
discharged below the recommended level
of approximately 10v. Discharging a battery
below this figure can cause permanent
damage to one or more of the cells within
the battery.
12V Operation of Electrical Items
Most appliances within your caravan are
designed to function when supplied with a
12V feed, either from a leisure battery or the
on-board charger.
However, customers should note that some
items may have limited functionality when the
battery is in a lower voltage state (i.e. circa
10V). The Swift Group makes every effort
when specifying components to operate at low
voltages, but is not responsible if a component
fails to work at lower voltages.
84
Components that are typically affected by low
battery voltage include, but are not limited to,
the pump, the radio and some lights which
require higher voltages for start-up.
To prevent over discharge, the EC400 system
incorporates a battery protect circuit that
warns the users and then disconnects the
batteries when they fall below set values.
If the power is turned on and the leisure
battery level falls below 9V a warning beep will
be heard and the leisure battery gauge 10V
LED will flash. To cancel the warning, press the
levels button.
If the power is turned on and the vehicle
battery level falls below 10.9V a warning beep
will be heard and the vehicle battery gauge
10V LED will flash. To cancel the warning,
press the levels button.
These warnings will not be repeated unless
the power switch is turned off and on again.
This is to ensure the warning does not become
a nuisance.
EC400 POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
Voltage cut off
Action after cut off
Notes
Vehicle
10.9v
Battery selection is changed
from Vehicle battery to
Leisure battery. If the leisure
battery is below 9v then a
further warning will occur
(see below).
This cut off level is designed
to protect the vehicle battery
from over discharge. The
10.9v level ensures there
is sufficient power in the
battery to run the vehicle
electronics and start the
vehicle. This cut off only
applies to power drawn from
the battery by the leisure
equipment; it will not protect
the battery if you leave
vehicle circuits switched on,
such as the road lights.
Leisure
9v
Power is turned off.
This is an emergency cut off
level to protect the battery
from severe damage. You
should not rely on this cut off
level during normal operation, but manage your power
consumption to a discharge
level of 10v.
E L E CT RICS
Battery
This cut off only applies
to power drawn from the
battery by the leisure equipment that is controlled by
the control panel power
switch; it will not protect
the battery from discharge
by permanently connected
equipment.
85
E LE CTRICS
EC400 POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
3.4 12 Volt DC Fuses
! WARNING: When replacing fuses
always replace a fuse with the correct value.
NEVER replace with a higher value / rating
as this could damage the wiring harness.
If a replacement fuse ‘blows’ do not keep
replacing the fuse as you could damage the
wiring harness. Please investigate the fault
and contact your dealer.
! WARNING: Only fit fuses that are
manufactured to ISO 8820-3:2010. Using
poor quality imitations is dangerous.
The following table shows the fuse allocation
for the 15 fuses fitted to the PSU. Please note
that fuses are dependant on PSU versions, so
not all fuses may be present.
Fuse
Rating
Fuse colour
1
20 Amps
Yellow
Description
Not used in caravan application
2
15 Amps
Blue
Not used in caravan application
3
7.5 Amps
Brown
Not used in caravan application
4
15 Amps
Blue
Not used in caravan application
5
10 Amps
Red
Extractor Fans / Combination
Heating Systems
6
10 Amps
Red
12V Sockets / TV Amp / Radio (caravan radio supply)
7
10 Amps
Red
Front Internal Lighting
8
10 Amps
Red
Water Pumps / Toilet
9
15 Amps
Blue
Not used in caravan application
10
10 Amps
Red
Not used in caravan application
11
10 Amps
Red
Bathroom lights
12
5 Amps
Tan
Electronics / Fridge / Alarm
13
5 Amps
Tan
Oven Ignition / Water Heater (where
applicable / Separate water heater)
14
10 Amps
Red
Rear Internal Lights
15
25 Amps
White
Charger (fitted internally to PSU)
The following table shows details of the fuse(s)
located at the Leisure battery. See also 3.3A
86
Fuse
Rating
Fuse colour
Battery 1
20 Amps
Yellow
Description
Fuse remotely located near battery
EC400 POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
Fuse
Rating
Fuse colour
1
20 Amps
Yellow
2
5 Amps
Tan
3
5 Amps
Tan
Right Hand Indicators
4
5 Amps
Tan
Fog Lights
5
6
Description
E L E CT RICS
The following table shows details of the fuse(s)
located at the Road Light fuse box, on the
front wall inside the front bed.
Fridge Supply 12V
Left Hand Tail Lights
Spare location
20 Amps
Yellow
Car Battery Supply 12V
7
5 Amps
Tan
Right Hand Tail Lights
8
5 Amps
Tan
Left Hand Indicators
9
7.5 Amps
Brown
10
5 Amps
Tan
Stop Lights
Reverse Lights
3.5 System Status and
Configuration display
Depending on specification, the PSU may
feature an LCD display and two control
buttons that allow system information to be
viewed or settings changed.
Press the top yellow ‘select’ button to change
the item being viewed. Press the bottom red
‘change’ button to change the setting. Both
buttons work on a continuous loop, so if
you want to return to an item or setting keep
pressing the button until the required item is
reached.
87
E LE CTRICS
EC400 POWER CONTROL SYSTEM
3.6 Warnings and Alerts
If the vehicle engine is started whilst the
caravan is connected to the 230v supply, a
warning beep will be heard. This is to warn
you to remove the 230v supply before driving
away.
When the vehicle engine is running both the
vehicle battery and the leisure battery LED’s
will flash in unison to indicate that they are
connected together and are being charged by
the vehicle.
Low water level and waste tank, if the fresh
water level drops to below 25% a warning
beep will be heard and the fresh gauge empty
LED will flash. To cancel the warning, press the
levels button. If the waste water level rises to
full (100%) a warning beep will be heard and
the waste gauge full LED will flash. To cancel
the warning, press the levels button.
Low voltage warning and cut off, if the power
is turned on and the leisure battery level falls
below 9V a warning beep will be heard and
the leisure battery gauge 10V LED will flash. To
cancel the warning, press the levels button. If
the power is turned on and the vehicle battery
is selected (being used) and the level falls
below 10.9V a warning beep will be heard and
the vehicle battery gauge 10V LED will flash.
To cancel the warning, press the levels button.
88
POWER CONTROL SYSTEM FAULTS
Fault
No 230 volt output from PSU
Reverse Polarity
light is illuminated
on PSU
Possible Cause
Proposed Fix
Connecting lead between
the site and Leisure Vehicle
not connected
Check and connect lead as per 2.4C
RCD switched off
Reset RCD as per 2.4D
RCD not operating correctly
Check supply polarity; if the RCD continues to fail contact your Dealer as there is
probably an equipment or wiring fault.
MCB switched off
Reset MCB by switching OFF (down
position) then back ON (up position), if the
MCB continues to fail contact your Dealer
as there is probably an equipment or wiring fault.
No or deficient supply
from site
Contact site Warden for assistance
Other fault
Contact your Dealer
Mains Supply reversed?
The reverse polarity light is designed
to illuminate when the Live and Neutral
supply has been reversed / crossed over.
If the light illuminates there is a problem
with the site supply or the cable connecting the supply to your vehicle. The light is
designed to work on UK electrical supplies
(where the neutral conductor is connected
to earth at the sub station). If you are using
your vehicle outside the UK this light may
illuminate when no fault exists. In these
cases consult the site warden for advice.
E L E CT RICS
3.7 Common Fault Table
89
E LE CTRICS
POWER CONTROL SYSTEM FAULTS
3.7 Common Fault Table cont.
Reverse Polarity
light is illuminated
on PSU
Generator being used
‘The Reverse Polarity warning light is
on when using my Generator’. This is
a normal side effect when using some
types of generator. Instead of connecting the neutral conductor to earth,
some generators centre tap the earth
connection making both neutral and
live conductors 110v above earth. This
110v difference causes the neon polarity
indicator to illuminate. In most cases it is
still safe to use the generator, but please
consult the generator handbook for
further information.
Control Panel
Problems
Control Panel has no display
Check batteries and fuses, turn PSU
shutdown switch and charger switch on
and ensure mains supply is connected.
Check control panel connecting lead at
PSU and behind Control Panel.
Contact your Dealer
12v Power turns off
Battery protect feature has operated to
protect the Vehicle battery and or the
Leisure battery. See 3.3C
Engine has been started, all equipment
has been disconnected to meet EMC
requirements. See 2.7
Control Panel locked /
erratic function
Observe control panel handling instructions
Control panel software may have
crashed. Reboot control panel by turning
off the PSU isolate switch. Wait 30 seconds then turn the switch back on.
90
Pump not working
No 230v supply
Check all above
Charger not switched on
Turn charger switch on, switch will illuminate
Battery not connected and /
or charged
Install charged battery as per 3.4
Power button on control panel
not switched to on
Turn power on at control panel
Battery flat /
Battery fuse blown
Recharge battery, check fuses, check
charging voltage is present at battery
Fuse blown
Check all fuses are intact and the correct
value fuse is installed as per fuse table
Equipment switched off /
unplugged
Check equipment is switched on and
connected to the 12v supply
PSU overheated / auto shutdown operated
Reduce load on system. Allow PSU to
cool down. PSU will automatically restart
when cool.
Other fault
Contact your Dealer
Fuse blown
Replace fuse with correct value as per
fuse table.
Pump turned off
Turn pump on by pressing the pump
button at the control panel.
E L E CT RICS
No 12 volt output
from PSU
Contact details
Sargent Electrical Services Limited, provide a
technical help line during office hours. Please
contact 01482 678981 if you require technical
help. For out of hours support please refer to
the tech support section of the Sargent web
site www.sargentltd.co.uk
91
E LE CTRICS
TECHNICAL DATA & APPROVALS
4 Technical Data & Approvals
4.1 Caravan Equipment –
Outline Specification
INPUT 230v
230 Volts / 0 to 16 Amps
OUTPUT 230v
RCD protected, 3 x MCB
outputs of 10A, or 2x10A and
1x16A
+ / - 10%
Separate switched channels
for water heater, space heater
and charger
INPUT 12v
2 x 20A battery inputs via 2 x
4 way connectors
OUTPUT 12v
25A total output via multiple
switched channels protected
by 14 fused outputs
CHARGER
Input 220-240 Volts AC +/10%, Frequency 50 Hz +/6%, Current 3A max.
Fixing centres 128*128mm
1.2kg
DC Output 13.6 to 14.4 Volts
nominal, Current 25 Amps
max (300 Watts).
Overall size
(HxWxD) 50 x 250 x 135mm
Signal INPUT
1 x Engine running, plus
multiple vehicle connections
Data IN / OUT
CANBUS Data communication and power to Control
Panel via 6 way connector
IP rating
IP31
Operating temperature
Ambient 0 to 35°Centigrade
PSU case temperature with
full load 65°C Max
92
Automatic shutdown and
restart if overheated / overloaded
System: BSEN 1648-1, BSEN1648-2
compliant, BS7671: 2008 compliant
Residual Current Device: RCD 40A 30mA trip
to BS EN 61008
Miniature Circuit Breakers: MCB’s type C
6000A breaking capacity to BSEN 60898
Electro Magnetic Compatibility (EMC) directive
2004/108/EC Certificate CE20071224-1
Integrated Charger: BS EN 60335-1/2.29,
2006/95EC, IEC61000-3.2/3:1995, 1.
Low Voltage Directive: 2006/95EC TUV014900-A1, EN55022, Class B, EN55024/
Level 2.
The battery box
The Battery Box is intended to accommodate
an auxiliary battery in your caravan. The
Battery Box has a CE socket to connect to a
230 V power supply. Inside the Battery Box
there is the option to fit several sockets and
outlets.
! WARNING:
• Use precaution when mounting the
battery, as batteries contain acid liquids
which can cause severe injuries and
damage when handled incorrectly. Refer to
the instructions on the battery.
• No smoking is allowed in the area of the
Battery Box!
• Please note that the CE socket has a max
of 16 amp.
• This product meets the latest version of the
EN 1648 part 1 and 2 standard.
efore placing the battery inside the Battery
B
Box, the battery should be placed in the
Soft Tray and rested on the ground adjacent
to the Battery Box. Carefully connect the
electrical wires (the red cable attaches to the
+ pole and the black cable to the - pole of
the battery).
Note: Incorrect connection of the cables
will cause a short circuit with potential
hazardous consequences.
After mounting the terminals, lift the battery
together with the Soft Tray into the middle
of the Battery Box compartment. Push the
battery to the back of the Battery Box.
E L E CT RICS
4.2 Approvals
The battery is then secured by restraining
straps (see figure A).
When attaching the 230 volt cable on the CE
socket, the maximum recommended thickness
of the cable is 10 mm. When closing the door,
the attached cable is to be fed through the slot
in the door.The maximum battery size that can
be fitted is 225mm high (including terminals) x
175mm deep x 353mm wide. The depth and
width dimensions include the rim around the
bottom used for securing the battery.
Figure A
Cleaning and maintenance
• Use protective clothing and glasses
when handling a leaking battery, and
avoid direct contact to the skin, eyes and
respiratory organ.
• Should a battery leakage occur, please act
according to the instructions supplied by the
manufacturer of the battery. Act with caution
as caustic substances are present in the
battery.
93
E LE CTRICS
BATTERY
• Always remove the battery and the power
cable before carrying out any maintenance of
the product.
• Before removing the clamps switch off
all electrical and gas appliances.
1. Do not leave all 12V appliances powered at
the same time as this will drain your leisure
battery more rapidly.
• Use a soft cloth or sponge and a non-acid/
abrasive detergent when cleaning the battery
box or soft tray.
2. If all 12V appliances must be powered
together, ensure the battery is ‘in-circuit’
and that the battery charger is turned on.
• To check if any acid is present in the soft tray
or bag, simply press it softly. A strong smell
from the soft tray may also indicate spilled
acid. Always treat spilled battery acid as
hazardous waste. Dispose of spilled battery
acid according to the local and national
regulations.
3. For optimum performance use the
transformer/charger unit with a leisure
battery attached.
• Before the camping season or extensive
travelling, check the soft tray or bag for faults
and replace if necessary.
• The cleaning of the battery box and soft tray
or bag should only be done after all power
sources have been switched off, in order to
prevent a hazardous situations.
Battery installation
Under normal circumstances it should not be
necessary to remove the battery other than for
routine inspection of terminals and ‘topping
up’ if required.
! WARNING: Explosive gases may be
present at the battery. Take care to prevent
flames and sparks in the vicinity.
Your caravan has been fitted with an in-line
fuse between the battery terminal and caravan
harness. It is recommended that the fuse
rating fitted in this location does not exceed
20 amps.
! WARNING: Switch off all electrical
and gas appliances and lamps before
connecting or disconnecting the battery.
Smoking is prohibited around the battery
compartment.
94
To preserve the life of your leisure battery and
charger please observe the following:
Battery
It is recommended that a good quality
rechargeable leisure battery is always in circuit
when the system is in use.
A deep cycling heavy duty 12V battery should
be purchased to provide power for lights and
other electrical appliances.
A proprietary brand leisure battery
with a minimum of 85 Amp capacity is
recommended.
Note: 85 Amp batteries and above
should be checked dimensionally before
purchasing, to ensure fitment within the
battery compartment, as brands vary in size.
It should be remembered that batteries
suitable for the electrical demands of a
caravan differ in design from those for use with
a car, and whilst the system may operate with
a car battery it is strongly recommended that
only a leisure type battery, maintained in good
condition is used. The battery should be kept
topped up at all times if required.
Note: Some models may have more than
one 12V socket fitted, the 6 Amps indicated
is available from the 12V socket provided no
other 12V socket is used at the same time.
SOLAR PANEL
A connection point has been included in
the caravan electrical harness to take a 12V
supply from an aftermarket solar panel (or
similar device), to the caravan leisure battery.
The solar panel must provide a fused and
regulated output in order to connect to this
point. When fitted the connection point can
be found inside the caravan adjacent to the
battery box, in close proximity to the battery
box fuse. Through the floor close to the
battery box is a cable pass through, allowing
a pair of wires from an externally located
device to pass from exterior to interior to
meet the connection point. This cable pass
through will be capped both internally and
externally with a cable entry gland.
A kit of parts is available from your caravan
supplier which provides the mating half of
the connection point. (The White rectangular
connector found inside the caravan is a two
way JST-LR type connector). For further
assistance in identifying the connection, wire
colours leading to the connector are detailed
in the wiring schematic in your caravan
service book.
power supply. Conditions allowing, the system
keeps the leisure battery 'topped up' during
storage, and will provide a daily boost to the
leisure battery when camping without a mains
230V supply.
E L E CT RICS
Solar panel connection point
(where supplied - model specific)
Battery power
As a guide an 80W panel is capable of
supplying up to 4.8 amps, +/- 1.5%.
Regulator
Unlike typical regulators, the factory fitted solar
panel regulator has been specially designed
to draw no power from the leisure battery
when the solar panel is not generating power.
This feature is desirable especially in winter
months when a normal regulator can gradually
discharge the leisure battery.
Regulator operation
Factory fitted Solar
Energy System
Depending on specification, your tourer may
be fitted with a solar panel and regulator.
This solar panel and regulator may provide
additional 12v power whenever sunlight is
available to the panel, and this will be directed
to the leisure battery whether the control panel
is ON or OFF, and regardless of the position of
the SYSTEM SHUTDOWN button. If a factory
fitted alarm system is present, that alarm will
in turn be able to use the leisure battery as a
The regulator operates automatically, turning
on and off as required to charge and maintain
the leisure battery. When the solar panel is
exposed to a source of sunlight the regulator
starts to operate. When the voltage from the
panel reaches a usable level, the Panel Output
LED will flash indicating that the battery is
being charged (see battery charging on next
page). If insufficient power is being generated
by the solar panel the regulator will turn off.
The regulator checks the solar panel output
every 30 seconds and turns on and off as
required. On overcast days when the solar
panel output is minimal the regulator can still
deliver a small charge, and in this mode the
LED's are not illuminated to conserve power.
95
E LE CTRICS
GENERATOR USAGE / HABITATION RELAY
Battery charging
If a leisure battery is fitted and requires
charging the Charge Status LED will illuminate.
Depending on the state of charge of the
battery this LED will illuminate red for bulk
charge (14.4V output) or green for float charge
(13.6V output). It may take a few hours to
several days to charge the battery depending
on its state of charge. When the battery is fully
charged the regulator will turn off to prevent
overcharging of the battery. If the mains
charger is turned on to charge the leisure
battery this can also cause the solar panel
regulator to turn off.
Power Supply Unit
The PSU does not need to be switched on
(shutdown button in) for the solar panel to
charge the battery, but if the PSU has an
LCD display then this can be used to see the
increase in battery voltage as the solar panel
charges the battery. During caravan storage
the PSU should be shutdown (shutdown
button out).
Control Panel
When the solar panel is operating the voltage
display on the leisure battery will increase if the
loads placed on the battery are sufficiently light.
Maintenance and cleaning
The solar panel will require cleaning periodically
in order to maintain the performance of the
panel, a caravan, car shampoo or simple soap
can be used; no abrasive cleaners should
be used.
Generator usage
Caution should be used before connecting a
generator to your caravan.
! WARNING: Never start or stop
the generator while electrical loads are
connected and switched on. Start the
engine, let it stabilise, then connect the
electrical load. To stop engine, disconnect
the electrical load and let engine stabilise
before switching off.
96
Whilst some generators use invertor technology, others use a more basic principle to
generate the 230v supply. Preference should
be to choose a generator which produces a
consistent sinusoidal wave form with accurate
voltage control.
The reverse polarity warning light may
illuminate when using a generator. This is a
normal side effect when using some types of
generator. Instead of connecting the neutral
and live conductors 110v above earth. This
110v difference causes the neon polarity
indicator to illuminate.
In most cases it is safe to use a generator, but
please consult the generator handbook for
further information.
Habitation relay
Habitation relays are fitted to caravans by
manufacturers to comply with the following
legislation:
1. The Road Vehicles (Construction and Use)
Regulations 1986 Regulation 60 - Radio
interference suppression
2. European Community Whole Vehicle Type
Approval (ECWVTA) framework directive
2007/46/EC and EU Regulation 661/2009
(General Safety) mandates UNECE
Regulation 10 (Vehicles with regard to
Electromagnetic compatibility).
A habitation relay must be fitted by
manufacturers, safe guarding the consumer.
The purpose of the relay is to disable nonhomologated appliances/components whilst
the vehicle is in transit.
Unitentional electromagnetic energy can be
created by non-homologated devices within
the habitation compartment, which could
cause a malfunction of the towing vehicles
electronic systems/components, including
safety critical items such as air bags, ABS
braking etc.
EXTERIOR 230V SOCKET
The recessed electric socket is designed
to give you a convenient electrical access
point on the outside of the caravan, which is
completely protected from the weather, even
when in use.
E L E CT RICS
Exterior 230V socket (when fitted)
With the caravan stationary and connected to
a 220v/240v supply, raise the front cover of the
socket and insert the plug of the equipment to
be used. Close and latch the cover into place
to provide a weatherproof seal.
Please remember that the equipment
plugged into the socket may or may not be
weatherproof.
Note: Care should be taken when opening
the socket cover.
To disconnect equipment, raise socket cover
and remove plug, then close and latch the
cover into place to ensure a weatherproof seal.
Before moving the caravan from a pitch ensure
that all accessory points are disconnected and
latched in the closed position to prevent the
ingress of water or other foreign matter from
causing damage to the point or any of the
caravans services.
Any item plugged into this socket will be
supplied by the same 10A breaker (MCB) as
the other items plugged into sockets within
the caravan. Please take into account the
total loading placed on the socket circuit and
the site supply before switching equipment
on. The socket should be used to power a
single appliance with an appropriate power
consumption rating – the socket is NOT
suitable for use as a supply to power an
adjacent caravan or motorhome.
97
98
E LE CTRICS
FITTED EQUIPMENT
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Truma combination boiler ...................................................................................................... 100
Truma heating system and air flow ........................................................................................ 101
Truma CP Plus digital timer control ....................................................................................... 101
Truma combination boiler fault finding ................................................................................... 114
Truma combi boiler controls .................................................................................................. 116
ALDE Compact 3020 compact HE boiler .............................................................................. 122
ALDE Compact 3020 control panel........................................................................................ 130
Thetford refrigerators ............................................................................................................. 140
Dometic absorption refrigerators ............................................................................................ 149
Mini grill and gas hob (Sprite Freedom only) ........................................................................... 170
Cooker 3 burner gas hob (Sprite only).................................................................................... 173
Cooker 3 burner gas hob and hotplate (Challenger and Eccles only)....................................... 176
Microwave oven ................................................................................................................... 180
Thetford C260 cassette toilet ................................................................................................. 183
Caravans with external BBQ point ......................................................................................... 191
Caravans with external shower point ..................................................................................... 192
Caravans with TV inlet in battery box ..................................................................................... 192
Caravans with CD/MP3/Tuner................................................................................................ 192
TV antenna ........................................................................................................................... 193
Bedding ................................................................................................................................. 194
Softrollo blinds (Seitz) ............................................................................................................ 195
Doorscreen ............................................................................................................................ 196
Exterior door key ................................................................................................................... 196
Exterior door .......................................................................................................................... 196
Windows ............................................................................................................................... 197
Rooflights............................................................................................................................... 197
Care/Use of laminate tops, tables, furniture and doors .......................................................... 201
Tables/storage ...................................................................................................................... 202
12V reading lamp .................................................................................................................. 202
Shower use............................................................................................................................ 202
Fixing of awnings ................................................................................................................... 203
Paint colour reference............................................................................................................. 203
TV brackets............................................................................................................................ 203
Front locker and sunroof......................................................................................................... 203
Bonded roof........................................................................................................................... 203
Step on hitch cover................................................................................................................ 204
Cycle racks ............................................................................................................................ 204
Caravan motor mover.............................................................................................................. 204
Omni-vent.............................................................................................................................. 205
99
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
TRUMA COMBI BOILER
The instructions covering fitted equipment
to your caravan were correct at the time
of going to print. Owners handbooks are
updated annually and we take great care
to try and ensure their accuracy. However,
the Swift Group Limited cannot accept
responsibility for any changes that may
be made in specification or operating
instructions to the equipment described in
this section after the time of going to press.
Every care is taken to ensure that the
information provided in this handbook is
correct and easy to understand.
Separate manufacturers’ leaflets on many
of the components are also included in the
Owner’s Pack provided with this caravan
and we recommend that you compare
the instructions in the handbook with
the component manufacturers literature,
to ensure the information provided is as
accurate as possible.
If you are in any doubt as to how to operate
the equipment in your caravan, please
contact the component manufacturer’s
service department on the telephone
number shown on their component leaflet.
If you remain in any doubt, please contact
your supplying dealer.
Notice: In the interest of safety, replacement
parts for an appliance shall conform to the
appliance manufacturer’s specifications and
should be fitted by them or their authorised
agents.
Truma Combination Boiler
The Truma Combination boiler has been
designed to run on gas or electric power and
the optimum performance is obtained when
used in dual fuel mode, that is running on
gas and electric at the same time.
Running in dual mode has the following
benefits:
• Fastest possible heat up time, the gas burner
combines with an electric element to provide
energy to heat your hot water and warm your
caravan.
• The intelligent heat management system
automatically senses when the water and
room are nearing the required temperature
and then automatically turns off your gas
burner and operates solely on electric power,
conserving your gas.
• As hot water is used or the room cools the
Truma combination heater will continue to
operate on electric only until a point where
the demands necessitate that additional
gas power is required. An example for
such a demand could be for instance if the
exterior door was left open and the room
temperature dropped by 10 degrees in the
space of a few minutes, in this case the
intelligent heat management system would
decide the best way to get the room back
to the required temperature would be to use
both gas and electric at the same time.
Operating the Truma Combination system on
electric or gas only will result in longer heat up
times for hot water and the room temperature
in comparison to operating on dual fuel.
Operating on electric only may not in all cases
maintain a comfortable room temperature
especially in colder conditions.
The intelligent heat management system in
dual fuel mode allows the Truma Combination
boiler to prioritize the electric power source
over your gas, this will conserve your gas
supply.
100
TRUMA CP PLUS DIGITAL TIMER CONTROLS
The Swift Group undertakes considerable
testing of our products in cold chambers to
ensure they meet the BS EN 1649 Grade 3
standard and are usable in cold temperatures.
During this testing, the air flow on the blown air
outlets is defined and set by us.
Butterfly outlets
The air ducting outlets on some models
equipped with Truma Combi heating systems,
are of the butterfly type. If fitted these may be
opened or closed by moving the flap within
the fitting, to adjust the balance of the heating
output throughout the caravan. When these
butterflies are closed in conjunction with a high
heating system output, and therefore a high
fan speed, a slight whistling sound can occur.
In this case, opening the outlet slightly will
reduce or remove the noise.
Note: The next instructions detail the
operation of the Combi Control Panel
- for further details of the Truma Combi
appliance, please see the following section.
Truma CP Plus
Digital Timer Control (when fitted)
The Truma CP plus control panel is used to
control and monitor a Combi CP plus ready
heater and/or a Truma air conditioning system.
The Truma CP plus serves as an interface for
operating connected appliances via Truma
App and iNet Box. (Truma aftermarket option)
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Truma Heating System
and Air Flow
The following air conditioning systems can be
operated with the Truma CP plus:
• Saphir compact
• Saphir comfort RC
• Aventa eco
On other models the outlets are of a fixed
louvred type. These cannot be adjusted, and
the heating system will have been designed
to provide a balanced output. It is possible, if
required, to exchange these fixed outlets for
the butterfly version to allow a greater level of
control, however if this is undertaken care is
required: Closing too many outlets when the
heating system is producing a high output, can
cause the appliance to reach high operating
temperatures. This does not in general terms
affect the appliance, but it can cause the
appliance to automatically shut down.
• Aventa comfort
Whether the outlets are of the butterfly type, or
the fixed louvre, the fittings can be rotated to
adjust the direction of air leaving the outlet, as
shown in the photo below.
• Do not carry out any repair work or
modifications on the Truma CP plus control
panel
For further details on connecting and
controlling these items, and installation contact
your dealer.
Safety instructions
• Operate the Truma CP plus control panel
only if it is in technically perfect condition.
• Repairs must be carried out immediately.
Only carry out repairs yourself if the solution
is described in the troubleshooting guide of
this manual.
• A defective Truma CP plus control panel may
only be repaired by the manufacturer or the
manufacturer’s service department.
• Never use LP gas appliances when refuelling,
in multi-storey car parks, in garages, or on
ferries. Switch off the LP gas appliance on
the Truma CP plus control panel and make
sure that the LP gas appliance definitely
cannot be switched on via the Truma App.
101
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
TRUMA CP PLUS DIGITAL TIMER CONTROL
Note:
Display and control elements
• If the power supply to the system has
been interrupted, the time / time switch
must be reset.
• If a new or replacement appliance (heater,
air conditioning system or iNet Box)
is connected to the bus system, the
procedure described in “Initial start-up”
must be repeated.
• The ZUCB time switch can no longer
be used when the Combi CP plus ready
heater is connected to the Truma CP plus
control panel.
• If an iNET box is connected, the operation
of the CP plus controller will differ from
these instructions
1 = Display
2 = Status bar
3 = Menu bar (upper)
4 = Menu bar (lower)
5 = 230 V mains supply indicator (power)
6 = Time switch display
7 = Settings / Values
8 = Rotary push button
9 = Back button
The menus can be selected in lines (3 + 4) and
settings can be made using the rotary push
button (8). The display (1) has an illuminated
background. The Back button (9) can be used
to return from a menu.
Rotary push button
Setpoints and parameters can be selected,
modified and saved by tapping on it using the
rotary push button (8). Selected menu items
flash.
Rotate clockwise
• Menu is run through from
left to right.
• Increase values (+).
102
TRUMA CP PLUS DIGITAL TIMER CONTROL
• Menu is run through from
right to left.
• Decrease values (-).
Start-Up
Start/Stand by screen
After connecting the control panel to the
power supply, a start screen is shown after a
few seconds.
Tapping
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Rotate anticlockwise
• Accept (save) a selected
value.
• Select a menu item, change
to the setting level.
Long Press
• Main switch function ON / OFF.
• Note: If an iNet Box was recognised while
searching for an appliance, the function of
the rotary push button changes.
Back Button
Pressing the Back button (9) returns you from
a menu and discards settings. This means that
the previous values are retained.
Initial Set-Up
In order to perform the initial start-up, the
following steps are required:
• Switch on power supply. 12V direct voltage
for CP plus control panel and Combi and
230V mains voltage for air conditioning
systems and Combi E.
• Start the search of the appliances under
menu item
“Service menu” –> “RESET” –> “PR SET”.
Note:
• The display changes between the time
and the set room temperature.
• Special displays on command via
Truma App, IR remote control of the
air conditioning system (see “Special
displays” on page 112).
• After a repair / retrofit, the procedure
described under “Initial start-up” must be
repeated.
Functions
The functions in the menu bars (3, 4) of the
Truma CP plus control panel are selectable
in any order. The operating parameters are
shown on the status bar (2) and on the
displays (5, 6).
Select setting level
• Tap rotary push button.
The display shows the setting level. The first
icon flashes.
After confirmation,Truma CP plus control panel
initialises itself. “INIT ..” appears on the display
while this is in progress. This stores in the
Truma CP plus control panel the appliances
that have been found.
Note:
This initial set up will have been undertaken
prior to delivery of your caravan.
103
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
TRUMA CP PLUS DIGITAL TIMER CONTROL
Switching on and off
Heater
Switch on
Settable temperature range 5 - 30°C
(1°C steps)
• Tap rotary push button.
• Previously set values / operating parameters
are reactivated after switching on
a = heater2 – Heater is switched on.
Switch off
Air conditioning system (AC)
(when connected/when AC is fitted)
• Press rotary push button for longer than 4
seconds.
Settable temperature range 16 – 31°C
(1 °C steps)
• “OFF” appears after another 2 seconds.
b = COOL* - Air conditioning system is
switched on
• The Truma CP plus control panel
deactivation procedure can be delayed by
several minutes because of internal heating
or air conditioning system after-runs.
c = AUTO - Air conditioning system is set to
automatic
d = HOT
Change the room temperature
• Select icon in menu bar (3) with rotary push
button.
• Change by tapping in the setting level.
• Depending on the appliance that is
connected, select between heating system
(HEATER) or air conditioning system (AC) or
automatic air conditioning system1 (AUTO)
using the rotary push button.
• Tap rotary push button to confirm selection.
• Select desired temperature with rotary push
button.
• Tap the rotary push button to confirm the
value.
- Air conditioning system is in
heating mode.
e = VENT - Air conditioning system is in air
circulation mode
Notes: Quick temperature change using
rotary push button possible (in Stand-by
screen).
Automatic air conditioning system (AUTO)
only if “ACC” has been activated in the
service menu (see “Service menu” on page
110). This is deactivated at the factory.
1
Symbol flashes until the desired room
temperature is reached
2
Automatic air-conditioning system (AUTO)
Settable temperature range 18 – 25°C
(1°C steps)
Automatic switch over between heater and
air conditioning system for an approximately
constant temperature on the inside.
f = AUTO - Automatic air-conditioning
system is activated
Requirements for operation with automatic airconditioning system:
• The heater and air conditioning system must
be connected.
• Automatic air-conditioning system “ACC”
must be activated in the service menu (see
“Service menu” on page 110).
104
TRUMA CP PLUS DIGITAL TIMER CONTROL
Select energy source
Select icon in menu bar (3) with rotary push
button.
• Select icon in menu bar (3) with rotary push
button.
• Change by tapping in the setting level.
• Change by tapping in the setting level.
• Select desired level with rotary push button.
• Select desired energy source with rotary
push button.
• Tap the rotary push button to confirm the
value.
– = OFF - H
ot water generator is switched
off.
ot water generator is switched
a = Boiler1 - H
on.
b = Eco2
- Hot water temperature 40°C
c = Hot - Hot water temperature 60°C
d = Boost1 - T
argeted, rapid heating of
boiler contents (Boiler priority)
for a maximum time window
of 40 minutes. Then the water
temperature is kept at the
higher level for two post-heating
cycles (about 62 °C). After
reaching the water temperature,
heating of the room continues.
• Tap the rotary push button to confirm the
value.
Symbol
Operating mode
Power type
a
Gas
Gas
b
MIX 1
Gas + Electro
c
MIX 2
Gas + Electro
d
EL 1
Electro
e
EL 2
Electro
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Change the hot water level
As soon as the heater is switched on (room
temperature, hot water level active), the
status line shows the energy type selected in
the previous heating procedure. The factory
setting is gas / diesel.
Notes:
1
his symbol flashes until the required water
T
temperature has been reached.
2
hot water temperature can only be
A
maintained with combined room and water
heating for a limited time at 40 °C.
105
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
TRUMA CP PLUS DIGITAL TIMER CONTROL
Special fixtures in the mixed mode
Select fan level
• Interruption of the mains voltage 230V:
With connected heating / air conditioning
system
The heating system switches automatically
into gas mode. As soon as the 230V power
supply has been restored, the heating
system automatically switches back to mixed
mode.
• Fault in combustion procedure (e.g. lack of
fuel).
• Select icon in menu bar (3) with rotary push
button.
• Change by tapping in the setting level.
• Select desired fan level with rotary push
button.
• Tap the rotary push button to confirm the
value.
The heating system switches automatically
into electrical mode. For the heater
to operate in mixed mode again, the
cause of the fault must be remedied and
acknowledged on the Truma CP plus control
panel. See “Fault” on page 115.
The heater automatically switches to the gas
mode. As soon as the 230 V power supply
is reconnected, the heater automatically
switches back to the mixed mode.
Special features in electric mode
Heater (HEATER)
Icon
Combi Gas
• If the 230 V power supply is interrupted and
the 12 V supply is switched on, a fault code
is shown on the display.
Operating
mode
OFF
Fan is switched off
(only selectable if
no appliance is in
operation).
a
VENT1
Circulated air,
when no appliance
is in operation
and the hot water
generator is
switched off. 10
speed settings
available.
b
ECO
Low fan level
c
HIGH2
High fan level
–
• When the 230 V power supply has been
restored, the heater is automatically started
with the existing settings. The fault code
goes off.
d
106
Description
BOOST
Rapid room
heating. Available
if the difference
between the
selected and
the actual room
temperature is
>10 °C
TRUMA CP PLUS DIGITAL TIMER CONTROL
1
an lead to additional motor wear
C
depending on frequency of use.
Fan level “HIGH” results in higher power
consumption, higher noise level and increased motor wear.
2 As soon as the heater is switched on (room
temperature, hot water level selected) the
status bar (2) displays the fan level that was
selected during the previous heating procedure. The factory setting is “ECO”.
Icon
Operating
mode
Description
Fan is switched off
(only selectable if
no appliance is in
operation).
–
OFF
a
-
b
LOW
Low fan level
c
MID
Medium fan level
d
HIGH
High fan level
e
NIGHT
Ultra-quiet fan
operation
AUTO
Automatic fan level
selection.
Cannot be changed
in AUTO mode.
f
! WARNING:
Danger of toxic exhaust fumes.
The activated time switch switches on the
heater even when the vehicle is parked.
The heater’s exhaust can be toxic in closed
spaces (e.g. garages, workshops). If the
vehicle is parked in closed rooms:
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Set time switch
Note:
• Shut off the fuel supply (gas or diesel) to
the heater.
• Deactivate the time switch of the Truma
CP plus control panel (OFF).
• Switch off the heater on the Truma CP
plus control panel.
Note:
• When air conditioning systems are being
operated, the time switch of the Truma CP
plus control panel must only be used to
clearly define the start and end time for a
required period of time.
• If the time switch has been activated
(ON), the deactivate time switch menu is
displayed first (OFF).
• Select icon in menu bar (4) with rotary push
button.
• Change by tapping in the setting level.
Automatic air-conditioning system
(AUTO), When connected/When AC is
fitted
Not possible to select the fan level with the
automatic air conditioning system.
• The fan level of the air conditioning system is
determined automatically.
• Only “ECO” is available for heaters.
107
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
TRUMA CP PLUS DIGITAL TIMER CONTROL
Enter start tme
• Set the hours then the minutes with the
rotary push button.
24hour mode
Note: If the start/end point was exceeded
during entry, the operating parameters are
not taken into consideration until the next
start/end point has been reached. Until then,
the operating parameters that have been set
outside the time switch remain valid.
Set the room temperature
• Select the heater, air conditioning system or
AUTO using the rotary push button, depending on the appliance that is connected.
• Tap rotary push button to confirm selection.
12hour mode
• Select required room temperature with rotary
push button.
• Tap the rotary push button to confirm the
value.
Set the hot water level
Entering the end time
• Select required hot water level with rotary
push button.
• Set the hours then the minutes with the
rotary push button.
• Tap the rotary push button to confirm the
value.
24hour mode
Select energy source
12hour mode
• Select required energy source with rotary
push button.
• Tap the rotary push button to confirm the
value.
108
Note: The select energy type menu is
displayed if a heating system with electric
heating elements is connected.
TRUMA CP PLUS DIGITAL TIMER CONTROL
Deactivate the timer (OFF)
• Select desired fan level with rotary push
button.
• Change by tapping in the setting level.
• Tap the rotary push button to confirm the
value.
Note: The Select fan level menu is only
available if the heater / hot water level has
been set. Not available with automatic air
conditioning system AUTO.
• Deactivate time switch with rotary push
button (OFF).
• Tap the rotary push button to confirm the
value.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Select fan level
Switch lighting on/off
Activate the timer (ON)
Available when air conditioning system is
connected and only with Aventa comfort or
Aventa eco air conditioners.
• Activate time switch with rotary push button
(ON).
• Select icon in menu bar (4) with rotary push
button.
• Tap the rotary push button to confirm the
value.
• Change by tapping in the setting level.
• Select required function with rotary push
button.
1 – 5
- S
witch lighting on.
Brightness selectable in 5 levels.
OFF - Switch lighting off.
• Tap the rotary push button to confirm the
value.
Note:
• The time switch remains active until it is
deactivated (OFF), even for several days.
• If the time switch is programmed and
active, the time switch icon flashes.
109
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
TRUMA CP PLUS DIGITAL TIMER CONTROL
Set time
Service menu
24hour mode
1. Calibrating the room temperature
sensor of the heater (OFFSET)
The room temperature sensor of the heater
can be individually adjusted to the sensor’s
installation situation. The setting can be made
in increments of 0.5°C within the range of 0°C
to -5°C.
12hour mode
Example:
Set room temperature 23 °C;
OFFSET = -1 °C;
• Setpoint value for heater = 22 °C
Presetting: 0 °C (Celsius).
• With the rotary push button (8), select the
“Set time“ symbol in the menu bar (4).
2. AC SET1,2
(When air conditioner is connected/fitted)
The hour display flashes.
The sensed room temperature can – during
operation of the automatic air conditioning
system – be perceived differently during cooling than during heating. “AC SET” is used to
set an offset between cooling and heating. The
setting can be made in increments of 0.5 °C
within the range of 0 °C to +5 °C.
• Set the hours with rotary push button (8).
• The minutes display flashes when the rotary
push button (8) is tapped again.
• Set the minutes with rotary push button (8).
• Tap the rotary push button (8) to confirm the
value.
Example:
Set room temperature 23 °C;
AC SET = 2 °C
• Setpoint value for air conditioning system
= 25 °C
Presetting: +1°C (Celsius)
Notes:
1
Only available if the air conditioning system
and heater are connected.
2
110
Only available if ACC is set to “ON”.
TRUMA CP PLUS DIGITAL TIMER CONTROL
to this when adjusting the air throttles on
Aventa air conditioning systems.
The automatic air conditioning system function
AUTO is activated or blocked with “ACC”.
• with good circulation and not on the vehicle
ceiling.
ON
- The automatic air conditioning
system function AUTO is activated.
Automatic air conditioning system
function AUTO can be selected in
the Room temperature menu.
Truma dealers / Truma partners are trained
in correctly installing the automatic air
conditioning system. You can find Truma
partners at www.truma.com.
- “AC SET” appears in the Service
menu.
4. °C / °F temperature display
OFF - The automatic air conditioning
system function AUTO is blocked.
Presetting: OFF
Note:
The function of the Truma automatic air
conditioning system depends on proper
installation. Your Truma dealer/ partner
would be pleased to advise you whether
your vehicle is suitable.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
3. ACC1
(When air conditioner is connected/fitted)
Select the temperature display °C (Celsius) or
°F (Fahrenheit).
Presetting: °C (Celsius).
5. Changing the background lighting
Change the background lighting of the Truma
CP plus control panel in 10 levels.
Requirements for the automatic air
conditioning system functioning as expected:
1. The air conditioning system and heater
cover the entire area of the vehicle that
is supposed to be automatically air
conditioned.
6. 12 h / 24 h mode
Display time in 12 h (a. m., p. m.) / 24 h mode.
2. The room temperature sensor of the heater
is the lead sensor of the automatic air
conditioning system and must therefore be
in a suitable location, i.e.
• in the area in which the required room
temperature should be reached.
• if possible not influenced by the outside
temperature and sunlight.
Presetting: 24 h mode.
• not near to warm air ducts, cold air ducts
or other sources of heat.
• warm or cold air from the air outlets must
not flow against the room temperature
sensor. particular attention must be paid
111
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
TRUMA CP PLUS DIGITAL TIMER CONTROL
7. Change language
9. Presetting (RESET)
Select the desired language
(German, English, French, Italian).
The reset function resets the Truma CP plus
control panel back to the factory setting. All
settings will be deleted. Newly connected
appliances are recognised and saved in the
Truma CP plus control panel.
Presetting: English
8. Showing the version number
Display version number of heater, air
conditioning system,
Truma CP plus control panel or iNetBox.
Example:
H 1.20.01 –> H = appliance; 1.20.01 =
version number
Appliance
C = Truma CP plus control panel
C = Truma CP plus control panel
SMART Command
A = Air conditioning system
H = Heater
T = Truma iNet Box
• Switch on the power supply
12 V direct voltage for CP plus control panel
and Combi and230 V mains voltage for air
conditioning systems and Combi E.
Perform Reset
• Select “RESET” with the rotary push
button (8).
• Tap on the rotary push button (8)
• “PR SET” appears in the display.
• Tap the rotary push button (8) to confirm.
After confirmation, the Truma CP plus control
panel initialises itself.
“INIT..” appears on the display while this is in
progress.
Special displays
230V mains voltage available
The icon signals that 230 V mains power
supply is available.
112
TRUMA CP PLUS DIGITAL TIMER CONTROL
This symbol indicates that an operating
parameter has reached an undefined state.
In this case the appliance concerned
continues to operate. As soon as the operating
parameter is within the target range again,
this symbol goes off again automatically.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
! Warning
Read out code of warning
• Select icon with rotary push button.
• Tap the rotary push button.
The current warning code will be displayed.
The cause of the warning can be
determined and remedied with the aid of the
troubleshooting guide (from page 115).
W=
Warning
42 = Fault code
H=
Device
H = Heater
A = Air conditioning system
Cause eliminated / return to setting level
• Tap the rotary push button.
Cause not eliminated / return to the
setting level
• Press the Back button.
Note: In this case, the warning in the
Truma CP plus control panel has not been
acknowledged and the warning symbol
remains. The affected appliance remains in
warning status. Other connected appliances
can be operated.
113
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
TRUMA CP PLUS DIGITAL TIMER CONTROL
Fault
In the event of a fault, the Truma CP plus
control panel immediately jumps to the
“Fault” menu level and displays the fault code
of the fault. The cause of the fault can be
determined and remedied with the aid of the
troubleshooting guide (from page 115).
E = Fault
112 = Fault code
H = Device
H = Heater
A = Air conditioning system
Cause eliminated / return to setting level
• Tap the rotary push button.
• The respective appliance is restarted.
Note: This can take several minutes
because of internal after-runs of connected
appliances.
If the cause has not been remedied, the fault
will occur again and the control panel will jump
to the “Fault” menu level again.
Cause not eliminated, / return to the setting level
• Press the Back button.
Note: In this case, the fault in the Truma
CP plus control panel has not been
acknowledged and the warning symbol
remains. The appliance remains in fault
state. Other connected appliances can be
operated.
114
Troubleshooting instructions
(Combi Gas heater)
See table to right
If these measures do not remedy
the fault or if fault codes are
displayed that you cannot find
in the troubleshooting guide,
contact Truma Service.
TRUMA COMBINATION BOILER FAULT FINDING
Error
code
Cause
Remedy
#17
• Summer mode with empty water container
• Switch device off and allow to cool. Fill boiler
with water
#18
• Warm air outlet blocked
• Check each of the outlet openings
• Circulated air intake blocked
• Remove the blockage from the circulated
air intake
#21
• Room temperature sensor or cable faulty
• Inspect the room temperature sensor cable,
replace if faulty
• Check the resistance of the room
temperature sensor. 15°C – 16.2 kOhm /
20°C – 12.6 kOhm / 25°C – 10.0 kOhm
Replace the room temperature sensor if
faulty
#24
• Risk of low voltage. Battery voltage is too low
< 10.4 V
• Charge battery
#29
• Frost Control heating element has a short circuit
• Disconnect heating element plug from
electronic control unit. Replace heating
element
#42
• Open window above cowl (window switch)
• Close the window
#43
• Over-voltage > 16.4V
• Check battery voltage / voltage sources
such as the charger
#44
• Low voltage. Battery voltage is too low
< 10.0 V
• Charge battery. If necessary replace old
battery
#45
• No 230 V operating voltage
• Restore 230V operating voltage
• Faulty 230V fuse
• Replace 230V fuse
• Overheating protection has triggered
• Please contact Truma Service
• Check gas supply and open valves
#202
• Gas cylinder or quick-acting valve in the gas
supply line closed.
#121
• Gas pressure regulation system iced up
• Use regulator heater (EisEx)
• Butane content in the gas cylinder too high
• Use propane. Butane is unsuitable for
heating, particularly at temperatures lower
than 10°C.
• Combustion air infeed or exhaust outlet is
sealed
• Inspect openings for obstructions (slush, ice,
leaves, etc.) and remove any obstructions
• Gas pressure regulation system faulty
• Inspect / replace gas pressure regulation
system
• Electronic system faulty
• Please contact Truma Service
• Heater has no 12 V power supply
• Ensure that the 12V power supply is
available
• No connection between heater and control
panel
• Make connection between heater and
control panel
• Control panel cable faulty
• Please contact the Truma Service
#112
#211
#122
#212
#255
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Troubleshooting instructions (Combi Gas heater)
115
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
TRUMA COMBI BOILER
Power Selector Switch
(when fitted)
n= Winter operation (heating with water
temperature monitoring)
o = Rotary “Off” switch
p = yellow LED lit “Boiler heat-up phase”
r= red LED lit, red LED blinking “Failure”
Note: The LEDs are visible only when the
unit is switched on.
Summer operation
(boiler operation only)
a = Power selection rotary switch
b = Electric operation 230V, 1800W
c = Electric operation 230V, 900W
d = Gas operation
e = Mixed operation* (900W gas and electrical
operation)
f=M
ixed operation* (1800W gas and electrical
operation)
g = Yellow LED on = “Electrical operation”
* Winter mode only!
In summer mode the unit automatically selects
electric opera- tion at the preselected electrical
power of 900 W or 1800W.
Note: Switching on the electric heating
elements as well does not increase the
maximum heating power.
Control Module (when fitted)
Select gas or electrical operation using the
power selector switch. Illumination of the
yellow LED (g) on the power selector switch
indicates that the unit is operating with 230V.
Note: Mixed operation (gas and electrical)
is not possible in summer mode. With
this setting the unit automatically selects
electrical operation with a preselected power
setting of 900 W or 1800 W.
Move the rotary switch on the control panel to
position (I – summer operation) 40°C or 60°C.
The green (k) and yellow (p) LEDs light up.
When the selected water temperature is
reached (40°C or 60°C) the heater shuts off
and the yellow LED (p) goes off.
Winter operation
• Heating with water temperature monitoring
Select gas, electrical or mixed operation
using the power switch. Illumination of the
yellow LED (g) on the power se- lector switch
indicates that the unit is operating with 230V.
Move rotary switch on control panel to
operating position (n).
h= R
otary switch for room temperature
(1 – 5)
k = green LED lit “Operation” green LED
blinking “after-running” is active in order to
reduce the unit’s temperature
l = Summer operation
(water temperature 40°C or 60°C)
m= Winter operation (heating without water
temperature monitoring or with drained
water system)
116
Set the rotary switch (h) to the desired
thermostat setting (1 – 5). The green LED
(k) for operation is lit and simultane- ously
indicates the position of the selected room
tempera- ture. The yellow LED (p) indicates the
water‘s heat-up phase.
The device automatically selects the
required power setting in accordance with
the temperature difference between the
temperature selected on the control panel
and the current room temperature. When the
TRUMA COMBI BOILER
Turn the rotary switch (h) to the desired
thermostat setting (1 – 5). The green LED (k)
for operation is lit and simultaneously indicates
the position of the selected room temperature.
The yellow LED (p) will be lit only when the
temperature of the unit is below 5°C!
The warm air fan can continue to run in order
to cool the unit (after-run).
Depending on the operating mode, the unit
will automatically select the required power
level according to the tempera- ture difference
between the setting on the control panel and
the current room temperature. Once the room
temperature selected on the control panel has
been reached, the heater switches off. The
warm air fan continues to run at slow speed
until the outgoing air temperature (on the unit)
has fallen to 40°C or less.
• Heating without water temperature
monitoring
Select gas, electrical or mixed operation using
the power switch. Illumination of the yellow
LED (g) on the power selector switch indicates
that the unit is operating with 230V.
Move rotary switch on control panel to
operating position (m).
Turn the rotary switch (h) to the desired
thermostat setting (1 – 5). The green LED
(k) for operation is lit and simultane- ously
indicates the position of the selected room
tempera- ture. The yellow LED (p – water‘s
heat-up phase) will be lit only when the water
temperature is below 5°C!
The device automatically selects the
required power setting in accordance with
the temperature difference between the
temperature selected on the control panel and
the current room temperature. Once the room
temperature selected on the control panel has
been reached, the heater switches off. The
warm air fan continues to run at slow speed
until the out- going air temperature (on the unit)
has fallen to 40°C or less.
If the boiler is filled, the water will automatically
be heated at the same time. The water
temperature is then dependent on the heating
output being given off, and the duration of
heating required to reach the desired room
temperature.
• Heating with drained water system
Select gas or electrical operation using the
power selector switch. Illumination of the
yellow LED (g) on the power selector switch
indicates that the unit is operating with 230V.
Move rotary switch on control panel to
operating position (m).
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
room temperature selected on the control
panel is reached, the heater switches back to
the smallest setting and heats the water to 60
°C. Once the wa- ter temperature is reached,
the heater switches off and the yellow LED (p)
goes out.
Switching off
Switch off heater at control panel using rotary
switch (position o). The green LED (k) goes off.
Note: If the green LED (k) blinks after
switching off, then the unit‘s after-running is
active in order to reduce the unit‘s temperature. This will end after a few minutes and
the green LED (k) will go off.
Always drain water contents if there is a
risk of frost!
If the appliance is not to be used for a
prolonged period, close the quick-acting valve
in the gas supply line and turn off the gas
cylinder.
Gas operation fault
If a fault occurs during gas operation the red
LED (r) on the control panel illuminates.
Please consult the Trouble-Shooting list for
possible causes.
A reset (fault reset) is carried out by switching
off, waiting until all LED’s on the control panel
have stopped flashing, and then switching the
heater on again.
Note: If a window to which a window
switch has been fitted is opened, the heater
stops operating and the red LED (r) flashes.
The heater continues operating when the
window is closed.
117
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
TRUMA COMBI BOILER
Electrical operation fault
If a fault occurs during electrical operation the
yellow indicator lamp (g) on the power selector
switch goes off.
Possible causes can be found in the
troubleshooting list.
Note: If the 230V power supply is
interrupted for just a brief period of
approximately 1 second during operation,
the heater will subsequently resume as
normal.
Truma Combination Heating
System Function Description
The liquid gas heater Combi E is a warm-air
heater with integrated hot water boiler (10 litre
volume). The burner operates fan-supported,
which ensures trouble-free function even
when on the move. The unit also has heating
elements for electrical operation.
In winter operation the heater can be used to
heat the room and simultaneously warm water.
3 different options are available for operating
the unit.
– gas operation only Propane / Butane for
autonomous use
– electrical operation only 230V for stationary
use on camp sites
– or gas and electrical operation – mixed
operation only possible in winter mode.
Winter operation (Space heating with
water heating)
In winter operation, the unit automatically
selects the required power setting according
to the temperature difference between the
temperature set on the control panel and the
current room temperature. When the boiler
is filled, the water is automatically heated as
well. The water temperature depends on the
selected operational mode and the heater
output. All 3 energy selection options can be
used for winter deployment.
118
With gas operation the unit automatically
selects the output level that is required.
Depending on the fuse protection at the
camping site, power of 900W (3.9 A) or
1800W (7.8 A) can be manually selected for
electrical operation.
If more output is required (e.g. heating up
or low outside temperatures) gas or mixed
operation should be selected so that enough
heating power is always available. With
mixed operation, 230V electrical operation
is preferred if the power requirement is low
(e.g. for maintaining the room temperature).
The gas burner is not enabled until the power
requirement is higher, and is the first to switch
off during heat-up operations.
Summer operation (Water heating only)
Gas operation or 230V electrical operation
is used for hot water preparation. The water
temperature can be set to 40°C or 60°C. With
gas operation the water is heated at the lowest
burner setting. Once the water temperature is
reached, the burner switches off. Depending
on the fuse protection at the camping site,
power of 900W (3.9A) or 1800W (7.8A) can
be manually selected for electrical operation.
Mixed operation is not possible. With this
setting the unit automatically selects electrical
operation.
The gas burner is not enabled.
Repairs may only be carried out by
an expert
Guarantee claims, warranty claims and
acceptance of liability will be ruled out in the
event of the following:
– modifications to the unit
(including accessories),
– modifications to the exhaust duct and
the cowl,
– failure to use original Truma parts as
replacement parts and accessories,
– failure to follow the installation and operating
instructions.
It also becomes illegal to use the appliance,
and in some countries this even makes it illegal
to use the vehicle.
During the initial operation of a brand new
appliance (or after it has not been used for
some time), a slight amount of fumes and
TRUMA COMBI BOILER
Important operating notes
The integrity and tight fit of the exhaust gas
double duct must be checked regularly,
particularly at the end of long trips. Also check
the mounting of the appliance and the cowl.
Following a blow-back (misfire) always have
the exhaust gas system checked by an expert!
Always keep the cowl for the exhaust duct and
combustion air intake free of contamination
(slush, ice, leaves etc.). A number of hot air
outlets and the recirculated air intake openings
must be free so that the unit does not
overheat. The integrated temperature limiter
blocks the gas supply when the unit becomes
too hot.
Operating Instructions
Always observe the operating instructions and
“Important operating notes” prior to starting!
The vehicle owner is responsible for the correct
operation of the appliance. Before using for the
first time, it is essential to flush the entire water
supply system through with clean water. If
the heater is not being used, always drain the
water contents if there is a risk of frost. There
shall be no claims under guarantee for damage
caused by frost!
Room thermostat
To measure the room temperature, a room
temperature sensor is fitted to the furniture.
The exact location is determined by the layout
of the vehicle.
Taking into operation
Heating is possible without restrictions with
gas, electrical and mixed operation, with or
without water. Check to make sure the cowl is
unobstructed. Be sure to remove any covers
that may be present.
For operating on gas turn on gas cylinder and
open the shut off valve at the manifold. For
operating on electric operate the water heater
switch on the power supply unit. See page 79.
Filling the water heater
Switch on power for water pump (main or
pump switch) to prime the water system. Open
hot water taps in kitchen and bathroom, (set
preselecting mixing taps or single-lever fittings
to “hot”). Leave the fittings open for as long as
it takes for the boiler to displace the air and fill
up, and the water to flow without interruption.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
smell may be noticed for a short while. It is a
good idea to heat the device up several times
in summer operation (60°C) and to make sure
that the area is well ventilated. Heat-sensitive
objects such as spray cans or flammable
liquids may not be stored in the same
compartment where the heater is installed
because, under certain conditions, this area
may be subject to elevated temperatures.
If just the cold water system is being operated,
without using the water heater, the heater tank
also fills up with water. To avoid frost damage,
the boiler must be drained through the drain
valve, even if the boiler was not operated.
When connecting to a central water supply
(rural or city mains), a pressure reduction valve
must always be installed to prevent pressures
above 2.8 bar from developing in the water
heater.
Draining the water heater
Switch off power to water pump (main or
pump switch). Open hot water taps in kitchen
and bathroom. In order to check the water that
is flowing out, place an appropriate container
(capacity 10 litres) beneath the drain valve.
Open the drain valve which is situated next to
the boiler by lifting the yellow handle into the
vertical position.
Check whether all of the water in the boiler
(10 litres) has been drained into the container
via the drain valve.
There shall be no claims under guarantee
for damage caused by frost!
Maintenance
Only original Truma parts may be used for
maintenance and repair work! Materials in the
device which come into contact with water
are suitable for use with drinking water (see
manufacturer‘s declaration: www.truma.com /
downloads / manufacturer‘s declaration).
Bio-film, deposits and limescale must be
removed using chemicals to protect the
unit from infestation by microorganisms.
Only chloride-free products must be used
in order to prevent damage to the unit. The
119
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
TRUMA COMBI BOILER
effectiveness of the use of chemicals to
combat microorganisms in the unit can be
increased by heating the water in the boiler to
70°C at regular intervals. The unit must stay
switched on for at least 30 minutes and no
warm water may be removed. The residual
heat in the heat exchanger will heat the water
up to 70°C.
Fuses 12 V
The fuse is in the electronics beneath the
connection cover. Replace the unit’s fuse only
with an identical fuse.
Device fuse: 10 A – slow – (T 10 A)
Fuses 230 V
The fuse and the power supply lines must only
be replaced by an expert! The unit must be
disconnected from the mains (all poles) before
opening the electronic housing lid.
The fuse is in the power electronics (16)
beneath the electronic housing lid.
This fine fuse must always be replaced with a
fuse of the same type: 10A, slow, interrupting
capacity “H”.
120
Overheating protection 230V
The 230V heating facility has a mechanical
overheating switch. If the 12V power supply
is interrupted during operation or during the
after-run period, for example, the temperatures
within the unit could activate the overheating
protection. To reset the overheating protection,
allow heater to cool, remove connection cover
and press red reset button.
TRUMA COMBI BOILER
determined in accordance with EN 624 or
Truma test conditions
Device category
I3 B/P in accordance with EN 437
Type of gas
Liquid gas (propane/butane)
Operating pressure
30mbar (see type plate)
Current input at 12 V
Heater +boiler
Combi 4 E: Short-term max. 5.6 A
(average power consumption 1.1 A)
Combi 6 E: Short-term max. 5.6 A
(average power consumption 1.3 A)
Heating up of boiler: 0.4 A
Stand-by: 0.001 A
Heating element FrostControl (optional):
maximum 0.4 A
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Technical data
Water contents
10 litres
Heating up time from approx 15OC to 60OC
Boiler approx 20 minutes (measure according
to EN15033)
Heater + boiler approx 80 min
Water pressure
max 2.8 bar
Rated thermal output
(automatic output levels)
Gas operation
Combi 4 E: 2000 W / 4000 W
Combi 6 E: 2000 W / 4000 W / 6000W
Electrical operation
Combi 4 E / Combi 6 E: 900 W / 1800 W
Mixed operation (gas and electrical)
Combi 4 E: max. 3800 W
Combi 6 E: max. 5800 W
Gas consumption
Combi 4 E: 160-320 g/h
Combi 6 E: 160-480 g/h
Readiness-heat power requirement Combi 4 E
/ Combi 6 E:
Gas operation 5.2 g/h
Air delivery volume
(free-blowing without hot-air pipe)
Combi 4 E:
with 3 hot-air outlets max. 249 m3/h
with 4 hot-air outlets max. 287 m3/h
Combi 6 E:
with 4 hot-air outlets max. 287 m3/h
121
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
ALDE HEATING OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Alde Compact 3020 (when fitted)
! WARNING: Alde can accept no liability
whatsoever for damage or injury resulting
from failure to observe these instructions.
Two electric heating elements are sealed inside
the central heating cylinder, one for 1 kW, one
for 2 kW.
Gas Heating
Specific Use
These instructions are approved for the Alde
3020 Compact HE boiler fitted in caravans,
motorhomes or buildings in accordance with
CE 0402 no. SC0653-13, and have the E5
mark for installation in vehicles in accordance
with ECE R122, no. 00 001 and R10, no. 04
166, for use in central heating and hot water
systems.
The boiler is not intended for use by persons
(including children) with reduced physical,
sensory or mental capabilities, or lack of
experience and/or knowledge, unless they
have been given instruction or are supervised.
The term “specified use” also covers
observance of the operating and installation
instructions.
The Alde 3020 Compact HE boiler must be
installed or repaired by a competent person in
accordance with current local regulations.
In the unlikely event that your boiler develops a
fault, switch off the boiler and contact Alde, or
your dealer or installer.
When gas heating is set to on, the combustion
fan starts to revolve. Once the correct speed is
achieved (in rpm), a signal is sent to the PCB
for the burner to be lit. The gas valve opens,
passing gas, and the ignition module on the
PCB generates sparks at the electrode on the
burner head.
When the burner ignites, a flame supervision
device signals the ignition module to cease
sparking. The burner fires until the boiler or
room thermostat reach the setpoint.
Should the burner flame out unexpectedly, the
FSD detects this and attempts to reignite (for
about 10 seconds), before shutting down and
raising a fault code.
Note: Listen carefully to the ignition
sequence of the boiler. You should hear the
whirl of the combustion fan, the clunk of the
gas valve and the tick-tick of the ignition
module.
Electric Heating
The owner is always responsible for
maintenance and arranging inspection.
When electric heating is set to 1, 2 or 3 kW,
relays on the PCB trip, feeding the 230v
supply to the electric heating elements. These
are controlled by the same programme as the
gas heating.
Boiler Design
Domestic Hot Water
The boiler’s internal heat exchanger consists
of three concentric cylinders; the combustion
chamber, the central heating cylinder and the
hot water cylinder.
The combi-type boiler automatically produces
hot water. Heat is emitted from the central
heating cylinder into the hot water cylinder.
If the hot water cylinder is empty, the air is
heated but no damage can result.
Operating and installation instructions for the
Alde control panel are supplied separately.
The combustion chamber is made from
aluminium, and is divided into two halves by
a baffle plate, with the burner head located
in the top half, and the flue gases venting
through the bottom half.
The combustion assembly is fixed to the end
of the internal heat exchanger. It consists of
122
the burner, combustion fan, gas valve, air
intake and exhaust ducts, and gas line.
Note: In a good summer, for example, lower
the desired temperature on the control panel
to around 10 °C. The central heating will not
circulate (unless the temperature drops to
10 °C), but you will still have hot water.
ALDE HEATING OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
•T
he boiler must not be switched on if
there is no heat transfer fluid (HTF) in the
system.
•A
lways drain down the freshwater system
if there is risk of frost; in winter, for
example. You may continue to use the
boiler with no freshwater in the system, as
required; no damage can result
•A
lways replace the HTF in accordance
with the antifreeze product’s lifespan. . If in
any doubt, replace the HTF after 2 years.
•O
nly sterilise the freshwater system with a
product suitable for stainless steel.
•D
o not place stowage in the boiler
compartment.
•D
o not position awnings, tents or other
enclosures around the flue terminal.
•D
o not obstruct the flue. Be careful not to
flood the flue when washing the vehicle.
•T
he gas heating must not be used when
refuelling the vehicle at the service station
or related facility.
Domestic Hot Water
Avoid steriliser products containing sodium
hyperchlorite, for example, as these will cause
severe corrosion damage to the hot water
cylinder. Read the product label or contact the
product manufacturer for details.
When the hot water cylinder is in continuous
use, it should be drained and refilled once a
month. This recreates the air cushion in the hot
water cylinder that absorbs pressure surges.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
! WARNING:
Note: If continuously using the hot water
cylinder in a hard water area, fit an inline
scale inhibitor to minimise the effects of
limescale
Target hot water temperature is greater
than 50°C in normal operation, to prevent
the growth of Legionella. Over 50°C , the
hot water will be heated to the maximum
achievable temperature at the time. This
allows the hot water to achieve disinfection
temperatures, and increases warm water
performance.
If scalding hot water temperatures are a
concern – such as with the young, elderly or
infirm – thermostatic mixing valves (TMVs)
can be fitted, and may be required by local
regulations.
Being a combi-type boiler, the Alde 3020
Compact HE has an integrated, stainless steel
hot water cylinder that holds approximately 8.4
litres of freshwater.
The boiler can produce around 12 litres of
40°C warm water per 30 mins (at a cold
water temperature of 10°C). If only the electric
heating is used, this capacity is slightly
reduced.
The hot water should not be used for drinking
or cooking.
Always flush out the hot water cylinder before
use, especially when it has stood empty for
some time.
Note: Any steriliser products should be
suitable for use with stainless steel.
! WARNING: Always drain down and
completely empty the hot water cylinder
when there is risk of frost, unless the vehicle
is explicitly stated to be self-winterising by
the vehicle manufacturer.
Failure to drain the hot water cylinder when
there is a risk of frost may result in frost
damage, and is not covered under warranty.
123
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
ALDE HEATING OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Draining Freshwater
1. Switch off the water pump.
2. Open all water taps, showers, etc.
3. Open the safety/drain valve by lifting the
yellow tab (Fig 1 [M]), or by turning the blue
knob (Fig 1 [K]) 90°.
4. The system will drain directly below the
vehicle through the clear plastic hose on the
safety/drain valve. Check that all water has
emptied out (7–10 litres). Leave the valve in the
open position until the next time the hot water
cylinder is used.
Note: Check that the red breather valve (Fig
1[N]) is allowing air to enter the hot water
cylinder, when it is being drained, and that
the clear plastic hose is not obstructed.
Figure 1
Open the manual safety/drain valve
Heat Transfer Fluid
The central heating system is filled with heat
transfer fluid (HTF), a solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze and 50% water.
! WARNING: The boiler must not be
switched on if there is no HTF in the system.
The antifreeze manufacturer will have a
maximum water hardness recommendation.
Read the product label or contact the product
manufacturer for details.
Note: For re-filling Alde recommends
antifreeze meeting VAG G12++ or G13
specification, and deionised water (0 ppm).
50:50 ethylene glycol antifreeze and water
will protect against frost down to -35–37 °C.
A refractometer and/or hydrometer can be
used to measure the strength of the antifreeze
solution.
Corrosion protection will vary depending on
the lifespan of the antifreeze. Read the product
label or contact the product manufacturer for
details.
Opening the safety/drain valve
! WARNING: Always replace the HTF in
accordance with the antifreeze product’s
lifespan. If in any doubt, replace the HTF
after 2 years.
The corrosion inhibitors found in ethylene
glycol antifreeze may not be cross-compatible.
When topping up or replacing the HTF, ensure
the new antifreeze is compatible with the
current antifreeze product. Read the product
label or contact the product manufacturer for
details.
Note: As a rough guideline, blue and red
antifreeze products are not compatible with
each other, but VAG G12++ and G13 spec
antifreeze (purple/magenta) is compatible
with both.
Figure 1
124
Failure to fill with suitable HTF may result in
severe damage to your Alde system, and is not
covered under warranty.
ALDE HEATING OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Draining
The central heating system is filled with HTF
through the expansion tank, either by hand, or
using the Alde service pump. Any containers
used for handling or storing the HTF should
be checked first, and must be visibly clean
to avoid introducing contaminants or foreign
objects into the system.
A drain is fitted in the central heating system to
allow draining of the HTF. Because the pipes
step up and down, some HTF will be left in
the system after draining. Contact an ALDE
certified agent to drain and re-fill your system.
Alde recommends using the Alde 1900-811 or
839 twin-motor service pump to fill the system.
To fill the system by hand, unscrew the
expansion tank cap (Fig 2 [R]), and lift the
circulation pump (Fig 2 [S]) out of the tank (if
applicable). Carefully pour the HTF into the
tank, and repeat until the fluid level is about 1
cm above the MIN mark when cold.
Figure 2
Central Heating
The boiler is set to an upper limit temperature
of 85°C, i.e., the temperature of the heat
transfer fluid (HTF) as it circulates around the
pipes, radiators, convectors, et al.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Filling
To ensure the best performance from hydronic
heating, air must be able to circulate freely
around the back of the furniture (Fig 3). Air
vents, cut into the top and bottom of the
furniture must be unobstructed by carpets,
cushions, or stowage, etc.
The full length of a convector should be
ventilated for best performance.
Note: Use gas and electric heating
simultaneously for the best performance.
The boiler will only use as much energy as is
needed, and is 93% efficient on a SEBDUK
based test.
Figure 3
125
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
ALDE HEATING OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Bleeding Air
The HTF will contain some air. This is
unavoidable. Air bubbles can also be
introduced when the system is filled.
In a newly-filled central heating system, you
will need to bleed air from the bleed points
to ensure best performance. There is an
automatic air bleed valve on the boiler. There is
also an air vent on the expansion tank.
Bleed points are installed at strategic points
within the system to allow any trapped air to
be bled off.
Note: Contact the dealer or installer for
details on where the bleed points are in your
system, and how to access them.
To bleed the system, set the desired
temperature to 30°C and select gas heating on
the control panel.
If fitted set the 12V inline circulation pump on
the side of the boiler to speed 5 (Fig 1 [D]),by
turning the blue speed dial clockwise, on the
face of the pump motor. NB: Speed is not
adjustable if using the 12V circulation pump
fitted in the expansion tank.
IMPORTANT: After 10 mins, set the pump
back to its normal running speed (2 for a
caravan, 3 for a motorhome).
Now power off the Alde 3020 Compact
HE boiler completely, making sure that the
circulation pump is not active.
Follow the flow pipe
from the boiler, and
bleed the system at
each bleed point.
If Alde bleed points
have been fitted,
these are metal bleed
screws mounted on
black EPDM rubber
connectors (Fig 4). Have a cloth in hand. To
open, turn the screw anticlockwise between
thumb and forefinger. Air will hiss out.When
fluid trickles out, close the bleed screw and
mop up fluid with the cloth.
126
Fig 4
Move on to the next bleed point and repeat,
until all bleed points have been tended to.
Air Lock
If enough trapped air accumulates at one
point, an air lock can result and prevent the
circulation of hydronic heating.
A ramp or steep slope can be used to raise
one end of the vehicle, causing the trapped
air to shift around the system. Repeat the full
bleed procedure. A caravan can be slowly and
carefully tilted to reproduce this effect.
To clear a stubborn air lock in under 15
minutes, an Alde-certified service agent can
use the Alde 1900-811 or 839 twin-motor
service pump.
230v ELECTRIC
The Alde 3020 Compact HE boiler has two
230 V electric heating elements, outputting
1050 W and 2100 W, or 3150 W combined,
and drawing 5 A, 9 A, and 14 A respectively
(rounded).
230v breakers, fuses, fused spurs and isolator
switches should be rated for 16 A.
Before using electric heating, check the
current limit on the electric supply you are
hooking up to.
• 6 A limit, only use 1 kW electric heating.
• 10 A limit, use 1–2 kW electric heating.
• 16 A limit, use 1–3 kW electric heating.
Note: If the electric supply has unstable
voltage, the amperage will also fluctuate.
ALDE HEATING OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
BS 5482 Part 1 states, “For butane cylinders,
satisfactory service might not be obtained
at temperatures of less than 10°C; the most
suitable temperature range is from 13 to 30°C.
For temperatures less than 13°C, the use of
propane should be considered.”
For this reason, Alde recommends using
propane gas for all year round gas heating.
LPG cylinders contain both gas and liquid
forms. When the cylinder is filled, high pressure
transforms the gas into liquid. The liquid
reverts to gas when the valve on the cylinder
is opened.
LPG is a flammable gas. It can be a fire and
explosion hazard if stored or used incorrectly.
Store cylinders vertically and securely, to
prevent them from toppling.
Do not mount your LPG cylinder horizontally
or use liquid phase gas cylinders. Liquid–gas
explosion may result. Read the product label
or contact product manufacturer for details.
LPG is heavier than air. Should a gas leak
occur the fitted floor vents will allow the
gas to escape from the caravan. For this
reason always ensure that floor vents are
unobstructed.
! WARNING: The boiler compartment
contains the gas connection, floor vents and
the flue hoses. Do not place stowage in the
boiler compartment.
In the event of a gas leak, or if you smell gas:
• Extinguish all naked flames
• Open all doors and windows
•C
lose all gas valves, including the valve on
the cylinder.
• Do not operate any electrical appliances or
switches.
• Arrange for immediate inspection of the
gas system by a competent person in
accordance with current local regulations.
LPG from the cylinder is reduced in pressure
by a regulator, and is supplied to the boiler
at low pressure (30 mbar). Never use an
unregulated high pressure supply.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
LPG
LPG (liquefied petroleum gas) has two main
variants, propane and butane gas. The gas
heating in your Alde 3020 Compact boiler can
use propane or butane gas as fuel. Many LPG
fuels contain a mixture of propane, butane and
other additives.
Where oil and dirt in the gas supply are a
concern, gas filters should be fitted to prevent
blockage of the boiler gas valve.
Note: Gas heating must not be used whilst
driving your vehicle unless a safety shut-off
device is fitted to the gas system. Current
local regulations must be adhered to.
Flue
The burning of LPG produces CO² (carbon
dioxide), a non-toxic, asphyxiant gas.
Exhaust flue gas can cause possible burns
and poisoning. Avoid inhaling exhaust flue gas.
! WARNING:
Do not position awnings, tents or other
enclosures around the flue terminal.
Air supply is essential for clean combustion.
The air intake is located in the flue terminal. For
best performance, the flue terminal should be
well vented. If leaving the gas heating unused
for a period, ensure the flue terminal is covered
to prevent pest animals nesting in the flue.
! WARNING:
Do not obstruct the flue. Be careful not to
flood the flue when washing the vehicle.
! WARNING: Air is sucked into the
combustion chamber via the air intake.
The gas heating must not be used when
refuelling the vehicle at the service station or
related facility.
• Do not smoke.
127
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
ALDE HEATING OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Maintenance
There is no manufacturer’s service requirement
for the Alde 3020 Compact boiler itself.
Current local regulations must be adhered
to. The installation of the boiler should be
inspected annually for gas safety.
LPG hoses should be regularly checked for
signs of damage and should be replaced, at
maximum, after 5 years of use.
Bleed air from the system when newly filled,
when the vehicle has been standing unused
for a period, and before departing on holiday.
The fluid level in the expansion tank should be
about 1 cm above the MIN mark when cool.
The heat transfer fluid (HTF) should be topped
up if below this level, to prevent a break in
circulation. Only top up with compatible HTF.
Note: Never leave the system empty of HTF.
! WARNING: Always replace the HTF in
accordance with the antifreeze product’s
lifespan. If in any doubt, replace the HTF
after 2 years.
Failure to maintain the condition of HTF may
result in frost and/or corrosion damage, and is
not covered under warranty.
When the hot water cylinder is in continuous
use, it should be drained and refilled once a
month. This recreates the air cushion in the hot
water cylinder that absorbs pressure surges.
Winter
When camping in the winter, always ensure
the flue terminal remains unobstructed
by snow and ice. Extensions for roof flue
terminals, and condensate spouts for side flue
terminals are available from Alde.
Check the strength of the heat transfer fluid
(HTF) with a hydrometer and/or refractometer.
It should measure 50% ethylene glycol
antifreeze, or -35-37°C.
The central heating can still be used with no
freshwater in the system. The air in the hot
water cylinder is heated but no damage can
result.
128
! WARNING: Always drain down and
completely empty the hot water cylinder
when there is risk of frost, unless the vehicle
is explicitly stated to be self-winterising by
the vehicle manufacturer.
If camping in temperatures below -10°C,
consider carrying spare parts in the event
of an emergency. Alde recommends a 12v
circulation pump for the expansion tank (with
cabling), a PCB, and 4–5 litres of ready to use
antifreeze. These spare parts should be kept
well insulated and in the warmest part of the
vehicle; for example, in the wardrobe, near to
the expansion tank pipes.
If storing the vehicle for winter, ensure the flue
terminal is covered to prevent pest animals
nesting in the flue.
If using the light duty 12v circulation pump in
the expansion tank, do not leave the central
heating on over winter, even with a low desired
temperature set.
Note: Air the vehicle over winter without
wearing out the light duty pump. Use
the programmable Alde control panel to
automatically heat the vehicle for 24 hours,
once a week.
ALDE HEATING OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
The Alde control panel will display any error
messages. See the Operating and Installation
Instructions supplied separately.
The system is completely dead, the
control panel is blank
• Check the 20 mm T3.15 Amp glass fuse in
the boiler. This is located under the lid of the
black plastic service hatch, in a green plastic
fuse holder.
• Check that hot water boost is not activated
on the Alde control panel.
• Use gas and electric heating.
• Check that vents in the furniture are not
obstructed.
• Check the condition of the heat transfer fluid.
• Most vehicles will reach a comfortable
temperature within an hour, in non-extreme
conditions.
• Check the 12v supply to the boiler, it should
be above 12v.
If problems persist, please contact Alde, or
your dealer or installer.
• Check the 12v cable is plugged into the
boiler. Check the cable is plugged into the
Alde control panel.
WARRANTY
The boiler will not ignite on gas
• Check the gas cylinder is full. Try a different
gas cylinder, ensuring it is propane gas.
• The system may not need to use gas
heating, if also using electric heating.
• The fluids in the boiler may already be at
operating temperature.
The boiler will not heat on 230 V electric
• Check that any 230v isolator switches are on
(they will often have an LED indicator).
• Check the 230v supply to the vehicle.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Trouble-Shooting
Alde undertakes to rectify any manufacturing
defect or early component failure through
normal use that occurs within 12 months of
the installation date.
If your Alde boiler develops a fault, your first
action should be to contact your dealer or
installer, as they will be familiar with your
installation and vehicle, and how to make a
claim under warranty.
Alde International (UK) Ltd Huxley Close Park
Farm South Wellingborough Northamptonshire
NN8 6AB
Tel. 01933 677765
www.alde.co.uk
• The fluids in the boiler may already be at
operating temperature.
No hot water
• Check that hot water ignore is not activated
on the Alde control panel.
• Check that constant pumping is not
activated on the Alde control panel.
• Check for other conflicting settings on the
Alde control panel.
• Check the freshwater supply and water
pump.
No central heating
• Bleed the system of air.
• Check the fluid level in the expansion tank.
• Check that the circulation pump is
responding.
129
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
ALDE HEATING OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Alde 3020 - 113
Colour Touch Operating
Instruction
The Alde 3020 Compact HE control panel
has two hard buttons and a non-capacitive,
colour touchscreen interface. The soft buttons
displayed on the screen are operated by
touching the screen with your finger.
Important: Please read the Alde 3020
Compact HE operating instructions fully
before using the system
The system will now be drawing variable
0.1–1.5 A of current from the 12v supply.
2. Standby screen
The Standby Screen is displayed after the
Splash Screen. This screen contains useful
information about the status of your heating
system.
Note: If Standby Screen is set to “Dark” in
Backlight settings, the Standby Screen will
not be displayed, the screen will be dark
unless touched.
1. Starting the system
i. Both the control panel and boiler are off.
ii. T
o start the system, press the Power button
on the control panel. The Splash Screen is
displayed and green LED is lit. The boiler will
now start with the previously saved settings
(factory settings by default).
A. Clock
Clock is enabled. Day of the week and time
shown.
B. Outdoor temperature
Optional outdoor temperature sensor required.
C. Room temperature
Measured at the control panel.
(Optional discrete room temperature
sensors available).
D. Circulation pump
Central heating circulation pump is active.
E. Delayed start
Delayed Start/Cycle is enabled.
F. Day mode
Day Mode active.
G. Gas cylinder status
Gas Cylinder Status. Full/empty and active
EisEx shown. (Additional accessories required).
130
ALDE HEATING OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
I. 230v supply
If not displayed, the boiler is not receiving 230v
supply.
J. Power button
Press to switch system on-off. Lit green LED
indicates system is on.
K. Menu button
Press to access Main Menu from Standby
Screen or Settings Menu.
3. Main menu
Press MENU button to access the Main Menu
from the Standby Screen or Settings Menu.
The screen will revert to the Standby Screen
after 30 secs if untouched.
i. Standby Screen. Press MENU button.
Desired Room Temperature
The desired room temperature can be set from
5 to 30°C, in 0.5 increments.
Tip! The World Health Organisation
recommends a room temperature of 18–24°C
for healthy living.
Note: If Day or Night Mode are active, the
temperature cannot be adjusted, the Plus
and Minus buttons will be greyed out.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
H. Night mode
Night Mode active.
1. The current desired room temperature is
displayed.
2. Adjust by pressing Plus or Minus button.
Domestic Hot Water
The Alde boiler stores 8.4 Litres of hot water
as standard. If the hot water cylinder is empty,
the air is heated but no damage can result.
Tip! In a good summer, for example, lower
the desired temperature on the control panel
to around 10°C. The central heating will not
circulate (unless the temperature drops to
10°C), but you can still control hot water.
Note: If Day or Night Mode’s Hot Water
Ignore is active, the hot water cannot be
adjusted, the Plus and Minus buttons will be
greyed out.
ii. M
ain Menu.
a. What’s Activated Menu
[Not displayed if no activated functions are
detected.]
b. Settings Menu
i. Hot Water Ignore. Volume bar empty.
No attempt is made to heat hot water
specifically. This saves energy when the
freshwater is drained down.
ii. Hot Water Normal. Volume bar half-full. Hot
water is heated to greater than 50°C. NB: If
Circulation Pump is set to Continuous, this
option will not be available.
iii. Hot Water Boost. Volume bar full. Central
heating circulation is disabled for 30 mins.
Hot water is heated to greater than 65°C.
After 30 mins the system reverts to Hot
Water Normal.
iv. Adjust by pressing Plus or Minus button.
131
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
ALDE HEATING OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Electric Heating
Activated Functions
Check that 230v supply is displayed on the
Standby Screen. The Alde boiler is hard wired
to use power economically and there are times
when it may use no power at all, even if set to
3kW.
Night Mode is enabled, but
may or may not be active,
depending on the time and
day.
i. Select Off, 1, 2 or 3 kW electric heating.
More power equals better performance, but
may be restricted by the current (amps) limit
on the electric hook-up.
Delayed Start/Cycle is
enabled, but may or may not
be active, depending on the
time and day.
ii. Adjust by pressing Plus or Minus button.
Max current draw from 230 V supply is 4.5
A on 1 kW, 9 A on 2 kW, 14 A on 3 kW. If
the electric supply has unstable voltage, the
amperage will also fluctuate.
Alde Smart-Control or daisychained, third party control
panel is enabled.
Gas Heating
Circulation Pump is set to
Continuous. NB: This will
reduce the hot water supply.
The Alde boiler is hard wired to use power
economically. The gas burner has two stages,
shifting dynamically between low or full flame.
There are times when it may use no power at
all, even if gas heating is selected.
Day Mode is enabled, but
may or may not be active,
depending on the time and
day.
i. Press the Flame button to select gas heating.
Green is on, blue is off.
Use both gas and electric heating for best
performance.
Load Monitor is enabled and
an amp limit is set.
(model specific)
What’s Activated Menu
Press the A button to access the What’s
Activated Menu. This screen shows any
functions that are activated and allows direct
access to that function by pressing its button.
NB: The A button is not displayed if no
functions are activated.
Note: Not all Alde functions are relevant to a
caravan installation, as indicated below
132
Settings Menu
Press the Tool Button to access the Settings
Menu from the Main Menu. Lower level
functions can be accessed by from these
screens by pressing the buttons. NB: If a
function is not available its button is greyed
out.
To return to the Main Menu, press the MENU
button.
ALDE HEATING OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
llows you to programme the
A
boiler to start at a specified time
and day, weekly. It will provide
heating using the last saved
settings for 24 hours, before
automatically shutting down
again. This is recommended for
airing the vehicle over winter if
stored locally and hooked up to
230 V power. Once Delayed Start/
Cycle is enabled, the system
should be shut down by pressing
the Power button.
Clock
he clock must be set for
T
programmable functions to
activate at the correct time/day. If
12 V power is lost, the clock will
reset.
TiP! The optional Alde 3010-414 battery
backup uses two AA batteries and allows the
clock memory to be stored even if 12 V power
is lost.
Navigation Arrows
here are four screens in the
T
Settings Menu. The up/down
arrows allow you to navigate
between them.
Night Mode (requires Clock to
be set)
llows you to programme the
A
boiler to automatically change
and select settings at night. Set
a start and stop time for the
night-time period. Set a day of the
week, or “All” for the same daily
programme. You can also define:
• Desired room temperature
• Invert Standby Screen
• Hot water ignore
•Temperature sensor (if discrete
room temperature sensors are
connected)
• AC Quiet Mode (if Truma Aventa
Comfort air-conditioning unit is
connected)
Day Mode (requires Clock to
be set)
llows you to programme the
A
boiler to automatically change
and select settings during the day.
Set a start and stop time for the
day-time period. Set a day of the
week, or “All” for the same daily
programme. You can also define:
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Delayed Start/Cycle (requires
Clock to be set)
• Desired room temperature
• Hot water ignore
Temperature Offset
ecalibrate the room temperature
R
displayed by the control panel in
0.5 °C increments. If an outdoor
temperature sensor is connected,
this can also be recalibrated.
Return
Return to the previous menu.
Prioritise
elect whether to prioritise gas
S
heating or electric heating, when
using both. Less demand will be
placed on the non-prioritised fuel.
TiP! If you’re hooked up to a site with a flat
rate 230 V supply, but still want the extra
performance from gas heating, prioritise
electric heating to save money on gas.
Button Sound
Bleep when a button is pressed.
Backlight
he brightness of the Standby
T
Screen can be adjusted from 1–3.
The display mode of the Standby
Screen can also be set.
Dark. The Standby Screen is deactivated,
the control panel may appear dormant
except for the power LED. Pressing the
screen will activate the Standby Screen for
133
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
ALDE HEATING OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
30 secs. Suited for use in dark/night-time
conditions.
Bright. The Standby Screen shows dark
characters on a light background. Suited for
use in bright/day-time conditions.
Invert. The Standby Screen shows light
characters on a dark background. Suited for
low light conditions.
Antimicrobial (requires Clock
to be set)
ot Water Boost will automatically
H
activate at 02:00 every morning.
This further reduces the risk of
Legionella bacteria.
Circulation Pump
elect which circulation pump
S
to use for the central heating,
depending on what pumps are
installed. (your caravan is fitted
with ‘pump manual 12V’).
Pump
Manual 12 V.
For the 12V inline circulation
pump with manual 5-speed
dial.
Pump
Remote
12 V
For the remote-controlled
12 V inline circulation
pump. Pump speed can
also be set. Speed 2 is
recommended. Speed 4–5
should only be used prior to
bleeding the system of air.
Optional
Pump 12 V.
For the optional 12V
circulation pump in the
expansion tank.
Pump mode can also be set.
Cont. The pump is continuously active. This
will reduce the hot water supply. For testing
the circulation pump in the summer, if room
temperature exceeds 30°C.
Thermo. The pump is controlled by the room
thermostat.
External Switch
llows you to use a third party,
A
external switch to start up and
shutdown the boiler. When the
external switch starts the boiler,
it will provide heating using the
last saved settings. Once External
Switch is enabled, the system
should be shut down by pressing
the Power button. The external
switch then takes control of the
boiler.
Ext. When a circuit is made at X18 on the
boiler, the boiler is started. When the circuit
is broken, the boiler shuts down. For use
with a third party rocker or toggle switch,
or compatible telematics systems. NB: The
Alde 3010-219 adaptor lead is available for
connecting an external switch.
230V. When 230V is detected, the boiler
is started. When 230V supply is lost, the
boiler shuts down. No additional accessories
required.
Off. External Switch is disabled.
TiP! Hiring out a vehicle? Your customers can
operate the central heating/hot water with a
convenient wall switch, whilst the control panel
is fitted in a locked maintenance cupboard
with a discrete room temperature sensor. Onoff, no hassles.
Language
134
Pump 230 V.
For the 230V inline
circulation pump
Auto.
Automatically selects the
230V pump when a 230V
supply is detected, or the
optional 12V pump when
only 12V supply is available.
Select English, French or German
language. NB: The Service Menu
is English language only.
ALDE HEATING OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Error Log
If an Alde 3010-246 load monitor
is installed, this allows you to
set an amp limit from 5–17 A
for the vehicle’s 230V power. If
the current drawn by the vehicle
exceeds the amp limit, the boiler
will automatically reduce power.
Press the Warning button to access the Error
Log from the Service Menu. The most recent
20 error messages are displayed. To verify an
error message, remove the system from the
12V and 230V supply. Wait 10 secs before
restoring 12V and 230V power to the system.
This helps avoid tripping the
circuit breakers on the electric
hook up. The load monitor can be
disabled by selecting “Off”.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Load Monitor
Settings Menu
Press the Tool Button to access the Settings
Menu from the Main Menu. Lower level
functions can be accessed by from these
screens by pressing the buttons. NB: If a
function is not available its button is greyed
out.
Reset
Press Reset to restore factory default settings,
and the Error Log will be cleared. NB: The
Main Menu will be set to 22°C, Hot Water
Normal, 1 kW electric heating and gas heating.
Note: Using Reset to restore factory
default settings does not clear Installed
Accessories.
4. Shutting down the system
To save energy, the control panel only updates
the boiler after the last adjustment is made.
Wait 10 secs before shutting down the system
to ensure the boiler is updated.
Press the Power button again. The screen
goes dark, the green LED is unlit. The system
is off.
135
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
ALDE HEATING OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Installed Accessories Menu
After fitting an accessory to the Alde 3020
Compact HE, it must be installed in the control
panel software by ticking the box for that
accessory in the Installed Accessories Menu,
unless otherwise noted. Press the Installed
Accessories button to access the menu from
the Settings Menu.
The following options are shown as standard.
Tick the box to install:
• Alde Smart Control, or third party control
panel (connected to JP3 on Alde control
panel)
• Optional 12V circulation pump in expansion
tank (connected at X4 on boiler)
• Load Monitor (connected to X5 on boiler)
• 12V inline circulation pump with manual
5-speed dial
• Remote controlled 12V inline circulation
pump
• 230V inline circulation pump
5. Setup
How you set up your system will depend on
what accessories are installed and your user
preferences. To get you started, here’s how to
setup some of the more common features.
Restore default factory settings
Before using the system for the first time,
restore default factory settings. Your control
panel may have been tested by the dealer or
installer, and some settings may have been
changed unintentionally.
i. Press Tool button to access the Settings
Menu (bottom right in Main Menu).
ii. Press down arrow, until Reset button is
displayed.
iii. Press the Reset button to proceed
136
ALDE HEATING OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
The backlight on the Standby Screen can be
disturbing if the control panel is visible from
your bed. It can be inverted for white text on
black background.
i. Press Tool button to access the Settings
Menu (bottom right in Main Menu).
ii. Press down arrow, until Backlight button is
displayed.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Setup Standby Screen for bedtime
iii. Press Backlight button, select Invert to
proceed.
Setup Antimicrobial function
To actively kill Legionella, setup the
Antimicrobial function. At 2:00 every night,
the hot water will be heated to over 65°C
for 30 mins. This further reduces the risk of
Legionella.
i. Press Tool button to access the Settings
Menu (bottom right in Main Menu).
ii. Press Clock button, set the time and day.
Press Return.
iii. Press down arrow, until Antimicrobial button
is displayed.
iv. Press Antimicrobial button to proceed.
137
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
ALDE HEATING OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Troubleshooting
No central heating
Any error messages will be displayed on the
Standby Screen. Error messages can be
cleared by switching off 12 V supply to the
boiler for 10 secs.
• Bleed the system of air.
The system is completely dead,
the control panel is blank
• Check the 20 mm T3.15 Amp glass fuse in
the boiler. This is located under the lid of the
black plastic service hatch, in a green plastic
fuse holder.
• Check the 12 V supply to the boiler, it should
be above 12 V.
• Check the 12 V cable is plugged into the
boiler. Check the cable is plugged into the
Alde control panel.
• Check the fluid level in the expansion tank.
• Check that the circulation pump is
responding.
• Check that hot water boost is not activated
on the Alde control panel.
• If electric heating is not being used, set it to
“Off” on the Alde control panel.
• Use gas and electric heating for best
performance.
• Check that vents in the furniture are not
obstructed.
• Check the condition of the heat transfer fluid.
The boiler will not ignite on gas, but no
error message
• Most vehicles will reach a comfortable
temperature within 40 mins, in non-extreme
conditions.
• The system may not need to use gas heating
if also using electric heating.
Circulation pump active even though
system is off
• The fluids in the boiler may already be at
operating temperature.
• 12 V supply to the boiler dropped to 7 V
momentarily. Check 12 V supply for stability.
The boiler will not heat on 230 V electric
“Panel failure 1” & “Panel failure 2”
• Check the circuit breaker and any 230 V
fuses.
• Moisture is trapped in the control panel.
• Check that any 230 V isolator switches are
on (they will often have an LED indicator and
230V fuse).
• Check the 230 V supply to the vehicle.
• The fluids in the boiler may already be at
operating temperature.
No hot water
• Check that Hot Water Ignore is not activated
on the Alde control panel.
• Check that Continuous pumping is not
activated on the Alde control panel.
• Check for other conflicting settings on the
Alde control panel.
• Check the fresh water supply and water
pump.
• Remove the Alde control panel from
the vehicle and air in a warm, dry place
overnight.
“Gas failure”
• Out of gas or gas is not igniting.
• Check the gas cylinder is full. Try a different
gas cylinder, ensuring it is propane gas.
• Check the gas regulator and any isolation
valves are open and not frozen.
“Overheat red fail” or “Overheat blue fail”
• Bleed the system of air.
• Check the fluid level in the expansion tank. It
should be 1 cm above Min mark when cool.
• Check the correct circulation pump is
installed, selected and responding.
• 12 V supply to the boiler dropped to 7 V
momentarily. Check 12 V supply for stability.
• Wait 15 mins for the fluid to cool down.
138
ALDE HEATING OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
• Failsafe in boiler has triggered.
• Check the fluid level in the expansion tank.
It should be 1 cm above the Min mark when
cool.
• Check the boiler compartment is ventilated,
and that the vents are unobstructed. Do not
place stowage in the boiler compartment.
“Fan failure”
• Check control panel part number. Control
panel 3020-013 is for 3020 A-series boiler,
3020-113 is for 3020 HE-series boiler.
If problems persist, please contact Alde, or
your dealer or installer.
For our frequently asked questions, or
download all instruction manuals, please visit
our website at: www.alde.co.uk
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
“Overheat PCB”
• Combustion fan speed too low. Bearing may
be stiff after a period of disuse.
• Automatically clears after 5 mins. Please try
again.
“Connection failure”
• Loose connection between Alde control
panel and boiler.
• Unplug cable at the control panel and boiler,
then carefully plug back in.
• Check there is slack on the cable at the
control panel, but not excessive weight from
free- hanging/unmanaged cable.
“Window open”
• Optional window sensor has triggered, gas
heating is suspended. Automatically clears
and gas heating resumes when window is
closed.
“3rd Party Panel C. Fail”
• Break in comms between Alde control panel
and third party control panel.
• Check the cable between the Alde control
panel and third party control panel.
• Third party control panel is installed in
software but not fitted.
• Untick “Third Party Panel” in Installed
Accessories Menu.
“Low battery”
• 12 V supply to boiler has dropped below
10.5 V, possibly causing system brownout.
• Automatically clears when 12 V supply
reaches 11 V.
“No match Heater/Panel”
• Control panel is incompatible with boiler
PCB.
139
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
THETFORD REFRIGERATOR
Thetford refrigerator
Sprite Freedom & Sprite
Instructions for use
N3000-E series with LED control panel
Main parts
140
1. Refrigerator door
5a. On/off switch
2. Freezer door
5b. Confirmation button
3. Door lock
5c. Arrow buttons
4. Security lock (dependent on model)
5d. Symbols sources
5. Control panel LED
5e. Cooling level indicators
THETFORD REFRIGERATOR
5g. S
ymbol ‘batteries empty’ (optional extra)
6. Freezer compartment
7. Ice cube tray
8. Refrigerator compartment
9. Cooling fins
10. S
torage shelves
11. ,Vegetable bin
12. S
erial label
13. D
oor bins
14. B
ottle retainer
Introduction
This Thetford refrigerator is specially developed
for caravans or motorhomes. It meets high
quality standards, is user friendly and gives
you all the convenience during holidays and
short trips.
! WARNING: What to do if you smell a
pungent odour from the cooling system.
Switch off the refrigerator, extinguish any
naked flames, provide sufficient ventilation
through vents, windows and doors. Then
contact the Customer Service Department in
your country or holiday location.
Maintenance
• Make sure that installation, electrical
connection, maintenance and periodical
inspection of the gas system will be done
by a qualified technical person, according
to Thetford’s instructions (www.thetfordeurope.com) and local safety rules;
• Never open or damage the cooling system
at the back of your refrigerator. The
cooling system is pressurised and contains
substances that are harmful to your health;
Before operating and using this refrigerator
we advise you to read the manual completely.
Keep this manual in a safe place for future
reference.
• Never attempt to repair parts of the gas
system, the gas flue or electrical components
yourself. The repairs may only be done by a
qualified party. Please contact the Customer
Service Department for further support and
addresses;
For the latest version of the manual please visit
www.thetford-europe.com
• Before carrying out any kind of maintenance
or cleaning, switch off your refrigerator;
Use safely
• Never expose the refrigerator to rain.
For correct and safe use of this refrigerator,
you need to observe several precautions and
general recommendations. If these instructions
have not been followed, warranty claims will
not be accepted.
Use of gas
! WARNING: What to do if you smell gas.
Directly close the valve of the gas bottle,
extinguish any naked flames, do not switch
on any electrical devices or lighting, open
the windows and leave the room. Then
contact the Customer Service Department in
your country or holiday location.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
5f. Symbol ‘anti-condensation
(only for model B)
• The refrigerator only runs on liquid gas
(propane, butane or a mixture of these both).
It does not run on natural gas or coal gas;
• Only use gas which is mentioned on the
serial label inside the refrigerator;
• It is recommended to use an additional filter
when operating on Liquefied Petroleum Gas
(LPG);
• Make sure the type and position of the gas
bottle meets the latest technical regulations;
• Change the gas bottle in open air and out of
reach of any possible source of ignition;
• Never obstruct the ventilation openings in the
gas bottle storage location;
141
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
THETFORD REFRIGERATOR
• Keep flammable material away from the
refrigerator;
• Do not use gas to power your refrigerator in
the vicinity of petrol stations.
Food
• Respect the expiry date printed on the
packaging of food;
• Defrosting, cleaning or maintenance of the
refrigerator can shorten the preservability of
food.
Switch on refrigerator
Note: To secure optimal performance, level
your vehicle before operating the refrigerator.
Note: We advise to clean the inside of
the refrigerator properly, before using the
refrigerator.
To switch on the refrigerator, press the on/off
switch and hold it for 1 second. A light in the
on/off switch will turn green.
Note: After 10 seconds the settings will dim.
The green light indicates the refrigerator is
still in function.
To check the settings push the confirmation
button. The last selected settings will light up.
For optimal performance, switch on the
refrigerator 8 hours before placing food in it.
Selecting source
After switching on the refrigerator, push
the confirmation button and hold it for two
seconds. The symbols for the sources light up
and start to blink.
Choose the desired source by pushing the
arrow buttons.
Confirm your choice with the confirmation
button.
142
Sources
he refrigerator is powered by
T
the mains.
he refrigerator is powered by
T
the battery of your vehicle.
he refrigerator is powered by
T
the connection of a gas bottle.
Note: Always use the gas connection
or mains voltage to start up and cool.
Operating on 12 V is only effective while the
engine of the vehicle is running.
Note: The performance of the refrigerator,
by operating on 12 V, is dependant on the
thickness and length of the wiring and the
overall installation of the vehicle.
Note: When selecting gas, the flame should
be ignited within 30 seconds. If the system
fails, restart the refrigerator and select the
gas source again.
Note: From about 1000m above sea level
problems of a physical nature can occur
when lighting the gas. This does not mean
that the refrigerator is not working properly..
THETFORD REFRIGERATOR
Anti-condensation (present on model B)
After switching on the refrigerator, push
the confirmation button and hold it for two
seconds.
To prevent the control panel from
condensation, the anti-condensation function
is automatically switched on. Only switch off
this function when little energy is present.
The symbols for the sources start to blink.
Push the confirmation button again.
The cooling level indicators start to blink. Use
the arrow button to choose the desired cooling
level.
Confirm your choice with the confirmation
button.
Lowest
cooling level
Highest
cooling level
Push both arrow buttons together at once and
hold them for 2 seconds. The symbol ‘anticondensation off’ will light up on the control.
To switch on the function again, push both
arrow buttons for 2 seconds once more.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Selecting cooling level
Note: When your refrigerator runs on AA
batteries, anti-condensation is switched off
automatically.
Use of refrigerator compartment
Your refrigerator meets the climate class SN
requirements according to EN/IOS 7371 at a
temperature of 10˚C to 32˚C.
Note: We advise to set the refrigerator on
cooling level 3, with an ambient temperature
between 15˚C and 25˚C. A higher
temperature needs a higher cooling level, a
lower temperature a lower level.
You can organise your refrigerator as desired
by moving the storage shelves and door bins
in height.
Note: Make sure the door can still be closed
after reorgansing shelves and bins.
Note: To improve the cooling performance
of your refrigerator in high temperatures,
Thetford advises to install the Ventilator Kit.
It helps to detract the warm air quicker to
the vents. The Ventilator Kit is suitable for all
Thetford refrigerators.
143
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
THETFORD REFRIGERATOR
Moving storage shelves
urn the plastic clamp
T
on the right side of the
storage shelf upwards,
as illustrated. Lift the
right side a bit, and
move the storage shelf
to the desired position.
First place the left side of the storage shelf in
the refrigerator wall, then the right side in the
corresponding groove. Turn the plastic clamp
downwards. Your storage shelf is fixated again.
Moving door bins
ush a door bin out of
P
the locking with both
hands, as illustrated.
Place this door bin back
in the desired position
and push it back on the
locking. The door bin is
fixated again.
Organising food
After a minimum of 8 hours of cooling, the
food can be placed in the refrigerator. Do not
completely cover the cooling fins with food,
to preserve an optimal performance of the
refrigerator. Make sure air can still circulate
around the fins.
Note: To prevent your refrigerator from ice
formation, always cover liquid products, let
warm products cool down before placing
them in the refrigerator and don’t open the
door longer than necessary.
Note: To reduce cooling time, store only
pre-cooled foods in the refrigerator.
Note: To prevent the food from drying out
or your refrigerator from odours, store food
separately in closed boxes.
Use of freezer compartment
You can use the freezer compartment to keep
food frozen or to make ice cubes with the
special delivered tray.
144
!
CAUTION! Never keep carbonated
liquids in the freezer compartment.
!
CAUTION! If the refrigerator has to
perform for a longer period in internal vehicle
temperature below 10˚C, a constant regulation of temperature in the freezer compartment can’t be guaranteed. The temperature
can increase and the food may defrost in the
freezer compartment.
Making ice cubes
Fill 2/3 of the ice cube with water and put the
tray in the freezer compartment. Make sure
you only use drinking water.
!
CAUTION! Never eat ice cubes or
popsicles directly out of the freezer compartment. This can cause burn wounds.
Note: To quicken the process, make ice
cubes at night, when the refrigerator has
more capacity. Place the ice cube tray in an
empty freezer on the bottom and the back.
While driving
! WARNING: In Europe it is only allowed
to run your refrigerator on gas while driving,
if a gas system with break protection is
installed and local regulations are respected.
Note: Because of varying outside conditions
during driving, good performance on gas
can’t be guaranteed. Therefore Thetford
does not advise to run your refrigerator on
gas while driving.
Make sure all products in your refrigerator
can’t move while driving. Secure the bottles in
the door with the bottle retainer and fixate all
food on the storage shelves.
THETFORD REFRIGERATOR
Defrosting
When you close and press the door of the
refrigerator, the door locks automatically. While
driving this door lock also secures the door.
Some models have an extra security lock on
the bottom of the refrigerator. To be sure the
door will not open while driving, push the black
security lock over the pin on the door.
A layer of ice on the cooling fins will decrease
the cooling capacity and durability of your
refrigerator. Therefore your refrigerator is
provided with an automatic defrost system,
which prevents ice formation.
! WARNING: Never let children play or
hide in the refrigerator. Children can be
trapped and possibly suffocate.
Winter use
When you are going to use the refrigerator with
an outside temperature below 10°C, ,install a
suitable winter cover.
This cover will protect your refrigerator against
too cold air and makes sure the refrigerator will
still perform optimally.
Make sure you remove the winter cover again
once the temperature is above 10°C.
Cleaning
It is important to regularly clean the refrigerator
for optimal performance. Clean the inside with
a soft cloth and a mild household cleaner.
Use a wet, soft cloth for the outside of the
refrigerator. Make sure the vents on the outside
of the vehicle are always dust-tight.
! WARNING: Never clean your refrigerator
with soap or aggressive, caustic or sodabased cleaning agents.
! WARNING: The loose parts of
the refrigerator are not suitable for the
dishwasher.
! WARNING: Water through the vents may
damage your refrigerator. Therefore install
winter covers before washing your vehicle.
Switch off refrigerator
Before defrosting the refrigerator or sorting
your vehicle, switch off the refrigerator. Push
the on/off switch and hold it for 2 seconds to
switch off the refrigerator. All lights will go out.
Despite this system, it is also possible to
manually defrost your refrigerator on occasion.
Remove all food, wrap it tightly in newspaper
and put it on a cold place or in a insulated
bag. Then open the doors. Put dry towels in
the refrigerator to catch the remaining water.
When the refrigerator is defrosted, thoroughly
dry the inside.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Door lock
! WARNING: Do not speed up the
defrosting process by removing the ice layer
with force or sharp objects or by using a
hairdryer.
Storage
If you do not expect to use your refrigerator for
a longer period, it is important to thoroughly
empty, defrost and clean the complete
refrigerator. Then install the winter cover
the vents, to protect your refrigerator during
storage.
Note: To prevent odours and mould in the
refrigerator, keep all doors open during the
storage.
Rotate the hook at door lock 45 degrees and
lock it in place by using the strike plate.
! WARNING: Make sure the gas taps of
the gas bottle are closed during storage.
! WARNING: Water through the vents may
damage your refrigerator. Therefore install
winter covers before washing your vehicle.
Disposal
Your refrigerator has been designed and
manufactured with high quality materials
and components, which can be recycled
and reused. The cooling system contains
ammonia as the coolant and ozone friendly
cyclopentane as the blowing agent in the
145
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
THETFORD REFRIGERATOR
foam. The refrigerators are free of any CFCs /
HCFCs and HFCs.
When your refrigerator has reached its end
of life, dispose the product according to the
local rules. Do not dispose the refrigerator with
normal household waste. The correct disposal
of your old product will help prevent potential,
negative consequences to the environment
and human health.
Questions?
If you require further information or have any
questions about your refrigerator, please visit
our website www.thetford-europe.com. If you
still have questions, contact the Customer
Service Department in your country or your
holiday location.
For correct and efficient support, please
ensure all relevant product type information
is available.
146
THETFORD REFRIGERATOR
Some problems are indicated through blinking
lights on your control panel. First read the
instructions below. If these will not solve the
problem, contact your dealer or a Thetford
Service Centre.
I just replaced the batteries, but the
‘batteries empty’ symbol is already
blinking. What is wrong? Check if you
have used only new 1.5 V AA / LR6 batteries.
Rechargeable batteries for this function do not
work.
Problem
Actions you can take
The refrigerator does not work on 230V
- Check if the mains is available.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Troubleshooting
- Try to run the refrigerator on another power
source.
The refrigerator does not work on 12 V
- Check if the 12 V fuse in the fuse box of
your motorhome or car is till operational.
- Make sure the engine is running.
- Try to run the refrigerator on another power
source.
The refrigerator does not work on gas
- Check if the gas bottle is empty
- Check if the valve of the gas bottle and all
shut-off valves are open.
- Switch the refrigerator off and on again.
- Try to run the refrigerator on another power
source.
FAQ
What can I do, when the refrigerator does
not start? Check if you switched on the
refrigerator according to the instructions, if the
vehicle stands level or if there is an available
energy source to start the refrigerator with. If
none of this is the case, please contact your
dealer or a Thetford Service Centre.
The refrigerator does not cool sufficiently,
what can I do? Check if the vents aren’t
covered or blocked from the outside, if the
refrigerator stands level, if the highest cooling
setting of the refrigerator is selected, if the
door of the refrigerator still closes properly or
if there is not too much ice on the cooling fins.
If none of this is the case, please contact your
dealer or a Thetford Service Centre.
No winter cover is supplied with my
refrigerator, is this correct? The winter
cover is an accessory for your refrigerator,
which you can purchase at your dealer.
Spare Parts
Original Thetford spare parts are available
through your own dealer or an authorised
Thetford Service Centre.
Warranty
Thetford BV offers the end users of its
products a three year guarantee. In the case
of malfunction within the warranty period,
Thetford will replace or repair the product
at its discretion. In this case, the costs of
replacement, labour costs for the replacement
of defective components and/or the cost of
the parts themselves will be paid by Thetford.
All lights on the control panel are blinking,
what should I do? Please contact your dealer
or a Thetford Service Centre.
147
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
THETFORD REFRIGERATOR
1. To make a claim under this guarantee, the
user must take the product to his dealer
or an authorised Thetford Service Centre
(www.thetford-europe.com). The claim will
be assessed there.
2. Components replaced during repair under
guarantee become the property of Thetford.
3. This warranty does not prejudice current
consumer protection laws.
4. This warranty is not valid in the case of
products that are for, or are used from,
commercial purposes.
5. Guarantee claims falling into one of the
following categories will not be accepted:
- the product has been improperly used,
or the instructions in the manual have not
been followed;
- the product has not been installed in
accordance with the instructions;
- the product has been repaired by
unauthorised Thetford Service Centre;
- the product code or serial ID has been
changed;
- the product has been damaged by
circumstances outside the normal use of
the product.
6. The guarantee is only valid for Thetford
refrigerators that are built in a caravan or
camper van.
Thetford is not liable for any loss and/or
damage caused directly or indirectly by the
use of the refrigerator.
148
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
Guide to these operating instructions
Before you start using the refrigerator,please
read the operating instructions carefully.
These instructions provide you with the
necessary guidance for the proper use of your
refrigerator. Observe in particular the safety
instructions. Observation of the instructions
and handling recommendations is important
for dealing with the refrigerator safely and for
protecting you from injury and the refrigerator
from damage. You must understand what you
have read before you carry out a task.
Limitation of liability
All information and guidance in these operating
instructions were prepared after taking into
consideration the applicable standards and
regulations as well as the current state of
the art. Dometic reserves the right to make
changes at any time which are deemed to be
in the interest of improving the product and
safety.
Dometic will assume no liability for damage in
the case of :
• Non-observation of the operating instructions
• Application not in accordance with the
regulations or provisions
Keep these instructions in a safe place close
to the refrigerator so they may be referred to
at any time.
• Use of non-original spare parts
Copyright protection
• Effect of environmental influences, such as
- temperature fluctuations
- humidity
The information, texts and illustrations in these
instructions are copyright protected and are
subject to industrial property rights.
No part of these instructions may be
reproduced, copied or utilised in any other
way without written authorisation by Dometic
GmbH, Siegen.
Warranty
Warranty arrangements are in accordance
with EC Directive 44/1999/CE and the
normal conditions applicable for the country
concerned.
For warranty or other maintenance, please
contact our customer services department.
Any damage due to improper use is not
covered by the warranty. The warranty does
not cover any modifications to the appliance
or the use of non-original Dometic parts. The
warranty does not apply if the installation and
operating instructions are not adhered to and
no liability shall be entertained.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Dometic absorption refrigerator
(Challenger & Eccles)
• Modifications and interferences to the
appliance
Customer services
Dometic offers a pan-European customer
service network. Find your authorised
customer service centre by calling the
phone number indicated in the EuroService
Network book, EuroService Network - which
accompanies every refrigerator. You can also
obtain the address information of the nearest
customer service from www.dometic.com.
When contacting Dometic Customer Services,
please state the model, product number and
serial number together with the MLC code,
if applicable. You will find this information on
the rating plate inside the refrigerator. We
recommend that you note this data in the
field provided on the front page of the fridge’s
operation manual.
Spare parts
Parts can be ordered throughout Europe from
our customer services. Always give the model
and product number when you contact the
customer service! You will find this information
on the rating plate inside the refrigerator.
Environmental notice
Refrigerators manufactured by Dometic GmbH
are free of CFC/HCFC and HFC. Ammonia (a
149
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
natural compound of hydrogen and nitrogen)
is used in the cooling unit as a coolant.
Non-ozone-hazardous cyclopentane is used
as a propellant for manufacturing PU foam
insulation.
In order to ensure that the recyclable
packaging materials are re-used, they should
be sent to the customary local collection
system.
The appliance should be transferred to a
suitable waste disposal company that will
ensure re-use of the recyclable components
and proper disposal of the rest. For ecofriendly draining of the coolant from all absorber
refrigeration units, a suitable disposal plant
should be used.
Energy-saving tips
• At an average ambient temperature of 25°C,
it is sufficient to operate the refrigerator at
middle thermostat setting.
Safety instructions
Application according to regulations
This refrigerator is designed for installation
in recreation vehicles such as caravans
or motorhomes. The appliance has been
type approval tested for this application in
accordance with the EC Gas Directive.
The refrigerator is to be used solely for storing
foodstuffs.
! WARNING! The refrigerator is
not suitable for the proper storage of
medication. Please observe the instructions
in the medication package inserts.
User’s responsibility
• Do not expose the refrigerator to direct
sunlight.
Anyone operating the refrigerator must be
familiar with the safe handling and understand
the advice in these operating instructions.
Children may only operate the appliance, if they
have been made aware of how to operate the
refrigerator safely and the dangers attending
incorrect operation.
• Ensure that air circulation of the cooling unit
is not obstructed.
Protection of children when disposing of
the equipment
• Where possible, always store precooled
products.
• Defrosting at regular intervals saves energy
(see “Defrosting”). Open the refrigerator door
only for a short period of time when removing
products.
• Run the refrigerator for about 12 hours before
filling it.
! WARNING: When disposing of the
refrigerator, detach all refrigerator doors and
leave the storage racks in the refrigerator.
In this way inadvertent entrapment and
suffocation is prevented.
Working upon and checking
the refrigerator
! WARNING: Work on gas equipment,
exhaust system and electrical facilities must
be carried out by authorised personnel
only. Substantial damage to property and
/ or injury to persons can arise through
unprofessional procedures.
! WARNING: Never use an unshielded
flame to check gas bearing parts and pipes
for leakage! There is a danger of fire or
explosion.
150
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
cooling unit! It is under high pressure.
There is a danger of injury.
Information on coolant
Ammonia is used as a coolant. This is a natural
compound also used in household cleaning
agents (1 litre of Salmiak cleaner contains up
to 200g of ammonia - about twice as much as
is used in the refrigerator). Sodium chromate is
used for corrosion protection (1.8% by weight
of the solvent).
In the event of leakage (easily identifiable from
the strong odour), proceed as follows:
• Switch off the appliance.
• Air the room thoroughly.
• Inform authorised customer services.
Note: For your safety it was ascertained
in an expert’s report that no impairment
of health exists when the coolant is
discharged.
Operating the refrigerator with gas
It is imperative that the operating pressure
corresponds to the data specified on the rating
plate of the appliance. Compare the operating
pressure of the rating plate with the data
specified on the pressure reducing valve of the
liquid gas cylinder.
! WARNING: Operating the appliance with
gas is not permitted
• At petrol stations
• On ferry boats
• W
hile transporting the caravan by a
transporter or breakdown vehicle.
There is danger of fire!
Leave the equipment switched off.
Safety instructions when
storing foodstuffs
Instructions for storing food in
a refrigerator:
No refrigerator of any kind can improve the
quality of the food; refrigerators can only
maintain the food’s quality for a short duration
as from the time of storing it.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
! WARNING: Never open the absorber
Please observe the following particular
conditions for storing food in a refrigerator that
is built into a vehicle:
• A change in the climatic conditions such as
temperature fluctuations
• High temperatures inside the vehicle when
it is closed and parked in direct sunlight
(temperatures are possible up to 50°C)
• Use of the refrigerator during travel with the
power supply of 12V DC
• A refrigerator built in behind a window and
exposed to direct sunlight
• Storing the products too soon, i.e. shortly
after starting up the appliance for use
Under these particular conditions the
refrigerator cannot guarantee reaching the
temperature needed for perishables.
Perishables include all products with a
stipulated use-by date and a minimum storage
temperature of +4°C or less, especially for
meat, poultry, fish, sausages, pre-packed
foods.
• Pack raw and cooked foods separately (e.g.
in containers, aluminium foil, etc.).
• Only remove the outside packaging of single
packs if all the necessary information, e.g.
the use-by date, can also be read on the
single packs.
• Do not leave cooled goods outside the
refrigerator for too long.
• Place the foods with the next use-by date at
the front, accordingly.
• Pack away any left-over food and eat at the
first opportunity.
151
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
• Wash your hands before and after handling
any food.
• Regularly clean the inside of the refrigerator.
Please observe the instructions and
information regarding the use-by date on the
outside packaging of the food.
Please observe section “Cleaning” of this
instruction.
Refrigerator rating plate
The rating plate is to be found on the inside of
the refrigerator. It contains all important details
of the refrigerator. You can read off from this
the model identification, the product number
and the serial number. You will need these
details whenever you contact the customer
service centre or when ordering spare parts.
1 - Model Number
2 - Product Number
3 - Serial Number
4 - Electrical rating details
5 - Gas pressure
The cooling unit’s performance is influenced
by ambient temperatures. Please select the
medium setting for ambient temperatures
between +15°C and +25°C (refer to Setting
of cooling compartment temperature.) The
unit operates within its optimum performance
range.
152
Dometic refrigerators work according to the
absorption principle. For physical reasons,
an absorption system responds slowly to
changes made by the thermostat controller,
by loss of cooling energy through opening
the door storing food. The devices meet the
cooling performance requirements of the
Climatic Clas SN acc. to EN/ISO 7371 in the
temperature range of +10°C to +32°C ambient
temperature.
For temperatures below +10°C, winter covers
should be installed. For ambient temperatures
exceeding +32°C for a longer period of time, it
is recommended installing Dometic additional
fan (item no. 241 2985 - 00).
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
2
8
1
3
4
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Description of refrigerator
5
9
6
7
(Appearance is model specific)
1 - Operating controls
2 - Door locking button
3 - Freezer compartment (removable)
4 - Insertable grid shelf (available as option, to be used when freezer compartment is removed)
5 - Post-evaporator for cooling compartment
6 - Condensation water drain channel
7 - Vegetable bin
8 - Upper door shelf with flap, egg shelf
available as option may be inserted
9 - Lower door shelf with bottle holders
153
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
1 - Freezer compartment
2 - Operating controls
3 - Post evaporator for cooling compartment
4 - Condensation water drain channel
5 - Data plate
6 - Vegetable bin
7 - Upper door shelf with flap, egg shelf
available as option may be inserted.
8 - Lower door shelf with bottle holders
154
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
The refrigerator is equipped to operate on
three power modes:
• Mains voltage (230V AC)
• Direct-current voltage (12V DC)
•Gas (liquid gas propane/butane)
Select the desired power mode by the energy
selector switch (battery igniter type models)
or the MODE button (MES, AES). Appliances
with automatic energy selection (AES) are
additionally provided with “automatic mode”
function. The AES system automatically
selects the best energy source for each
particular situation.
Cleaning
Before starting up the refrigerator, it is
recommended that you clean it inside and
repeat this at regular intervals.
• The gas burner must be inspected and
cleaned as necessary at least once a year.
When using liquefied petroleum gas (tank
or refill cylinders) the maintenance interval is
reduced to half-yearly or quarterly. Keep the
evidence of maintenance work carried out on
your refrigerator.
• Work on gas and electrical equipment shall
be carried out by qualified personnel only.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Refrigerator operation
It is recommended that this is carried out by
an authorised customer services department.
We recommend maintenance following an
extended shutdown of the vehicle. Please
contact our customer services.
Manual energy selection
/ automatic ignition (RM8xx1 or
RM9xx1) MES (fridge models)
Use a soft cloth and lukewarm water with a
mild detergent. Then wipe out the appliance
with clean water and dry thoroughly.
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
Fig. 7
Fig.
2
1 - Power ON/OFF switch
2 - Energy selector button 230V ~
Fig. 1
To avoid material alterations, do not use soap
or hard, abrasive or soda-based cleaning
agents.
Do not allow the door seal to come into
contact with oil or grease.
Maintenance
• In compliance with the applicable
regulations, please note that the gas unit
and the connected ventilation ducts must be
checked by authorised technical personnel
after first use and after every other year for
compliance with the European Standard EN
1949. A test certificate has to be issued. It is
the user’s responsibility to arrange this test.
3 - Energy selector button GAS
4 - Energy selector button 12V =
6 - Temperature level selection
7 - Temperature level display
8 - Indicator LED failure / Reset button
GAS FAILURE
Switching ON/OFF
• Switch ON by pressing button (1), 2s
• Switch OFF by pressing button (1), > 2s
230V AC operation
• Select “Mains voltage” by pressing button (2)
• Set temperature step by pressing button (6)
155
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
12V DC operation (vehicle’s battery)
• Select “Battery voltage” by pressing
button (4)
• Set temperature step by pressing button (6)
Gas operation
• Select “Gas” by pressing button (3)
• Set temperature step by pressing button (6)
Note: The flame extinguishes after
reaching the preset cooling compartment
temperature and ignites again if the cooling
compartment temperature increases again.
If the flame is not lit after the first ignition
attempt, the automatic igniter repeats the
ignition twice (duration 30 s) at time intervals
of 2 minutes. If the flame is not lit afterwards,
a fault is indicated.
Setting of cooling compartment
temperature
RM8xx1 or RM9xx1
MES appliances
(manual energy selection)
Electrical operation
6
1
7
Fig.
Fig.185
2
3
Select the desired cooling compartment
temperature by pressing button (6) .
4
Fig.
Fig.163
To start the refrigerator, press button (1) for 2
seconds.
The refrigerator starts with the last selected
type of energy.
230V operation :
Press button (2) :
The scale starts with MIN position at the left
LED position (small bar = highest temperature)
and climbs up to MAX position at the right LED
position (large bar = lowest temperature).
Note: The temperature levels do not relate
to absolute temperature values.
12V operation :
Press button (4) :
Additional features
Gas operation
• The brightness of the display reduces after a
few seconds if no other buttons are pressed.
The indicator lights again if a button is
pressed. Press the button again to activate
the required function.
• Failures are indicated by flashing of the
failure indicator LED.
3
Fig.
Fig.174
Gas operation :
Press button (3) :
The ignition process is activated automatically
by means of an automatic igniter.
156
The LED display (7) of the selected
temperature setting is illuminated.
• Should the door be kept open for too long
(more than 2 minutes), an acoustic signal is
initiated (pulsing whistle tone).
• Should the electronic control detect any
failure, an acoustic signal will sound (pulsing
whistle tone). At the same time the display
starts flashing (for trouble-shooting, please
refer to page 166).
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
Inserting / changing the batteries
An optional battery compartment in the
electronics case for internal (self-contained)
power supply of the electronics is available
for the model variants RM 8xx1 and RM 8xx5
(appliances with electronics).
• Switch off the refrigerator, as described in
section ‘Shutting of the refrigerator’
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Gas operation with internal
batteries (optional)
press
Opening battery compartment
Fig.
Fig.227
Fig.
Fig.216
Load the battery compartment with batteries
(8 x AA 1.5 V) before operating the refrigerator.
All operating modes can be selected while the
on-board 12 V DC power supply is active. The
internal voltage is disconnected.
If the on-board 12 V DC power supply is not
present or there is an interruption of the mains
power supply during operation, the electronics
automatically switch to the internal (battery)
power supply. The refrigerator can now only
be operated in the gas mode.
All LED indicators except the GAS LED are not
lit during operation with internal batteries. The
GAS LED flashes every 15 seconds.
If a button is pressed, the temperature level
LEDs (7) also light.
If the battery voltage is too low, an acoustic
signal (whistle tone) sounds every 15 seconds.
Then replace the batteries in the battery
compartment.
pull out
Fig.
Fig.238
Note: Batteries (8 x AA 1.5V) are not
included!
! WARNING:
• Observe the correct polarity!
• Do not connect non-rechargeable
batteries to a charger.
• Remove rechargeable batteries from the
battery compartment before charging.
• Avoid short circuits on the contacts in the
battery compartment!
• Remove discharged batteries.
• Remove the batteries from the battery
compartment if the refrigerator will not be
used for a long time.
• Do not mix different types of batteries.
157
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
Explanation of operating controls
8 - Temperature level display
The control panel buttons are not accessible
when the refrigerator door is closed. Open the
bottom door to reach the operating buttons.
9 - Indicator LED failure / Reset button
GAS FAILURE
Depending on the door opening direction,
there are two LEDs on the left or right edge of
the control panel. The outer LED (1) indicates
that the refrigerator is operational (blue). The
other LED (2) lights red in the event of a fault.
2
Switching ON/OFF
• Switch ON by pressing button (1), 2s
• Switch OFF by pressing button (1), > 2s
230V AC operation
• Select “Mains voltage” by pressing button (2)
• Set temperature step by pressing button (7)
1
12V DC operation (vehicle’s battery)
Fig. 9
4
Fig.
Refrigerators for self-contained (gas) operation
contain two battery compartments in the
control panel which are located on the left and
right next to the button bar.
• Select “Battery voltage” by pressing
button (4)
• Set temperature step by pressing button (7)
Gas operation
• Select “Gas” by pressing button (3)
• Set temperature step by pressing button (7)
Fig.10
5
Fig.
L
RMD 85x1 or 9xx1 models
MES-appliances
(manual energy selection)
Electrical operation
R
Fig.
Fig.11
6
Manual energy selection
/ automatic ignition
(RMD8xx1 or RM9xx1) MES
1
2
3
4
Fig.13
9
Fig.
To start the refrigerator, press button (1) for 2
seconds.
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9
Fig.
Fig.12
7
1 - Power ON/OFF switch
2 - Energy selector button 230V ~
3 - Energy selector button GAS
4 - Energy selector button 12V =
6 - Frameheating
7 - Temperature level selection
158
The refrigerator starts with the last selected
type of energy.
230V operation :
Press button (2) :
12V operation :
Press button (4) :
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
• The brightness of the display reduces after a
few seconds if no other buttons are pressed.
The indicator lights again if a button is
pressed. Press the button again to activate
the required function.
3
• Failures are indicated by flashing of the
failure indicator LED.
Fig. 14
10
Fig.
Gas operation :
Press button (3) :
• Should the door be kept open for too long
(more than 2 minutes), an acoustic signal is
initiated (pulsing whistle tone).
The ignition process is activated automatically
by means of an automatic igniter.
• Should the electronic control detect any
failure, an acoustic signal will sound (pulsing
whistle tone). At the same time the display
starts flashing (for trouble-shooting, please
refer to page 166).
Note: The flame extinguishes after
reaching the preset cooling compartment
temperature and ignites again if the cooling
compartment temperature increases again.
If the flame is not lit after the first ignition
attempt, the automatic igniter repeats the
ignition twice (duration 30 s) at time intervals
of 2 minutes. If the flame is not lit afterwards,
a fault is indicated.
Gas operation with internal batteries
(optional)
An optional battery compartment in the
electronics case for internal (self-contained)
power supply of the electronics is available for
the model variants RMd 85x1 and RMD 85x5
(appliances with electronics).
Setting of cooling compartment
temperature
7
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Additional features
Gas operation
8
Fig.16
14
Fig.
Fig. 15
11
Fig.
Select the desired cooling compartment
temperature by pressing button (7) .
The LED display (8) of the selected
temperaturesetting is illuminated.
The scale starts with MIN position at the left
LED position (small bar = highest temperature)
and climbs up to MAX position at the right LED
position (large bar = lowest temperature).
Note: The temperature levels do not relate
to absolute temperature values.
Load the battery compartment with batteries
(8 x AA 1.5 V) before operating the refrigerator.
All operating modes can be selected while the
on-board 12 V DC power supply is active. The
internal voltage is disconnected.
If the on-board 12 V DC power supply is not
present or there is an interruption of the mains
power supply during operation, the electronics
automatically switch to the internal (battery)
power supply. The refrigerator can now only
be operated in the gas mode.
All LED indicators except the GAS LED are not
lit during operation with internal batteries. The
GAS LED flashes every 15 seconds.
If a button is pressed, the temperature level
.
LEDs (7) also light.
159
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
If the battery voltage is too low, an acoustic
signal (whistle tone) sounds every 15 seconds.
Then replace the batteries in the battery
compartment.
Inserting / changing the batteries
Switch off the refrigerator, as described
on page 165 section 4.14 Shutting of the
refrigerator.
Frame heating (fridge freezer models only)
All fridge freezer models are equipped with
a frame heating (12VDC/3,5W) around the
freezer compartment. During summer months
with high temperatures and humidity the metal
frame may have water droplets forming. To
evaporate these droplets switch on the frame
heating with button (6).
1
6
8
open
press
Fig. 19
18
Fig.
Fig. 15
Fig.
17
Opening left battery compartment
1
press
open
Opening right battery compartment
Fig.
18
Fig. 16
2
The operating time of the frame heater can
be set to 2 hours, 5 hours or continuous
operation. After selecting the operating time
using the button (6), the temperature level
indicator (8) is extinguished for a short time to
show the set operating time for a few seconds.
The display then returns to the temperature
level indicator.
Operating time: 2 hours
Press button (6) once
Display
1x
Note: Batteries (8 x AA 1.5V) are not
included!
! WARNING:
• Observe the correct polarity!
• Do not connect non-rechargeable
batteries to a charger.
• Remove rechargeable batteries from the
battery compartment before charging.
• Avoid short circuits on the contacts in the
battery compartment!
• Remove discharged batteries.
• Remove the batteries from the battery
compartment if the refrigerator will not be
used for a long time.
• Do not mix different types of batteries.
160
Operating time: 5 hours
Press button (6) twice
Display
2x
Permanent operation
Press button (6) three times Display
3x
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
! WARNING: In order to prevent discharge
of the onboard battery, change the frame
heater from continuous operation to another
operating time or switch it off.
Note: The frame heater is active for 30
minutes after switching on and then
switches itself off and on again at time
intervals of 5 minutes.
Fastening
Fig. 22
26
Fig.
Fig. 23
27
Fig.
Releasing
Fig.
Fig. 24
28
Fig. 25
29
Fig.
Door locking
! WARNING: As a basic rule, shut and
lock the refrigerator before you start your
journey!
Lighting
Fig. 24
20
Fig.
Fig.
Fig. 25
21
Open the door by pressing the locking button
and pull open (see Fig. 20).
The interior lighting is controlled using a door
contact. Should the door be kept open more
than 2 minutes, an acoustic signal is initiated
(pulsing whistle tone). (except for models
with battery igniter).
Shut the door again by pushing it to close. The
snapping into the lock can be heard.
While the vehicle is parked, the locking hook
may be fixed to facilitate opening of the door
(Fig. 22-25).
Fastening and releasing the door lock
hook when parking the vehicle
If the vehicle is parked for a longer period
of time, the locking hook may be clamped
by means of a lockbar. The door may now
be opened by just pulling it without need of
pressing the locking button.
Fig.30
26
Fig.
Note: Please contact the authorized
Dometic Service if a failure occurs.
161
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
Positioning the storage racks
Winter operation
1
Fig. 35
Fig.
29
Fig. 27
31
Fig.
The storage racks may be pulled out by
smoothly lifting them and may be positioned
as desired.
In winter, check that the ventilation grilles and
the exhaust duct system (1) have not been
blocked by snow, leaves, etc.
Removable freezer compartment
2
Fig. 36
Fig.
30
Fig. 27
32
Fig.
Fig.
28
To enlarge the cooling compartment, just
remove the freezer compartment.
1. Unlock the freezer compartment on
both sides.
2. Pull the freezer compartment out. Store
the freezer compartment safely in order to
prevent damage
Note: Once the freezer compartment is
removed, an additional storage rack (3.) may
be installed. The storage rack is a piece of
extra equipment and may be obtained by
.
Dometic.
When the outside temperature falls below
+10°C, the winter covers should be fitted.
This protects the unit from excessively cold
air which could have adverse effects on the
performance of the unit.
Covers may be supplied as part of the
specification of your caravan or alternatively
are available through most Swift Group
Dealers.
Note: You should also attach the winter
covers if the vehicle is taken out of service
for a longer period of time or while it is being
cleaned from the outside.
Winter operation (fridge freezer models)
In winter, check that the ventilation grilles and
the exhaust duct system (1) have not been
blocked by snow, leaves, etc.
Note: Winter covers are not supplied as
standard on most models.
162
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
1
• Allow foods that have been warmed up to
cool down before storing.
• Avoid storing products in the refrigerator that
could emit volatile flammable gases.
Fig.
Fig. 31
32
When the outside temperature falls below
+10°C, the winter cover (2) should be fitted.
This protects the unit from excessively cold
air which could have adverse effects on the
performance of the unit.
• Do not overfill the storage grids and
compartments to prevent obstructing the
internal air circulation.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
• Products must be packed - best of all in
closed containers, wrapped in aluminium
foil or similar - and stored separately from
each other, in order to prevent drying out or
odours.
• Maintain a clearance of approx. 5 - 10
mm between chilled products and postevaporator (“cooling fins”).
• Do not expose the refrigerator to direct
sunlight. Please bear in mind that the
temperature inside a closed vehicle
increases sharply if exposed to sunlight and
that this can reduce the efficiency of the
refrigerator.
2
• Ensure that air circulation of the cooling unit
is not obstructed. Keep the ventilation grilles
free from obstructions.
Fig. 32
33
Fig.
You should also attach the winter covers if
the vehicle is taken out of service for a longer
period of time or while it is being cleaned from
the outside.
Storing food and making
ice cubes
Storing products in the cooling
compartment
• Switch the refrigerator on approx. 12 hours
before filling it.
• Always store pre-cooled foods in the
refrigerator. Make sure that the food is well
cooled when it is bought and also when
transporting it. Use insulated cooling bags.
Storing products in the freezer
compartment
• Do not keep carbonated drinks in the freezer.
• The freezer compartment is suitable for
making ice cubes and for short-term storage
of frozen food. It is not suitable as a means
of freezing foods.
When ambient temperatures are lower
than +10°C and the refrigerator is exposed to these temperatures for extended
periods of time, an even regulation of
freezer temperature cannot be guaranteed for system related reasons. This can
cause the temperature in the freezer to
rise and the stored goods to melt.
• Open the refrigerator door only for a short
period of time when removing products.
163
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
Refrigerator compartments
5
! WARNING: Do not remove these
storage racks. Thus children have no space
to be entrapped in the refrigerator.
If it is necessary to remove these storage racks
(i.e. for cleaning) loosen the locking pins (2) at
first as shown, by means of a suitable screw
driver.
1
6
2
Put in place the locking pins after removing the
storage racks.
3
7
4
Fig.
Fig. 33
37
1 - Freezer compartment:
already frozen food (deep-frozen food)
2
2 - Middle compartment:
Dairy products, convenience food
3 - Bottom compartment:
Meat, fish, food for defrosting
1
1
4 - Vegetable compartment:
Salads, vegetables, fruit
5 - Top door shelf:
Eggs, butter
6 - Middle door shelf:
Cans, dressings, ketchup, jam
7 - Bottom door shelf (drinks
compartment):
Drinks in bottles or bags
Positioning the storage racks
The storage racks may be pulled out by
loosening the two locking devices (1)
underneath. For loosening pull the slider to the
middle, for fastening pull them sidewards.
Two of the storage racks are secured. In this
way inadvertent entrapment and suffocation
of children is prevented, if the storage racks
are removed. To protect children it must be
avoided to create space for children in the
cooling compartment.
164
Fig.
34
Fig. 26
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Shutting off the refrigerator
2
Fig. 35
41
Fig.
Fig. 42
Fig.
36
Fig.
Fig. 43
37
CAUTION!
• Switch off MES and AES models by pressing
button (2). Keep button (2) pressed for 3
seconds. The display disappears and the
appliance is fully switched off (Fig. 41).
• Release the locking mechanism of the door
lock by pushing it and shift it to the front.
If the door is shut in this position, a small
gap is nevertheless kept open to prevent
formation of mildew.
• If the refrigerator is to be taken out of service
for an extended period of time, close the
onboard shut-off valve and the cylinder valve.
165
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR TROUBLESHOOTING
Troubleshooting
Failure: The refrigerator does not cool
sufficiently.
Possible cause
Action you can take
Inadequate ventilation to the unit
Check that the ventilation grilles are not
covered
Thermostat setting is too low
Set thermostat to a higher level
The condenser is heavily frosted
Check that the refrigerator door closes
properly
Too much warm food has been stores inside
within a short period of time
Allow warm food to cool down before storage
The appliance has been running for only a
short period of time
Check whether the cooling compartment
works after approx 4-5 hours
Ambient temperatures too high
Regularly remove ventilation grilles.
Failure: The refrigerator does not cool in
gas operation mode.
Possible cause
Action you can take
Gas cylinder empty
Change gas cylinder
Is the upstream shut-off device open?
Open shut-off device
Air in the gas pipe?
Switch off the appliance and start again.
Repeat this procedure 3-4 times, if necessary.
Failure: The refrigerator does not cool in
12 V operation.
166
Possible cause
Action you can take
On-board fuse defective
Fit new fuse
On-board battery displaced
Check battery, charge it
Engine not running
Start engine
Heating element defective (please refer to
failure indication)
Please inform the Dometic Customer
Services.
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR TROUBLESHOOTING
Possible cause
Action you can take
On-board fuse defective
Fit new fuse
Vehicle not connected to mains supply
voltage
Make a connection to a mains power supply
AES: Gas operation despite connection to the
mains supply voltage?
Appliance switches to gas operation due to
insufficient mains supply voltage (automatically
switches back to 230 V operation)
Heating element defective (please refer to
failure indication
Please inform Dometic Customer Services
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Failure: The refrigerator does not cool in
230 V operation.
Information on failure display and
trouble-shooting
• Refrigerators with an electronics system
(MES, AES) indicate the occurence of a
malfunction by the LED or display flashing.
• If a malfunction occurs, the indicator LED
“Failure” (8) flashes simultaneously. In the
case of AES models an acoustic alarm
sounds.
Before notifying the authorised Service Center,
please check whether:
• the instructions in section “Operating the
refrigerator” have been observed.
• the refrigerator stands level.
• it is possible to operate the refrigerator with
any available power source.
Status indicators
1
2
3
4
6
7
MES
8
Fig. 51
1 - Button ON / OFF
2 - Energy selector switch 230 V AC
3 - Energy selector switch GAS
4 - Energy selector switch 12V DC
6 - temperature level button
7 - temperature level display
8 - fault LED / GAS FAULT reset button
167
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR TROUBLESHOOTING
Operation with on-board
12 v power supply
Indicator
Fault
Remedy
(2) and (8)
230 V mode:
"230V" not
available or voltage
too low
Check mains power connection, mains voltage,
fuse
12 V mode:
"12V" not available
or voltage too low
Check 12V connection, on-board battery, fuse
Gas mode:
Flame not ignited
Check gas supply (gas bottle, gas valve)
Acoustic signal,
15s at two minute
intervals
Interior lighting is
switched on
Close door, check door contact
(2) and (7)
230 V mode:
230V heating
element defective
Arrange replacement of 230V heating element,
contact Customer Service
12 V mode:
12V heating
element defective
Arrange replacement of 12V heating element,
contact Customer Service
Temperature sensor
without contact or
defective
Contact Customer Service
Burner defective
or cooling unit
defective
Check burner, burner nozzles, if
necessary contact Customer Service and
arrange replacement
flashing and
acoustic signal 20s
(4) and (8)
flashing and
acoustic signal 20s
(3) and (8)
flashing and
acoustic signal 20s
flashing and
acoustic signal 20s
(4) and (7)
flashing and
acoustic signal 20s
(7)
flashing and
acoustic signal 20s
(3) and (7)
flashing and
acoustic signal 20s
168
Press the (8) button after clearing the fault
DOMETIC REFRIGERATOR TROUBLESHOOTING
Indicator
Fault
Remedy
(3) and (8)
Flame not ignited
Check gas supply (gas bottle, gas valve)
Burner defective
or cooling unit
defective
Check burner, burner nozzles, if necessary
contact Customer Service and arrange
replacement
Acoustic signal at
15 second intervals
Undervoltage
detection (internal
batteries)
Replace batteries
Automatic
switching from
external to internal
power supply
does not function
(absence of the
onboard 12V power
supply for the
electronics)
Refrigerator does
not function, gas
operation not
possible although
the batteries are
inserted
Switch off the refrigerator and start again
Press the (8) button after clearing the fault
flashing brightly
(3) and (7)
flashing brightly
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Operation with batteries
(internal power supply)
The onboard power supply was interrupted during
the starting of the gas operation
Note: No automatic switching is performed during
the ignition.
169
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
THETFORD MINI GRILL
Mini Grill Operation
(Sprite Freedom) - 3 Gas Burner & Grill
Hob & Grill Burner
Hob
Full Rate
Low Rate
Introduction
! WARNING:
• Appliance and accessible parts become
hot during use.
• Avoid touching heating elements.
• Children less than 8 years of age shall be
kept away unless continuously supervised.
• This appliance can be used by children
aged from 8 years and above, persons
with reduced physical, sensory or mental
capabilities and/or lack of experience and
knowledge only if they have been given
supervision or instruction concerning
use of the appliance in a safe way and
understand the hazards involved.
• Children shall not play with the appliance.
• Cleaning and user maintenance shall not
be made by children without supervision.
• Unattended cooking on a hob with fat or
oil can be dangerous and may result in
fire.
• Never extinguish a fire with water, switch
off the appliance and cover flame with lid
or fire blanket.
• Danger of Fire: Do not store items on the
cooking surface.
• Do not use harsh abrasive cleaners or
sharp metal scrapers to clean the oven
door glass since they can scratch the
surface, which may result in shattering of
the glass.
• Never use a steam cleaner to clean
appliance.
170
This appliance is designed for cooking foods,
any other use is incorrect and dangerous.
Failure to install the appliance correctly or
improper use, will invalidate any warranty or
liability claims.
This appliance must be installed in accordance
with the local, national and European
regulations in force. Particular attention
shall be given to the requirements regarding
ventilation. Read the instructions before
installing or using the appliance. The appliance
MUST be installed by an approved competent
person.
Our policy is one of continuous development
and improvement. Specifications and
illustrations may change subsequent to
publication.
Provision of ventilation
The use of a gas cooking appliance results in
the production of heat, moisture and
products of combustion in the room in which
it is installed. Ensure that the kitchen is well
ventilated especially when the appliance is
in use: keep natural ventilation holes open
or install a mechanical ventilation device
(mechanical extractor hood).
Prolonged intensive use of the appliance
may call for additional ventilation, for example
opening of a window, or more effective
ventilation, for example increasing the level of
mechanical ventilation where present.
The room containing the cooker should have
an air supply in accordance with local and
national/European standards.
THETFORD MINI GRILL
Using the Hotplate Gas Burners
• Use only the Gas Pressures specified
2. Push in the control knob and turn
anticlockwise to full rate – large flame (
• This appliance is approved for use with
either Propane or Butane.
• We recommend using Propane for this
appliance.
• Butane may be used, although the
appliance performance may be
compromised when the ambient
temperature is below 10ºC.
• Butane should not be used when the
ambient temperature is below 5ºC.
• This appliance MUST be earthed
! WARNING: This appliance is not
intended to be operated by means of an
external timer or separate remote-control
system..
Operation
The burners on the appliance have fixed
aeration and no adjustment is required. The
burners should flame as follows:Propane -The flames should burn quietly with
a blue/green colour with no sign of
yellow tips.
Butane - Normally on initial lighting, a small
amount of yellow tipping will occur
and then slightly increases as the
burner heats up.
The burners are controlled individually and
each is monitored by a thermocouple probe.
In the event the burner flames are accidentally
extinguished, turn off the burner control and
do not attempt to re-ignite the burner for at
least one minute
Note: Before using the appliance for the
first time, remove any surface protection
film, ie plastic coating. Clean all surfaces
with hot soapy water to remove any residual
protective covering of oil and rinse carefully.
1. Ensure gas supply is connected and turned
on.
).
3. Continue depressing the knob whilst holding
a lighted match or taper to the burner.
For models fitted with spark ignition the
procedure is similar except that burner is
ignited by depressing the ignition button
located on the fascia.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Note:
• Appliance should only be used with
Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG)
4. After the burner is lit continue depressing
the knob for approximately 10 - 15
seconds.
5. Release knob and turn to required heat
setting.
6. If burner has not lit within 15 seconds,
release knob and wait at least 1 minute
before repeating operations (2) to (5).
7. To turn off, rotate the control knob until the
line on the knob is aligned with dot on the
control panel.
Always make sure the control knob is in the
off position when you have finished using the
hotplate burners.
! WARNING:
• Children should be supervised to ensure
they do not play with the appliance
• Glass lids may shatter when heated. Turn
off the hotplate and allow it to cool before
closing the glass lid.
• Remove all spillage from the surface of the
glass lid before opening.
Using the Grill
1. Ensure gas cylinder/supply is connected
and turned on.
2. Open door, push in the control knob and
turn to the large flame symbol ( ).
3. Continue depressing the knob whilst holding
a lighted match to the burner. For models
fitted with spark ignition the procedure
is similar except that burner is ignited by
depressing the ignition button located on
the fascia.
171
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
THETFORD MINI GRILL
4. After the burner is lit continue depressing
the knob for approximately 10 - 15 seconds
before releasing the knob.
5. If burner has not lit within 15 seconds,
release knob and wait at least 1 minute
before repeating operations (2) to (4).
6. To turn off, rotate the control knob until the
line on the knob is aligned with dot on the
control panel.
7. Always make sure the control knob is in the
off position when you have finished grilling.
On first use of the grill, it should be heated
for about 20 minutes to eliminate any residual
factory lubricants that might impart unpleasant
smells to the food being cooked. A non-toxic
smoke may occur when using for the first time,
open any windows and turn on mechanical
ventilators to help remove the smoke.
Although the grill heats up quickly, it is
recommended that a few minutes preheat be
allowed.
It is normal for the flames on this burner to
develop yellow tips as it heats up.
Maintenance
This appliance needs little maintenance other
than cleaning. All parts should be cleaned
using warm soapy water. Do not use abrasive
cleaners, steel wool or cleansing powders.
When cleaning the burner ring it is essential
to ensure that the holes do not become
blocked. The control knobs are a push fit
and can be removed for cleaning. They are
interchangeable without affecting the sense of
operation.
Servicing
All servicing must be carried out by an
approved competent person. Before any
service work is started the appliance should
have been left to cool and be disconnected
from both the gas and electrical supplies. After
each service the appliance must be checked
for gas soundness.
For service, please contact your authorised
local Service Agent giving details of the model
and serial number on the databadge plus date
of purchase.
Depending on the food to be cooked the
correct grilling height can be achieved by
inverting the pan trivet into either the high or
low position
! WARNING:
• The grill area can get hot when the oven is
in use, even if the grill is switched off.
• Care should be taken when removing
pans from the grill, i.e. use of oven gloves,
and by making use of the removal grill pan
handle.
Note:
• The grill pan supplied is multi functional,
for use in grill or oven.
• The handle design allows removal or
insertion whilst the pan is in use.
• Always remove the handle when the pan
is in use.
• The grill MUST only be used with the door
open.
172
! WARNING:
• This appliance must not be modified
or adjusted unless authorized and
carried out by the manufacturer or his
representative. Only use parts supplied by
the manufacturer on this appliance.
• If the supply cord is damaged, it must only
be replaced by the manufacturer or his
representative in order to avoid a hazard.
THETFORD CAPRICE COOKER
IMPORTANT: Before using the appliances
for the first time, remove all accessories and
packing in the grill and oven, including any
surface protection film, i.e. plastic coating.
Clean all interior surfaces with hot soapy water
to remove any residual protective covering of
oil and rinse carefully.
! WARNING:
• Accessible parts may be hot when the
grill is used, young children should be
kept away.
• When cooking always ensure young
children are kept away.
Ensure the gas cylinder is turned on. In
the event of a gas smell, turn off at the
cylinder and contact supplier. The burners
on this appliance have fixed aeration and no
adjustment is required. Depending on the
gas being used, the burners should flame as
follows:
Propane - The flames should burn quietly with
a blue/green colour with no sign of yellow tips.
Butane - Normally on initial lighting, as small
amount of yellow tipping will occur and then
slightly increases as the burner heats up.
Important: The control tap on this appliance
operates both the grill and oven burners.
To ensure safe operation it is not possible to
operate both burners at the same time.
Using the hob burners
1. E
nsure gas cylinder/supply is connected
and turned on. In the event of a gas smell
turn off at gas cylinder/mains and contact
supplier
2. F
lame supervision: Each burner is
controlled individually and is monitored
by a thermocouple probe. In the event
of the burner flames being accidentally
extinguished, turn off the burner control and
do not attempt to re-ignite the burner for at
least one minute.
3. T
o light: Push in the control knob and turn
to full rate - see Fig.2. Hold a lighted match
or taper to the burner and push the control
knob in and hold. It is necessary to hold
the knob depressed after the burner has
ignited or approximately 10-15 seconds,
to allow the thermocouple probe to reach
temperature, before releasing the knob.
Should the flame go out when the knob is
released, the procedure should be repeated
holding the knob depressed for slightly
longer.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Thetford Caprice Cooker
3 burner gas hob, Grill and Oven
(Sprite only)
4. For models fitted with spark ignition the
procedure is similar except that the burner
can be ignited by depressing the ignition
button, which is located on the fascia. If
the burner has not lit within 15 seconds
the control knob should be released and
the burner left for at least 1 minute before a
further attempt to ignite the burner.
5. For simmering, turn the knob further anticlockwise to the low rate position.
6. To turn off: Turn the control know until the
line on the control knob is aligned with the
dot on the control panel. Always make
sure the control knob is in the off position
when you have finished using the hotplate
burners.
Important: The two in line hob burners on
this appliance will support pans from 10cm to
20cm. The single hob burner will support pans
from 10cm to 22cm.
! WARNING:
• Glass lids may shatter when heated. Turn
off the hotplate and allow it to cool before
closing the glass lid.
• Remove all spillage from the surface of the
glass lid before opening.
! WARNING: The use of the electric
hotplate and gas hobs will generate
heat. We recommend, to avoid excess
build-up of heat around the cooker area,
the window is left opened when cooking
to allow for additional ventilation. Care
should be taken when using the oven as
knobs and handle may become hot.
173
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
THETFORD CAPRICE COOKER
Using the grill
Important
• The grill must only be used with the door
open.
• The heat deflector below the fascia should
be pulled out prior to lighting the grill.
Never adjust the heat deflector position
without using hand protection i.E. Oven
gloves.
1. Ensure gas cylinder/supply is connected
and turned on. In the event of a gas smell
turn off at gas cylinder/mains and contact
supplier.
2. To light: Open door, push in the control
knob and turn to full rate. Hold alighted
match or taper to the burner and push the
control knob in and hold. The burner should
ignite and the control knob should be held
in for 10-15 seconds before release. If the
burner goes out, repeat procedure holding
control knob for slightly longer.
3. For models fitted with spark ignition the
procedure is similar except that the burner
can be ignited by depressing the ignition
button, which is located on the fascia.
Ignition must be carried out with the door
open, and if the burner has not lit within
15 seconds the control knob should be
released and the grill left for at least 1
minute before a further attempt to ignite the
burner.
4. On first use of the grill, it should be heated
for about 20 minutes to eliminate any
residual factory lubricants that might impart
unpleasant smells to the food being cooked.
An non-toxic smoke may occur when using
for the first time so open any windows
and turn on mechanical ventilators to help
remove the smoke.
5. Although the grill does heat up quickly, it is
recommended that a few minutes preheat
be allowed.
174
6. Flame Failure Device (FFD): The grill burner
is fitted with a flame sensing probe, which
will automatically cut off the gas supply
in the event of the flame going out. In the
event of the burner flames accidentally
being extinguished, turn off the burner
control and do not attempt to re-ignite the
burner for at least one minute.
7. It is normal for the flames on this burner
to develop yellow tips as it heats up,
particularly on Butane.
8. A reversible grill pan trivet enables the
correct grilling height to be achieved.
Fast toasting -trivet in high position
Grilling sausages -trivet in high position
Grilling steak/bacon -trivet in high position
Grilling chops, etc. -trivet in low position
Slow grilling -trivet removed
9. To turn off: Turn the control knob until the
line on the control knob is aligned with the
dot on the control panel. Always make sure
the control knob is in the off position when
you have finished grilling.
Important
• The pan supplied with the appliance is multi
functional, for use either whilst grilling or
when using the oven.
• The handle design allows removal or
insertion whilst the pan is in use.
Using the oven
1. Ensure gas cylinder/supply is connected
and turned on. In the event of a gas smell
turn off at gas cylinder/mains and contact
supplier.
2. To light: Open door, push in the control
knob and turn to gas mark 9. Hold a lighted
match or taper to the burner and push the
control knob in and hold. The burner should
ignite and the control knob should be held
in for 10-15 seconds before release. If the
burner goes out, repeat the process holding
control knob for slightly longer.
3. For models fitted with spark ignition the
procedure is similar except that the burner
can be ignited by depressing the ignition
button, which is located on the fascia.
Ignition must be carried out with the door
open, and if the burner has not lit within
THETFORD CAPRICE COOKER
4. Place the oven shelf in the required position
and close the door. Set control knob to
approximately gas mark 5 and heat the
oven for about 30 minutes to eliminate
any residual factory lubricants that might
impart unpleasant smells to the meals being
cooked. A non-toxic smoke may occur
when using for the first time so open any
windows and turn on mechanical ventilators
to help remove the smoke.
5. Although the oven does heat up quickly, it
is recommended that a 10 minute pre-heat
should be allowed. The oven should be up
to full temperature in about 15-20 minutes
6. To turn off: Turn the control knob until the
line on the control knob is aligned with the
dot on the control panel.
7. Shelf: The shelf has been designed to allow
good circulation at the rear of the oven and
are also fitted with a raised bar to prevent
trays or dishes making contact with the
back of the oven. To remove a shelf, pull
forward until it stops, raise at front and
remove.
Oven temperature control
The temperature in the oven is controlled by
a thermostatic gas tap and is variable over
the range 130ºC to 240ºC. Approximate
temperatures for the settings on the control
knob are shown in the table below. The
temperatures indicated refer to the centre of
the oven and at any particular setting the oven
will be hotter at the top and cooler towards
the base.
The variation between top and centre, and
centre to bottom is approximately equivalent to
one gas mark. Good use can be made of the
temperature variation in several dishes requiring
different temperatures may be cooked at the
same time. In this way maximum benefit can be
obtained from the gas used to heat the oven.
Care should be taken not to overload the oven,
adequate spacing being used to allow free
circulation for heat.
Cooking guidelines
See user instructions.
Do’s and Don’ts
Do read the user instructions carefully before
using the appliance for the first time.
Do allow the oven to heat before using for
the first time, in order to expel any smells
before the introduction of food.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
15 seconds the control knob should be
released and the oven left for at least one
minute before a further attempt to ignite the
burner.
Do clean the appliance regularly.
Do remove spills as soon as they occur.
Do always use oven gloves when removing
food shelves and trays from the oven.
Do check that controls are in the off position.
Don’t a
llow children near the cooker when in
use. Turn pan handles away from the
front so that they cannot be caught
accidentally.
Don’t a
llow fats or oils to build up in the oven
tray or base.
Don’t u
se abrasive cleaners or powders
that will scratch the surfaces of the
appliance.
Don’t u
nder any circumstances use the oven
as a space heater.
Don’t p
ut heavy objects onto open grill and
oven doors.
Leaks
If a smell of gas becomes apparent, the
supply should be turned off at the cylinder
IMMEDIATELY. Extinguish naked lights
including cigarettes and pipes. Do not
operate electrical switches. Open all doors
and windows to disperse any gas escape.
Butane/Propane gas is heavier than air; any
escaping gas will therefore collect at low
level.
The strong unpleasant smell of gas will
enable the general area of the leak to be
detected.
Check that the gas is not escaping from an
unlighted appliance. Never check for leaks
with a naked flame, leak investigation should
be carried out using a leak detector spray.
175
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
THETFORD ASPIRE 2 COOKER
Thetford Aspire 2
Cooker 3 Burner, Hotplate, Grill
and Oven operation
(Challenger & Eccles)
Burner operation
Fig. 1
Important
• Although each burner will support pans from
10 to 22cm, care should be taken not to
overload the appliance as performance may
be reduced.
4. For models fitted with Spark Ignition the
procedure is similar except that the burner
can be ignited by depressing the ignition
button, which is located on the fascia. If
the burner has not lit within 15 seconds the
control knob should be released and the
burner left for at least 1 minute before a
further attempt to ignite the burner.
5. For simmering, turn the knob further anticlockwise to the low rate position.
• The following pan sizes are the maximum we
recommend:- Electric Hotplate:- Ø180mm
Auxiliary Burner:- Ø200mm Semi-Rapid
Burner:- 2x Ø200mm or 1x Ø220mm with 1x
Ø180mm
6. To turn off: Turn the control knob until the
line on the control knob is aligned with the
dot on the control panel. Always make sure
the control knob is in the off position when
you have finished using the
hotplate burners.
• When using small pans the flames should
not spread beyond the base of the pan as
this will reduce the efficiency of the burner.
Using the Electric Hotplate
• Avoid old or misshapen pans as these may
cause instability.
The hotplate control is numbered from 1 to 6.
To turn it on, rotate the knob either clockwise
or anti-clockwise to the required position.
Position 1 is the coolest setting.
• The lid must be opened fully prior to using
the hotplate burners.
Using the Hotplate Gas Burners
1. Ensure gas cylinder/supply is connected
and turned on. In the event of a gas smell
turn off at gas cylinder/mains and contact
supplier.
2. Flame supervision: Each burner is
controlled individually and is monitored
by a thermocouple probe. In the event
of the burner flames being accidentally
extinguished, turn off the burner control and
do not attempt to re-ignite the burner for at
least one minute.
3. To light: Push in the control knob and turn
to full rate – see Fig.1. Hold a lighted match
176
or taper to the burner and push the control
knob in and hold. It is necessary to hold
the knob depressed after the burner has
ignited for approximately 10 - 15 seconds,
to allow the thermocouple probe to reach
temperature, before releasing the knob.
Should the flame go out when the knob is
released, the procedure should be repeated
holding the knob depressed for slightly
longer.
Ensure the electricity is switched on.
To turn the hotplate off, rotate the knob until
the line or pointer on the knob lines up with the
zero on the control panel.
The hotplate is a sealed construction and
transfers heat through conduction. For
maximum efficiency a correctly sized pan with
a flat heavy gauge base should be used. Pan
size should be the same or slightly larger (up to
1” / 2.5cm oversize).
Before using your hotplate for the first time, we
recommend that you prime and then season it.
To prime the Hotplate
Switch on the hotplate for a short period,
without a pan, to harden and burn off the
THETFORD ASPIRE 2 COOKER
Use a medium to high setting for 3 – 5
minutes. A non toxic smoke may occur during
this process. Allow it to cool, then season.
To season the Hotplate
First heat the hotplate for 30 seconds on
a medium setting, then switch off. Pour a
minimal amount of unsalted vegetable oil onto
a clean dry cloth or paper towel, and apply a
thin coat of oil to the hotplate surface. Wipe
off any excess oil, then heat the hotplate on
a medium setting for 1 minute. Occasional
seasoning will help to maintain the Hotplate’s
appearance.
! WARNING:
• Glass lids may shatter when heated. Turn
off the hotplate and allow it to cool before
closing the glass lid.
• Remove all spillage from the surface of
the glass lid before opening.
• The glass lid has the tendency to snap
shut towards the end of lowering.
Operation
WARNING
On seperate oven & Grill cookers
• The grill area can get hot when the oven is
in use, even if the grill is switched off.
• Care should be taken when removing
pans from the grill, i.e. use of oven gloves,
and by making use of the removal grill pan
handle.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
coating.
• Care should be taken when using oven as
knobs and handle may become hot.
Important
• The grill pan supplied is multi functional, for
use in grill or oven.
• The handle design allows removal or
insertion whilst the pan is in use.
• Always remove the handle when the pan is
in use.
• The grill MUST only be used with the door
open.
This is caused by the travel lock action of
the hinges as it is activated.
Make sure all fingers are removed from
appliance when closing the lid.
! WARNING: The use of the electric
hotplate and gas hobs will generate heat.
We recommend, to avoid excess buildup of heat around the cooker area, the
window is left opened when cooking to
allow for additional ventilation.
Important
• Depending on specification, your appliance
may be fitted with a glass lid shut-off system,
which cuts off the power to all hotplate
burners (gas and electric) if the lid is closed.
• Ensure the glass lid is in the open and
upright position before turning on the
hotplate burners.
• Not all models are fitted with the shut-off
system.
177
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
THETFORD ASPIRE 2 COOKER
Using the Grill
1. Ensure gas cylinder/supply is connected
and turned on. In the event of a gas smell
turn off at gas cylinder/mains and contact
supplier.
2. To light: Open door, push in the control
knob and turn to full rate – see Fig 1
(page 176). Hold a lighted match or taper
to the burner and push the control knob in
and hold. The burner should ignite and the
control knob should be held in for 10 -15
seconds before release.
If the burner goes out, repeat procedure
holding control knob for slightly longer.
3. For models fitted with Spark Ignition the
procedure is similar except that the burner
can be ignited by depressing the ignition
button, which is located on the fascia.
Ignition must be carried out with the door
open, and if the burner has not lit within
15 seconds the control knob should be
released and the grill left for at least 1
minute before a further attempt to ignite the
burner.
4. Note: the grill must only be used with the
door open.
5. On first use of the grill, it should be heated
for about 20 minutes to eliminate any
residual factory lubricants that might impart
unpleasant smells to the food being cooked.
A non-toxic smoke may occur when using
for the first time so open any windows
and turn on mechanical ventilators to help
remove the smoke.
6. Although the grill does heat up quickly, a
few minutes preheat is recommended.
7. Flame Failure Device (FFD): the grill burner is
fitted with a flame sensing probe, which will
automatically cut off the gas supply in the
event of the flame going out. In the event
of the burner flames being accidentally
extinguished, turn off the burner control and
do not attempt to re-ignite the burner for at
least one minute.
8. It is normal for the flames on this burner to
develop yellow tips as it heats up.
178
9. A reversible grill pan trivet enables the
correct grilling height to be achieved.
Fast Toasting
trivet in high position
Grilling Sausages
trivet in high position
Grilling Steak/Bacontrivet in high position
Grilling Chops, etc trivet in low position
Slow Grilling
trivet removed
10. To turn off: turn the control knob until the
line on the control knob is aligned with the
dot on the control panel. Always make
sure the control knob is in the off position
when you have finished grilling.
Using the Oven
1. Ensure gas cylinder/supply is connected
and turned on. In the event of a gas smell
turn off at gas cylinder/mains and contact
supplier.
2. To light: Open door, push in the control
knob and turn to full rate (240°C). Hold a
lighted match or taper to the burner and
push the control knob in and hold. The
burner should ignite and the control knob
should be held in for 10 -15 seconds before
release.
If the burner goes out, repeat procedure
holding control knob for slightly longer.
3. For models fitted with Spark Ignition the
procedure is similar except that the burner
can be ignited by depressing the ignition
button, which is located on the fascia.
Ignition must be carried out with the door
open, and if the burner has not lit within
15 seconds the control knob should be
released and the oven left for at least 1
minute before a further attempt to ignite the
burner.
4. Place the oven shelf in the required position
and close the door. Set control knob to
approximately 200°C and heat the oven
for about 30 minutes to eliminate any
residual factory lubricants that might impart
unpleasant smells to the meals being
cooked. A non-toxic smoke may occur
when using for the first time so open any
windows and turn on mechanical ventilators
to help remove the smoke.
THETFORD ASPIRE 2 COOKER
Operation
Cooking Guidelines
6. To turn off: turn the control knob until the
line on the control knob is aligned with the
dot on the control panel.
Best results will be obtained by the shelf
positions in this guide. It is not necessary to
preheat the oven but advisable for a range of
dishes. The oven is capable of full temperature
in 15-20 minutes.
7. Shelf: the shelf has been designed to allow
good circulation at the rear of the oven and
is also fitted with a raised bar to prevent
trays or dishes making contact with the
back of the oven. To remove a shelf, pull
forward until it stops, raise at front and
remove.
Most cookery books give details of the
shelf positions and gas mark settings for
each recipe. If in doubt about a recipe you
intend to use, study the recipe carefully
then find a similar dish in our guide and
use our shelf position and gas mark setting
recommendation.
Important
Shelf positions are from the top down. When
roasting with aluminium foil care must be
taken that the foil does not impair circulation
or block the oven flue outlet.
The pans and trays supplied with this
appliance are the maximum sizes
recommended for use. Larger pans and
trays may restrict good circulation of heat,
increasing cooking times.
Oven Temperature Control
The temperature in the oven is controlled by
a thermostatic gas tap and is variable over
the range 130°C to 240°C. The temperatures
indicated refer to the centre of the oven and at
any particular setting the oven will be hotter at
the top and cooler towards the base.
The variation between top and centre, and
centre to bottom is approximately equivalent
to one gas mark. Good use can be made
of the temperature variation in several
dishes requiring different temperatures may
be cooked at the same time. In this way
maximum benefit can be obtained from the
gas used to heat the oven. Care should be
taken not to overload the oven, adequate
spacing being used to allow free circulation
for heat.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
5. Although the oven does heat up quickly, it
is recommended that a 10 minute preheat
be allowed. The oven should be up to full
temperature in about 15-20mins.
Do’s and don’ts
Do read the user instructions carefully before
using the appliance for the first time.
Do allow the oven to heat before using for
the first time, in order to expel any smells
before the introduction of food.
Do clean the appliance regularly.
Do remove spills as soon as they occur.
Do always use oven gloves when removing
food shelves and trays from the oven.
Do check that controls are in the off position
when finished.
Don’t a
llow children near the cooker when in
use. Turn pan handles away from the
front so that they cannot be caught
accidentally.
Don’t a
llow fats or oils to build up in the oven
trays or base.
Don’t u
se abrasive cleaners or powders
that will scratch the surfaces of the
appliance.
Don’t u
nder any circumstances use the oven
as a space heater.
Don’t p
ut heavy objects onto open grill and
oven doors.
179
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
THETFORD ASPIRE 2 COOKER / MICROWAVE
Leaks
If a smell of gas becomes apparent, the
supply should be turned off at the cylinder
IMMEDIATELY. Extinguish naked lights
including cigarettes and pipes. Do not
operate electrical switches. Open all doors
and windows to disperse any gas escape.
LPG gas is heavier than air; any escaping
gas will therefore collect at a low level. The
strong unpleasant smell of gas will enable
the general area of the leak to be detected.
Check that the gas is not escaping from an
unlighted appliance. Never check for leaks
with a naked flame, leak investigation should
be carried out using a leak detector spray.
Maintenance & servicing
Important
• Shut off gas supply at isolating valve, switch
off electric supply and ensure all parts are
cool before cleaning or servicing
• All servicing must be carried out by an
approved competent person.
• After each service the appliance must be
checked for gas soundness
• This appliance must not be modified or
adjusted unless authorised and carried out
by the manufacturer or his representative.
No parts other than those supplied by
the manufacturer should be used on this
appliance.
• If the supply cord is damaged, it must only
be replaced by the manufacturer or his
representative in order to avoid a hazard.
This appliance needs little maintenance other
than cleaning. All parts should be cleaned
using warm soapy water. Do not use abrasive
cleaners, steel wool or cleansing powders.
When cleaning the burner ring it is essential
to ensure that the holes do not become
blocked. The control knobs are a push fit
and can be removed for cleaning. They are
interchangeable without affecting the sense of
operation.
180
Microwave oven general user
instructions
Always refer to the microwave operating
instructions supplied with the vehicle
Precautions to avoid possible exposure to
excessive microwave energy
! WARNING: Do not attempt to operate
this oven with the door open since open
door operation can result in harmful
exposure to microwave energy. It is
important not to defeat or tamper with the
safety interlocks.
! WARNING:
o not place any objects between the oven
D
front face of the door or allow soil or cleaner
residue to accumulate on sealing surfaces.
! WARNING: If the door or door seals are
damaged, the oven must not be operated
until it has been repaired by a competent
person (1) door broken (2) hinges and
latches (broken or loosened), (3) door seals
and sealing surfaces.
! WARNING: It is hazardous for anyone
other than a competent person to carry out
a service or repair operation.
! WARNING: Liquids or other foods must
not be heated in sealed containers since
they are liable to explode.
! WARNING: Only allow children to use
the oven without supervision when adequate
instruction has been given so that the child
is able to use the oven in a safe way and
understands the hazards of improper use.
MICROWAVE
! WARNING: To prevent fire, burns,
electric shock and other warnings:
Listed below are, as with all appliances,
certain rules to follow and safeguards to
assure high performance from this oven:
Important instructions
1. D
o not use the oven for any reason other
than food preparation, such as for drying
clothes, paper, or any other non food items
or for sterilizing purposes.
2. D
o not use the oven when empty, this could
damage the oven.
3. D
o not use the oven cavity for any type
of storage, such as papers, cookbook,
cookware etc.
4D
o not operate the oven without the glass
tray in place. Be sure it is sitting properly on
the rotating base.
5. M
ake sure you remove caps or lids prior
to cooking when you cook food sealed in
bottles.
6. D
o not put foreign material between the
oven surface and door. It could result in
excessive leakage of microwave energy.
7. D
o not use recycled paper products for
cooking. They may contain impurities which
could cause sparks and/or fires when used
during cooking.
8. D
o not pop popcorn unless popped in a
microwave approved popcorn popper or
unless it’s commercially packaged and
recommended especially for microwave
ovens. Microwave popped corn produces
a lower yield than conventional popping;
there will be a number of unpopped kernels.
Do not use oil unless specified by the
manufacturer.
9. D
o not cook any food surrounded by a
membrane, such as egg yolks, potatoes,
chicken livers, etc., without first piercing
them several times with a fork.
10. Do not pop popcorn longer than the
manufacturer’s directions. (Popping time
is generally below 3 minutes). Longer
cooking does not yield more popped
corn it can cause scorching and fire. Also,
the cooking tray can become too hot to
handle or may break.
11. If smoke is observed, switch off or unplug
the appliance and keep the door closed in
order to stifle any flames.
12. When heating food in plastic or paper
containers, keep an eye on the oven due lo
the possibility of ignition.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Important safety guidance
13. The contents of feeding bottles and baby
food jars shall be stirred or shaken and the
temperature checked before consumption,
in order to avoid burns.
14. Always test the temperature of food
or drink which has been heated in a
microwave oven before you give it to
somebody, especially to children or elderly
people. This is important because things
which have been heated in a microwave
oven carry on getting hotter even though
the microwave oven cooking has stopped.
15. Eggs in their shell and whole hard-boiled
eggs should not be heated in microwave
ovens since they may explode, even after
microwave heating has ended.
16. Keep the waveguide cover clean at all
times. Wipe the oven interior with a soft
damp cloth after each use. If you leave
grease or fat anywhere in the cavity it may
overheat, smoke or even catch fire when
next using the oven.
17. Never heat oil or fat for deep frying as you
cannot control the temperature and doing
so may lead to overheating and fire.
18. Liquids, such as water, coffee, or tea are
able to be overheated beyond the boiling
point without appearing lo be boiling due
to surface tension of the Iiquid. Visible
bubbling or boiling when the container is
removed from the microwave oven is not
always present. This could result in very
hot liquid suddenly boiling over when a
spoon or other utensil is inserted into the
liquid.
181
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
MICROWAVE
To reduce the risk of Injury to persons:
a. D
o not overheat the liquid.
b. Stir the Iiquid both before and halfway
through heating it.
c. D
o not use straight-sided containers with
narrow necks.
d. After heating, allow the container to stand in
the microwave oven for a short time before
removing the container
e. U
se extreme care when inserting a spoon or
other utensil into the container.
Care of the microwave
1. Turn the oven off before cleaning
2. Keep the inside of the oven clean. When
food spatters or spilled liquids adhere to
oven walls, wipe with a damp cloth. Mild
detergent may be used if the oven gets
very dirty. The use of harsh detergent or
abrasives is not recommended.
3. The outside oven surface should be cleaned
with soap and water, rinsed and dried
with a soft cloth. To prevent damage to
the operating parts inside the oven, water
should not be allowed to seep into the
ventilation openings.
4. If the central panel becomes wet, clean
with a soft dry cloth. Do not use harsh
detergents or abrasives on Control Panel.
5. If steam accumulates inside or around
the outside of the oven door, wipe with
a soft cloth. This may occur when the
microwave oven is operated under high
humidity conditions and in no way indicates
malfunction of the unit.
6. It is occasionally necessary to remove the
glass tray for cleaning. Wash the tray in
warm sudsy water or in a dishwasher.
7. The roller guide and oven cavity floor should
be cleaned regular/y to avoid excessive
noise. Simply wipe the bottom surface
of the oven with mild detergent water or
window cleaner and dry. The roller guide
may be washed in mild sudsy water.
182
8. The oven should be cleaned regularly and
any food deposits removed;
9. Failure to maintain the oven in a clean
condition could lead to deterioration of the
surface that could adversely affect the life
of the appliance and possibly result in a
hazardous situation.
CASSETTE TOILET
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Thetford C260 Cassette Toilet
Quick Guide
Preparing waste holding tank
19
20
183
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
CASSETTE TOILET
184
Emptying waste-holding tank
CASSETTE TOILET
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Standard
1. Cover
2. Seat
3. Swivelling toilet bowl
4. Blade handle to open/close blade
5. Control panel (position is different on C263
models)
5a. Flush button
5b. Waste holding tank level indication (1 level
or 3 levels; dependent on model)
6. Pull handle
7. Pour out spout
8. Cap with measuring cup
11. Sliding cover
12. Blade opener
13. Waste holding tank mechanism
14. Wheel
15. Service door 3
Options
16. Waterfill door (only for C262 models)
17. Console with flush water tank (only for
C262 models)
18. Filter for electric ventilator
19. Location waste pump out system
9. Automatic pressure release vent
10. V
ent button
185
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
CASSETTE TOILET
Introduction
This Thetford Cassette Toilet is a high quailty
product. It is user-friendly, meets high quality
standards and gives you all the convenience
of home.
Before operating and using this toilet we
advise you to read the manual completely.
Keep this manual in a safe place for future
reference.
For the latest version of the manual
please visit www.thetford.eu
Possible toilet options
ome toilets are fitted with
S
extra options. To check which
options are available, press
the flush button on the control
panel.
The following symbols can light up:
• Waste pump out system - transfers
waste from the waste holding tank into the
vehicles’s central waste tank.
• Electric blade - electrically opens or close
the blade.
• Electric ventilator - draws unpleasant
odours away from the waste tank to the
outside of the vehicle.
You will find additional to these options in
the grey text boxes. Thoroughly read the
applicable instructions.
Preparing for use
This cassette toilet has a waste holding tank
of 17.5L. A C262 model also has its own 8L
flush water tank. Before using your toilet, it is
vital that you add toilet additive to these tanks.
Check the correct dosage on the additive
package. Then add ±3L of water to the waste
holding tank. Fill the flush water tank of a C262
model to the top.
186
Electric ventilator (if applicable)
Open the service door and remove the
waste holding tank. Then remove the filter
housing cover and place the new filter
into the filter housing. Replace the cover
and return the waste holding tank back to
original position.
! WARNING: Never add toilet additives
directly via the blade as this could damage
the lip seal of the waste holding tank. Only
fill the waste holding tank via the pour out
spout.
! WARNING: Never use force if you
cannot get the waste holding tank back
into place easily. If blockage occurs, always
check if the blade handle is in the closed
position.
See Quick guide diagrams 1-20 for visual
reference. To depressurise the waste holding
tank, press the vent button before placing the
tank back in its position.
Thetford offers a pleasantly scented toilet fluid
for the flush water tank (Aqua Rinse) and a
variety of waste holding tank products (Aqua
Kem Blue, Aqua Kem Green, Aqua Kem
Natural, Aqua Kem Sachets).
Aqua Rinse keeps the flush water fresh,
ensures a smooth flush and leaves a protective
layer. All products for the waste holding tank
suppress unpleasant smells, stimulate the
breakdown of waste, reduce the formation
of gas, protect moving parts and help to the
waste holding tank fresh and clean. For the
differences between the distinguishing qualities
of each waste holding tank product please visit
www.thetford.eu
Note: The range of available Toilet Care
products may vary for each country.
CASSETTE TOILET
Turning the bowl
ou can turn this bowl to a
Y
desired position (max. ±90°).
Close the cover and use both
hands to rotate the bowl as
illustrated.
Opening the blade
he toilet can be used with
T
the blade open or closed.
To open the blade, slide the
blade sideways as illustrated.
Make sure you always close
the blade completely after use.
Electric blade (if applicable)
Press the flush button to activate the control
panel. Then push the Electric blade button.
The blade will open or close electrically.
Flushing the toilet
ress the flush button once
P
to activate the control panel.
Then press the flush button
for several seconds to flush
the toilet.
Electric ventilator (if applicable)
By activating the control panel, the Electric
ventilator start automatically. The button
will flash to indicate this function is active.
To stop the Electric ventilator, press the
button. Press the button again to restore
the Electic ventilator. To optimise its function,
activate the Electric ventilator before use of
your toilet.
Note: Ordinary toilet paper can cause
clogging. Use Aqua Soft toilet paper instead.
This toilet paper is super soft, dissolves
quickly, prevents clogging and makes it
easier to empty the waste holding tank.
Level indication
You can check whether your waste holding
tank has a 1 level or a 3 level indication. Make
sure the tank is empty and place it properly.
Then activate the control panel. If no level
indication light lights up, your toilet has a 1
level indication. It will only indicate a full tank.
If a green level indication light immediately
lights up, your toilet has a 3 level indication.
It will indicate empty, half full and full.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Use of your toilet
Emptying the tank
Waste holding tank
When the red light of the level indicator on the
control panel lights up, you need to empty the
waste holding tank. Remove the tank via the
service door. Then take it to an authorised
waste disposal point. Empty the waste holding
tank via the pour out spout.
Waste pump out system (if applicable)
By activating the control panel, this button
automatically lights up. Press the button
to empty the waste holding tank into the
vehicle’s central waste tank. The button
flashes while the waste is being pumped
and stops flashing when all waste has been
transferred. (±1.5L of waste is left). If the
central waste tank is too full (only measured
when this tank has a level indicator), the
button flashes rapidly and no pump out is
possible until you have emptied the central
waste tank.
Note: Even without an own flush water tank
you can still use Aqua Rinse for a smooth
and fresh lavender scented flush. Simply
spray Aqua Rinse with a spray can evenly
into the toilet bowl before use.
187
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
CASSETTE TOILET
See ‘Quick guide’ diagrams 21-32 for visual
reference. If you want to continue using
your toilet after emptying, prepare the waste
holding tank again.
Note: Our ‘green’ products Aqua Kem
Green, Aqua Kem Natural and Aqua Rinse
(test ISO 11734) are absolutely safe to
empty into a septic tank or small biological
systems on camping sites.
Waste pump out system (if applicable)
Fill the emptied waste holding tank with
water and place the tank back. Then
activate the control panel. Press the waste
pump out system button to pump the water
through the system. Do this once every 3
weeks.
Remove seat and cover
o clean your toilet thoroughly,
T
remove the seat and cover.
First push the seat and cover
together to the right then lift
them up.
! WARNING: Please avoid travel with a
waste holding tank that is more than 3/4 full.
This may cause leakage through the venting
system.
Flush water tank (only for C262 models)
The flush water tank has a capacity of 8L.
Only empty the flush water tank completely if
you don’t expect to use your toilet for a long
(winter) period. Place a sufficiently large bowl
under the drain tube and catch the remaining
water. Empty this bowl at an authorised waste
disposal point.
See ‘Quick guide’ diagrams 33-38 for visual
reference.
! WARNING: To prevent water damage
to your caravan, ensure you don’t travel
with a full flush water tank or with water in
the bowl.
Cleaning
Just like your toilet at home, it is also important
to clean this cassette toilet regularly. You will
prevent limescale and ensure optimal hygiene.
Clean the inside of the bowl with toilet bowl
cleaner and a soft brush and use bathroom
cleaner for the outside of the toilet.
! WARNING: Never use the household
cleaners to clean your toilet. These may
cause permanent damage to the seals and
other toilet components.
188
Winter use
You can use your toilet as normal in cold
weather as long as the toilet is situated in a
heated location. If this is not the case, and
there is a risk of frost, we advise not to use
your toilet. Make sure you completely empty
the waste holding tank. For a C262 model also
empty the flush water tank.
Note: Aqua Kem Sachets are particularly
suitable for winter camping as the sachets
are filled with powder. They completely
dissolve in water, are easy to dose and
economical in use.
Maintenance
To prolong the life span of your toilet, maintain
your toilet regularly. Use cassette tank cleaner
2 to 3 times a year on the waste holding tank.
It safely removes stubborn limescale on the
inside of the tank. When seals become dry,
use seal lubricant to keep the seals soft and
pliable. It has been specially developed for
mobile toilets and is absolutely safe to use.
! WARNING: Never use Vaseline or
vegetable oil to lubricate the seals as
these may cause leakage to your waste
holding tank.
CASSETTE TOILET
Questions?
To ensure optimal functionality, maintain the
waste holding tank regularly. Fill the waste
holding tank with water and rinse it. Then
use Cassette Tank Cleaner. Do this every 6
weeks when on holiday.
If you require further information or have any
questions about your toilet, please visit our
website www.thetford.eu If you still have
questions, contact the Customer Service
Department in your country or your holiday
location.
Electric Ventilator (if applicable)
For correct and efficient support, please
ensure all relevant product type information is
available.
After approximately 4 weeks of use, the filter
loses its absorption power. Remove the filter
housing cover and place the new filter into
the new housing.
Storage
If you don’t expect to use your toilet for a long
period, you have to thoroughly empty, clean
and dry the whole toilet. Also empty the flush
water tank of a C262 model. This is also a
good moment to maintain your toilet. During
storage we advise leaving the blade open to
prevent damage to the blade and to loosen
the cap of the pour out spout to ventilate the
waste holding tank.
Electric ventilator (if applicable)
Remove the filter of the filter housing.
Disposal
Your product has been designed and
manufactured with high quality material and
components, which can be recycled and
reused. When your toilet has reached the end
of its life, dispose of the product according to
the local rules. Do not use the toilet with the
normal household waste. The correct disposal
of your old product will help prevent potential
negative consequences for the environment
and human health.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Waste pump out system (if applicable)
Spare parts
Original Thetford spare parts are available
through your own dealer or an authorised
Thetford Service Centre.
FAQs
What should I do in case of a defect on
my Thetford toilet? Contact your dealer
where you bought your vehicle, or if you are
on holiday, contact an authorised Thetford
Service Centre.
A red light on the control panel flashes,
what should I do? Check if the waste holding
tank is present or positioned properly.
I cannot move my waste holding tank.
Check if the blade of your toilet is completely
closed.
What should I do when the electric blade
doesn’t function? Manually open or close
the blade by sliding the small handle under the
toilet bowl sideways.
What should I do if the blade is blocked?
Loosen the cap with measuring cap from the
pour out spout and try again.
Does the toilet have a fuse? Yes, the toilet
has a maintenance free self-resetting fuse.
189
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
CASSETTE TOILET
Warranty
Thetford BV offers the end users of its
products a three-year guarantee. In the case
of malfunction within the warranty period,
Thetford will replace or repair the product
at its discretion. In this case, the costs of
replacement, labour costs for the replacement
of defective components and/or the costs of
the parts themselves will be paid by Thetford.
1. To make a claim under this guarantee,
the user must take the product to his
dealer or an authorised Thetford Service
Centre (www.thetford.eu). The claim will be
assessed there.
2. Components replaced during repair under
guarantee become the property of Thetford.
3. This warranty does not prejudice current
consumer protection laws.
4. This warranty is not valid in the case of
products that are for, or are used for,
commercial purposes.
Guarantee claims falling into one of the
following categories will not be accepted:
• the product has been improperly used or
the instructions in the manual have been
followed (for example incorrect use of
additives;
• alterations have been made to the product;
• the product has been repaired by an
unauthorised Thetford Service Centre;
• the product code or serial ID has been
changed;
• the product has been damaged by
circumstances outside the normal use of the
product.
5. Not using Thetford products to care for
your Thetford toilet could create some
damage, which would not be covered by
this warranty.
Thetford is not liable for any loss and/or
damage caused directly or indirectly by use of
the toilet.
190
EXTERNAL BBQ POINT
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Caravans with external
barbeque point (when fitted)
Models equipped with an external barbeque
point can be used to power any gas appliance
suitable for the gas used in the caravan, at
the working pressure shown on the label in
the barbeque outlet box. Please note when
using the outlet that the fitted regulator will
allow a maximum of 1.5kg per hour of gas to
be taken from the gas bottle. Therefore the
consumption of gas from both the appliances
within the caravan and the appliance
connected to the barbeque point cannot
exceed a total of 1.5kg per hour at any one
time. If you are in any doubt please consult
your dealer for advice. To use point proceed
as follows:
When external gas equipment is being
connected, the operating pressure of the gas
supply of 30 or 50 mbar must correspond with
the operating pressure of he equipment that is
being connected (see data plate).
The plug-in connection can only be made if the
quick acting valve is closed. The safety locking
mechanism can be released by sliding back
the coupling sleeve.
The coupling K-valve is designed such that
the quick acting valve can only be opened if
the connection has been made via the plugin connection. The connection is made by
inserting the plug-in connection into the safety
coupling.
This operation can be carried out using one
hand. After uncoupling the equipment, seal off
the valve opening using the protection seal.
Note: The external gas socket is only
suitable for removing gas, not for feeding
gas into the gas system.
! WARNING: Care should be taken when
using the external barbeque point. Never
barbeque next to an awning or tent.
! WARNING: The caravan barbeque point
should only be used as an outlet point for
gas, never connect a gas bottle direct to the
outlet.
191
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
EXTERNAL SHOWER POINT/
BATTERY BOX TV INLET
External shower point
(when fitted)
The external shower point, if fitted, will be
supplied with a separate shower head and
hose assembly. To connect the shower,
simply align the plug with the socket and
push into position. To remove, pull the lower
trigger and pull the plug from the socket.
Challenger and Eccles
A connection point in the battery box will link
to a connection marked ‘SAT’ at the primary
TV position within the caravan.
Supplier fitted / supplied
entertainment equipment
Caravans with TV inlet in
battery box (when fitted)
Models equipped with TV points in the battery
box have the facility to take an external signal
and supply that signal to TV points within the
caravan.
When fitted this will take one of two formats:
Sprite Freedom
A connection or pair of connections in the
battery box, will link to the TV point or pair of
TV points in the caravan.
Audio-visual equipment may have been fitted
by your dealer, or supplied with the caravan,
depending on the specification of the caravan.
Although not specific, below are details of the
types of equipment which would be fitted as
appropriate to the specification of the caravan.
CD/MP3/Tuner with auxiliary
input (when fitted)
When fitted, a CD tuner similar in appearance
to those installed in the dashboard of a car, will
be present within the furniture of an overhead
locker.
The capabilities of the unit will vary depending
on its specification, please see the instructions
supplied with the head unit for complete
details. In general:
The CD section will play audio CD’s, and often
MP3 files held on a CD
An auxiliary input connection (3.5mm jack) will
accept an audio input from the headphone
socket of an MP3 player or similar.
A USB connection, if present, will allow the
playback of music files from a USB stick or
similar.
AM/FM radio reception will be possible via
192
TV AERIALS
4. Check the gain control switch is set to
normal – NML.
DAB radio reception, when present, will be via
the roof mounted antenna. In this case, the
AM/FM reception will also use a connection to
the roof mounted antenna, and a side mount
retractable mast antenna will not be fitted.
5. Tune your television to the strongest signal.
You may need to adjust the direction of the
mast to achieve the best quality picture.
Shakesepeare TV Omnidirectional Antenna (Sprite)
The circular, roof mounted Shakespeare
antenna is designed for analogue and digital
TV reception. All of the connections are premade to the antenna, up to the TV sockets
mounted on the furniture within your caravan.
The aerial is omni-directional so no external
adjustment is required – the aerial connection
box, however, does feature a gain control.
Rotate the control clockwise to increase gain,
and anti-clockwise to reduce gain, to optimise
reception.
Status directional
TV and FM radio antenna
(Challenger & Eccles )
6. Secure by tightening the Mast Locking
Collar and Wall Bracket
Removing the antenna
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
an amplified antenna with retractable mast
mounted on the side of the caravan
A permanently fitted Status can be easily
removed leaving only the Mounting Foot and
rubber gaiter.
1. Unplug the antenna from the Power Pack.
2. Loosen the Mast Locking Collar and Wall
Bracket and lift off whilst feeding out the
cable.
3. Push the Blanking Cap supplied into place.
! WARNING: The Blanking Cap is a
temporary seal and is not for long term use.
! WARNING: Always ensure the aerial is
lowered before driving off.
Firstly determine the approximate location
of the nearest transmitter and whether the
signals are horizontally or vertically polarized.
For assistance ask your site operator or check
antennas in the vicinity
1. Loosen the Mast Locking Collar and Wall
Bracket and raise the antenna. Turn the
mast to direct the Antenna towards the TV
transmitter.
T
he RED spot on the bottom of the mast
indicates the front of the Antenna.
2. When receiving vertically polarized signals,
rotate the winder anti-clockwise to cant
the antenna through 90°. The red / green
indicator, if present, indicates vertical or
horizontal orientation.
Note: DO NOT over tighten or use undue
force on the winder.
3. Switch ON the Power Pack and the RED
LED will illuminate.
193
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
BEDDING
Bedding
Sleeping bags and duvets can be compressed
into small spaces and can be ready to use in
minutes.
Fig. C
Lift-up bunks
1. Grasp the bunk and pull carefully upwards
and towards you. (Fig. D)
Fig. A
2. The bunk is designed to automatically
move into the correct position. (Fig. E)
3. Where a bed board is fitted, unfold and
make sure it is secured by press studs
when lifted into position. (The bed board
is required to protect both the occupant
and the window from damage during use
of the bunk.) (Fig. F)
4. Locate safety boards. (Fig. G)
5. Arrange seat cushions as appropriate.
(Fig. G)
Fig. B
Lower single beds assembly (Figs. A & B)
1. L
ower dinette table and place between the
recess in both seats.
2. Arrange seat cushions as appropriate.
Double bed assembly (Fig. C)
1. Grip front of slatted bed and walk
backwards until bed is fully extended.
2. Arrange seat cushions as appropriate.
194
Bunks are designed to carry a child to a
maximum of 70kg (11 stone)
! WARNING: Use the upper bunks for
sleeping only, with the provided protection
against fall out in position.
! WARNING: Care shall be taken against
the risk of fall out when the upper bunks are
in use by children especially under 6 years of
age, these bunks are not suitable for use by
infants without supervision.
BEDDING / BLINDS
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Operating instructions for
softrollo blinds
Fig. D
Hold the operating aluminium bar in the middle
and raise or lower the blind and flyscreen
independently, operating together will require
excessive force in operation.
Care instructions: Clean the blind only with
a damp sponge. Clean on a regular basis to
avoid dirt particle build up as this can damage
the blind material.
Fig. E
Use only water or with mild suds or a vacuum
cleaner.
In order to avoid material fatigue, do not leave
the flynet closed for a long time.
Maintenance
If operation of the soft Rollo blind is
exceptionally stiff, it is possible to spray the
guide - legs (left and right) with a Teflon spray. This will ease both the operation of the
blind and avoid any interruption/malfunction
from deposits in the guide legs which may
affect the operation.
Fig. F
Fig. G
195
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
DOORSCREEN / EXTERIOR DOOR
Doorscreen
The door flyscreen is tracked top and bottom
and operation must be by the centre of the
handle to aide a smooth operation.
Exterior Door Key
! WARNING: Care should be taken not to
leave the exterior door key in the door when
unlocking the door. The key may result in
damage in the vehicle side if the door is
released with the key still in the lock.
! WARNING: The door retainer is
designed to hold the door in normal
conditions. In gusty or windy conditions we
recommend the door is closed to prevent it
releasing and slamming shut.
The door flynet operates independently of the
door by sliding across the door threshold.
Exterior door
Operation:
The door blind (when fitted) slides vertically
within the door cassette.
The door is locked from the inside by rotating
the outer handle vertically.
The deadlock facility is operated by rotating
the internal handle
Outer Handle
Internal Handle
! WARNING: When opening or releasing
the doorscreen, care must be taken to avoid
trapping fingers.
196
WINDOWS / BLINDS /
ROOFLIGHTS
Windows / Roller Blind Advice
Maximum load must not exceed 3kg
In case of prolonged exposure to the sun roller
blinds should not be completely closed as this
could cause excessive heat concentration at
the top of the window, due to characteristics
of the glazing material the windows could be
adversely affected.
Roller blinds that shade from the bottom
upwards it is necessary to leave a gap of a few
centimetres open at the top, this way the heat
between window and blind can escape. A fly
screen does not cause an obstruction.
Dustpan & Brush
Located behind
the bin lid.
Windows
To open all window types turn the internal
handles through 90 degrees and push open
the window.
On models fitted with telescopic stays:
push open the window to the desired position
and tighten the stay. To close the window,
loosen the stays and slowly close taking care
to fold the stay inside the window and lock
off the handles by turning back through 90
degrees.On models fitted with ratchet
stays: the window locks in the open position
to pre-set positions located within the stay.
To operate, push open the window until you
hear an audible click and then slowly release
the pane and the window will be locked in the
first open position. Push open again to find
the next locking position. To close, fully open
the window which will disengage the locks
and allow the window to close slowly and lock
off the handles by turning back through 90
degrees.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Bin (When fitted):
Roller blinds that shade from the top
downwards must be kept completely open,
or be opened regularly to allow the heat to
escape.
Keeping the windows in ventilation position
allows heat to escape.
Never fully close a roller blind system when
storing the vehicle or when not in use for
longer periods!
Roof lights
When opening the roof lights, care must be
taken to release the locking mechanism as the
unit is raised.
Roof lights must be fully closed when towing.
Roof lights provide varying levels of fixed
ventilation.
197
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
ROOFLIGHTS
Therefore for optimal window life it is
recommended:• Blinds starting at the bottom of the window a
gap should be provided for ventilation at the
top with the window in its ventilation position.
• For vehicles containing blinds from the top
downwards or with other types of reflective
blinds / curtains, please make sure that
these blinds are also ventilated or not fully
closed.
Ensure that all windows and roof vents are
closed when the vehicle travels on the road.
- Before opening the dome remove snow, ice,
dirt etc. from the dome.
- Malfunctions are to be repaired by an
approved dealer at once.
- Do not use caustic detergents (danger of
tension cracks in the dome).
- Before setting off close the dome, check the
locking mechansim and open the blinds.
The guarantee becomes null and void if the
care and safety instructions are not followed.
Mini Heki rooflight (when fitted)
Heki care instructions
Clean the blind only with a damp sponge.
Clean on a regular basis to avoid dust/ dirt
particle build up as this can damage the blind
material. Use only water or with mild suds or a
vacuum cleaner.
In order to avoid material fatigue, do not leave
the flynet closed for a long time.
- Clean the dome with the Seitz Acrylic
Cleaner.
To open depress the button (Fig. A).
- Opaque spots and light scratches on the
dome can be removed with the Seitz Acrylic
Polish and the Seitz Special Polishing cloth.
- Use talcum powder regularly (4 times yearly)
to care for the rubber seals supplied with
versions without permanent ventilation.
- Clean the blinds only with water and mild
soap suds.
198
Safety precautions:
- Repairs should be carried out only by trained
personnel.
- Inform an approved dealer in case of defects
and malfunctions.
- Before starting off, check the rooflight for
damage in the dome (tension cracks) and the
opening mechanism which could arise owing
to, for example, branches and other natural
causes.
- Do not step on the dome.
- Close the rooflight before starting off (check
whether it is locked).
- Do not leave the vehicle with the rooflight
open (danger of burglary).
- Do not open in strong wind or rain.
Pull the bar down and forwards (Fig. B).
By pushing the bar in to the marked rest
positions (Fig. C).
ROOFLIGHTS
Opening the Dome
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Midi-Heki rooflight (when fitted)
Two extra opening angles apart from the
one in which the dome is fully opened can
be chosen. The intermediate position can be
fixed with a slide marked with the arrows. Care
should be taken to ensure the dome is closed
and locked for transit with the bar located
behind the locking button (Fig. D).
The blind flynet operate together and engage
via the clips in the bar, then slide to gain the
desired blackout or ventilation (Fig. E).
Intermediate position for the dome
By pushing the bar into the marked rest
position, two extra opening angles, apart from
the one in which the dome is fully opened, can
be chosen.
199
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
ROOFLIGHTS
MPK Rooflight (when fitted)
! WARNING:
Never stand on the dome of the rooflight!
Closing the Dome
(drive and rest position)
Push the bar with both hands on the right and
the left side in such a way that the hook bolt
(1) the dome on the left and the right side and
the bar lies on the push button (2). Check if the
dome is locked.
Instruction for use
The rooflight can be opened fully, or in four
different directions, so that the dome can be
angled against driving weather conditions.
The handle profiles of both roller blinds (flynet
and roller blind) click into space at the edge of
the frame and can be opened by pulling the
handle (arrow on the handle profile).
With both handle profiles clipped together they
can be moved to any position. To seperate,
fully open the flynet and squeeze together the
catches on the central lock and allow flynet to
recoil.
Free-air-flow
! WARNING: When closed there is a free
airflow throught the rooflight, which must be
kept free at all times.
Before driving
IMPORTANT: All rooflights must be locked
down before travelling and both roller blinds
locked in the fully open position against the
frame.
200
ROOFLIGHTS / FURNITURE CARE
Care of laminate tops, tables,
furniture and doors
For easier cleaning of the dome it can be
removed from the frame by releasing the four
screws holding the handle arms. Do this from
the inside of the van.
Do not place hot objects on laminated
surfaces i.e. tops, tables. Any temperatures
70°C and over may cause permanent damage.
Do not use abrasives, chemically treated
cloths or aggressive detergents as these may
cause damage.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Care instructions:
The rooflight should only be washed by hand,
using a sponge with plenty of clean water
to avoid scratching. Caustic detergents and
solvents may attack the plastic and make it
brittle or disintegrate.
Clean worktop surfaces, furniture and door
fascias with a soft, slightly damp cloth, dry off
with a soft cloth.
Doors
In order to provide customers with the latest
designs of door furniture it is possible, due
to the use of natural wood, that warping may
occur. This should not detract from the correct
functioning of items fitted in the caravan.
Information
Lift the dome clear of the roof and rotate so
that it can be lowered into the van across the
diagonal of the aperture.
During the normal travelling vehicle vibration
and flexing may cause some of the furniture
doors to become out of alignment.
Make sure that only the original screws are
used when replacing the dome and that they
enter the thread in the plastic correctly. Do not
over-tighten.
For your convenience many hinges are
adjustable.
Never remove the screws holding the dome
and the handles together. These are secured
by a torque screwdriver and should only be
handled by an approved dealer.
201
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
TABLES/12V LAMPS/SHOWER
Tables
Slide the top of the chest of drawers forward
to form a convenient table. Lift the rear portion
to slide the top away. (Fig. A)
Tables stored in the table storage
compartment must be securely clipped into
place whilst in transit.
12V reading lamp
! WARNING: 12v tungsten reading/
spotlamps generate high temperatures
when in use, the body, lens/ bulb may
become very hot. NEVER make directional
adjustment in the direction of flammable
materials i.e. curtains, nets or blinds.
Fig. A
Shower use
• Care should be taken as water may become
hot temporarily when switched on until it
mixes and regulates.
• Small children should be surpervised at all
times when using the shower.
• We recommend unfastening the shower head
before travelling and storing safely to prevent it
becoming detached whilst towing.
! WARNING: When erecting the
free standing table, be careful to avoid
trapping fingers.
Table storage
To avoid damage care must be taken when
removing tables from their stored position.
Where two tables are stored together in a
low level storage area care should be taken
to remove the table positioned opposite the
hinged edge first.
202
AWNINGS/TV/SUNROOF/
ROOF
Colour reference
In order to avoid puncturing the outer skin
of the caravan wall, it is recommended that
awning poles are fixed to your caravan using
load spreading eyelet pads or rubber sucker
pads.
If you require touch-up paint or a respray of
your caravan, the correct colour code for all
white components is Fiat White 249.
Attaching awning brackets and associated
fixings to your caravan by using mechanical
methods which pierce the outer skin of the
caravan wall can allow water ingress which will
invalidate the product warranty.
Important:
Care must be taken when using an awning
as poles and suckers can cause damage to
exterior side panels.
Awnings should be taken down in strong
winds to protect the side panels from cosmetic
damage and dents from the awning poles.
Note: Awnings should be kept ventilated
when discharging products of combustion
exhaust into them.
Awning Sizes
Due to the various awning types and sizes
the awning sizes provided in the Service and
Warranty Handbook are for guidance only.
Full details and sizes of awnings (A-A
dimensions) for your caravan can be found in
your Technical Handbook.
Note: Specific awning sizes must be
confirmed with the dealer or awning
manufacturer prior to purchase.
Please be aware that colours can fade over
time, and therefore, if the vehicle is more than
a few years old, it is suggested a colour match
be obtained.
TV Brackets (when fitted)
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Fixing of awnings
In some models a bulkhead mounted bracket
is supplied to mount a TV on. Whilst the
bracket has a secure travel lock, it is good
practise to un-clip the TV from the bracket and
store securely for travelling.
Front locker and sunroof
The front locker is made from ABS
thermoformed plastics, which are easy
clean textured surfaces. To ensure long
life and prevent damage you must not use
any cleaning materials including solvents or
aggressive cleaning materials. We recommend
the use of warm soapy water, applied with a
damp cloth.
Where a front sunroof is fitted, directly above
the front windows, it is recommended that the
blind be left open during use (or storage) in
high temperatures or direct sunlight, to avoid
a build-up of heat within this non-opening
window.
Bonded Roof
The roof of your caravan is made from a
bonded construction. Care should be taken
when cleaning the roof not to walk directly on
the roof. If access to the roof is required the
weight of a person should be spread across
a larger area using a spreader board and
extreme care should be taken when working
at heights.
203
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
STEP ON HITCH / CYCLE RACK / MOVERS
Step on hitch cover
Where a step on hitch cover is fitted,
customers are reminded only to stand on the
designated areas, identified with black anti-slip
matting. Stepping elsewhere on the hitch
cover may result in damage to the hitch cover.
The Swift Group only recommends a Thule
cycle carrier which will conveniently clip in to
the pre-installed mounting rail. The maximum
weight which can be mounted on this carrier
is 50kg.
Models without a step on hitch cover are
not suitable for standing on and failure to
follow these simple instructions may result
in premature failure or cracking which will
not be covered by any guarantees (including
extended warranties).
Caravan motor movers
Cycle racks
The Swift Group allows the fitment of a two
cycle rack carrier and we have made provision
for this with two pre-positioned mounting rails
fitted to the rear of your caravan. These are
spaced at either 800mm or 850mm apart.
Below are the racks which can be purchased
from Thule, which are compatible with the
pre-fitted rails.
The design and fitment of a caravan motor
mover shall be in accordance with the NCC
Code of Practice 305 and you should ensure
you receive a signed installation certificate of
compliance from the installer.
Failure to do so may invalidate
your warranty
Thule Bike carriers
204
Thule Bike carrier type
Thule Excellent
standard version
Thule Elite G2
standard version
Thule Sport G2
standard version
Thule reference
309821
306560
307126
Capacity (# bikes)
2+1+1
2+1+1
2+1
Max load to be placed on
the rack (kg)
50
50
50
Max individual bike weight (kg)
30
30
19
800mm Fixing rail spacing
Yes
Yes
Yes
850mm Fixing rail spacing
Yes
Yes
Yes
OMNI-VENT
• By pushing on the switch S1 (extract) or
S3 (intake), the airflow can be adjusted in 6
steps. See table 19.
F ITTE D E QUIPME NT
Omni-vent (when fitted)
*MIN = 3,7 m3/min (2 W - 0,17 A)
*MAX = 24 m3/min (86 W - 7,20 A)
• In order to save the battery, the speed drops
from position 6 to the lowest position after
one hour of use.
Use rooflight
• Close the lid before driving
• To take away the roller blind, unscrew and
click the frame off the side of the knob.
• It is possible to allow the ventilator to work
for 5 minutes on the highest speed (boost).
To do this push for 3 seconds on the button
S1 (extraction) or S2 (intake). After 5 minutes
the ventilator returns to its previous speed
setting. See table in fig 20.
Use of the ventilation
• The ventilator is started by the soft switch
S2. The middle LED light lights up and the
ventilator starts in comfort mode, this is the
lowest speed (extract). See fig 18.
205
FIT T E D E QUIP M E N T
OMNI-VENT
• For reasons of security, the ventilator stops
when the voltage is too high (19,5 V) or too
low (11,1 V) or when the fan is blocked. For
trouble shooting see fig 21.
Maintenance
The ventilator grid can be removed for
cleaning. Also the mosquito screen can be
taken out for cleaning.
Remark on the transport of the caravan
with Omni-vent
The roof light is only waterproof in the direction
of the traffic. When transporting the caravan in
the opposite direction, or when the back of the
caravan is up, ensure the dome is watertight
by using the ‘Lock-unlock’ (not supplied on a
ventilator version) or by using something that
ensures that the dome remains closed when
being transported.
206
MAINTENANCE
Caravan movers..................................................................................................................... 208
Caravan exterior .................................................................................................................... 208
Condensation ........................................................................................................................ 209
Caravan interior ..................................................................................................................... 210
MA INT E NA NCE
Vehicle modification and non-standard parts ......................................................................... 208
Winterisation/storage ............................................................................................................. 212
AL-KO chassis ...................................................................................................................... 215
AL-KO ATC control system.................................................................................................... 216
Axle types .............................................................................................................................. 221
Stabilisers and coupling devices ............................................................................................ 225
Overrun device ...................................................................................................................... 235
Chassis trouble shooting ....................................................................................................... 238
Chassis accessories .............................................................................................................. 240
207
MA INT E NA N CE
MODIFICATIONS
Vehicle modifications
& non-standard parts
As the owner of a Swift Group Product,
you are able to make any modifications you
wish, either by yourself or through a dealer,
without affecting the Swift 3/6/10 Year
Warranty.
However, please be aware that any issues,
resulting directly or indirectly, from a
modification or fitment of a non-standard
part, will not be covered by The Swift Group
Warranty.
WD40 is not recommended for external
or internal use.
WD40 attacks paintwork and sealants.
If a lubricant is required for Interior
hinges, Sliding door tracks, Bottle box
hinges, Exterior door hinges, Plastic
tracking etc. We recommend “Ambersil
40+” this is readily available from most
DIY/ Automotive spare part retailers
Before carrying out any DIY work within the
warranty period (3/6/10) years please check
with your Swift Group dealer.
REPLACEMENT PARTS: The Swift Group
recommend that only OEM approved
replacement parts are used.
Caravan movers
For both aluminium panels and plastic panels.
1. Wash the caravan regularly with mild
detergent. Rinse with cold water and leather
off.
2. For better protection a similar coloured
good quality car wax may be applied.
For sealed areas a mild soap is the best way
to clean without affecting the sealant.
Acid or alkaline based cleaners or solvents
should not be used.
! WARNING: Under no circumstances use
any abrasive cleaning agents or solvents on
the exterior panels.
Care should be taken as the silicon in some
polishes can attack the rubber used on the
exterior for seals and gaskets.
! WARNING: Do not wash your caravan
with a high pressure washer as these can
permanently damage the seals of your
caravan.
Acrylic Windows
Wash windows carefully, as you would with the
paintwork of your car, do not scrub windows
prior to removing surface dirt and film with a
hose pipe - trapped dirt could
cause scratching.
If thinking of installing a caravan mover as an
after fit it is advisable to consult your dealer, as
this may not be possible with shock absorbers
(if fitted).
Wash with a solution of warm soapy water,
windows can then be dried off with a leather.
Caravan exterior
Catches and stays do not require any special
attention or lubrication.
Aluminium Panels
The stove enamelled paintwork is very durable
and easy to clean owing to the high gloss
properties.
Plastic Panels (GRP/ABS)
These are used for front and rear panels and,
in some cases for the roof.
208
Cleaning
Small scratches can be removed, consult
your dealer.
Acrylic (Plastic) Window Condensation
Unlike domestic double glazed windows,
your caravan windows are not vacuum sealed
instead the double panes of acrylic plastic with
are fitted with a breathable plug on the inner
pane.
It is possible, in weather where extremes
in temperatures occur between night and
day, that customer will notice condensation
CONDENSATION
roof vents are opened less so the moist air
cannot escape.
The condensation should clear itself when
the ambient conditions return to normal and
the air between the panes dries. However, if
this is taking a longer time than required, the
breathable plug (normally located in the top
corner of the window) can be removed, with
a pin or sharp object, and replaced when the
panes are dry. Care should be taken when
doing this.
Condensation will occur where warm moist air
is put into the atmosphere in areas such as in
bathrooms (during showering) and in kitchen
areas (during cooking).
Acrylic (Plastic) Window Cleaning
The material used to produce most caravan
and Motorhome windows is acrylic plastic.
While the acrylic used is very durable, it is
able to be scratched with relative ease and
therefore, care must be taken when cleaning
your vehicle with warm soapy water and not
to use aggressive clearing products. Equally,
care should be taken when using a drying
cloth that it is clean and free from grit.
Condensation
What is condensation
Condensation is the process of change of
water from its gaseous form (water vapour)
into liquid water when it comes into contact
with a surface that is cold. Condensation
generally occurs when warm air cools quickly
and looses its capacity to hold water vapour,
and as a result water vapour condenses to
form droplets.
Why condensation occurs
Where condensation occurs
In the enclosed space of a caravan, the moist
air from the kitchen or bathroom areas will
inevitably transfer to the rest of the vehicle,
which in turn condenses on cold surfaces
leading to visible water droplets. This issue
is compounded by warm moist air being
generated from normal breathing.
Condensation will also form in cold areas
where air movement and ventilation is
restricted (e.g. cupboards, wardrobes, under
beds, etc.)
What is important
It is important to provide ventilation and air
flow, so that warm moist air can escape, or
be externally cooled, and to use the heating
reasonably by not making the caravan too
warm such that people perspire, as this will
only serve to generate more moist air and
therefore more condensation.
However, in particularly cold periods,
where the external ambient temperatures
are low, condensation may still form on
external walls as the insulation levels may
well not be thermally able to cope with the
difference between the internal and external
temperatures.
Condensation occurs when warm moist
air meets a cold surface. The level of
condensation will depend upon humidity
levels, how moist the air is and how cold the
surfaces are they come into contact with.
How can you prevent
condensation
If the temperature falls below the dew
point temperature, it is quite normal for
condensation to occur on any material within
the caravan that is cold, for example the
external walls, plastic windows etc.
a. Good ventilation of the vehicle when
cooking or when drying clothes, footwear
or pets is essential. Observe when windows
begin to show signs of misting and increase
ventilation by opening slightly by 1cm or
opening a roof vent, as these will help, but
keep the habitation door closed as much as
possible to retain heat.
When condensation occurs
Condensation occurs usually in winter months,
because ambient temperatures are colder
(leading to cold surfaces) and windows and
MA INT E NA NCE
between the panes. The same phenomenon
may also occur when washing your vehicle on
a hot day.
Provide ventilation so that moist air can
escape.
209
MA INT E NA N CE
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR MAINTENANCE
b. If drying damp clothes or towels, open a
window to ventilate the area and allow the
moist air to escape.
c. T
ry to make sure that the caravan is partially
heated. It can take a long time for a cold
caravan to warm up, so it is better to have a
small amount of heat for a long period then
a lot of heat for a short time.
d. After showering, keep the bathroom window
or skylights open, and shut the bathroom
door long enough to dry off the room.
e. F
ixed ventilation is provided in the vehicle,
specifically through the floor, it is important
not to block these.
f.Electrical heating is dryer than gas heating,
and introduces less moisture into the
atmosphere. Do not use additional portable
paraffin or flue-less gas heaters at all.
g. If left unoccupied and unheated for long
periods of time the temperatures can soak
down thermally into the entire product and
become very cold. Whenever possible, put
the heating on at a low level before use by
pre heating in cold weather.
h. Even with reasonable ventilation it is likely
if the temperature is less than 5oC and
the humidity is high that condensation will
occur. Ideally the temperature should be
kept about 20oC when occupied.
Mould Growth
Any sign of mould growth is an indication of
the presence of moisture and if caused by
condensation gives warning that heating or
ventilation may require improving.
New vehicles
New products take a long time before they are
fully 'dried out' because of the moisture in the
materials used during manufacture. While this
is happening extra heat and ventilation will be
required.
Corrosion
Your caravan has been designed and built
using the corrosion resistant materials (e.g.
aluminium panels, stainless steel fixings, hot
dip galvanised chassis and powder coated
extrusions), which if looked after will extend
210
the life and aesthetics of the product in normal
service. In certain conditions, for example, if
sited for extended periods in close proximity
to sea and sand spray, you may experience
premature ageing and/or corrosion of the
vehicle than under normal conditions.
To help prevent this, we advise regular cleaning
and application of a good quality external car
polish. For extended periods (where the vehicle
is not in use), we recommend the use of well
fitted breathable vehicle cover as protection
from harsh coastal elements.
Changing Exterior Bulbs
ALWAYS REPLACE LIKE FOR LIKE.
For individual replacement bulb specification,
refer to your Service Handbook.
Bulb Replacement and Type
Full details of the bulbs used with your Swift
Group product can be found in your Technical
Handbook. Details of how to change the
various bulbs can be found within our Practical
Guides, located on Swift Talk (http://www.
swift-talk.co.uk/forum/topics/swift-grouppractical-manuals)/
Caravan interior
Follow these guidelines to ensure your
investment is receiving the very best attention.
Side Walls, Roof Lining
A simple wipe over with a damp cloth and a
very mild detergent is all that is needed.
Soft Furnishings
Should be vacuumed occasionally to
remove grit and sand and help to keep
its smart appearance and ensure long
life. The upholstery can be cleaned with
a mild, reputable upholstery cleaner. It is
recommended that the curtains and pelmets
are specialist cleaned only. The foam used
in cushions is manufactured to meet fire
regulations. It requires time to return to its
normal position after prolonged use.
SWIFT SHIELD FABRIC
The Swift Shield fabric fitted to some Swift
Group products is a luxury stain resistant
durable fabric using Aquaclean® technology.
This is a revolutionary fabric treatment that
allows you to clean stains using water only.
This provides you with simple fabric
maintenance in the minimum amount of time.
Cleaning Instructions
Aquaclean® helps to remove the majority of
household stains (wine, ink, sauce, fat, mud,
chocolate, cream, etc.) in three simple steps:
1. R
emove any excess residue
on the upholstery
Work Surfaces
You should not stand very hot items on any
of the work surfaces, especially models with
polycarbonate moulded sinks and drainers.
Kitchen Equipment
All the thermoplastic parts in these areas have
easy clean surfaces. To ensure long life and
to prevent damage you must not use any
cleaning materials at all and ensure water
temperatures do not exceed 70ºC (putting
cold water in first is suggested). After every
use it is essential that you rinse with clean
water only and wipe with a soft damp cloth.
Failure to follow these simple instructions may
result in premature failure or cracking which will
not be covered by any guarantees (including
extended warranties).
MA INT E NA NCE
Swift Shield Fabric
(model specific)
Bathroom/Shower
2. A
pply water over the stain,
either directly or using a
damp cloth. Wait a few
seconds.
3. Press down over the stain
with a damp cloth and rub
gently over the fabric in
circular movements.
If the stain does not come
off completely, repeat the
process as required.
For further details and stain cleaning demo
videos visit the Cleaning Gallery on the
Aquaclean® web site: http://www.aquaclean.
com/ES_en/home.
Aquaclean fabrics cannot accept any
responsibility for misuse of the fabric by
allowing bleach or dissolvent substances
coming into contact with it.
These products should be cleaned
immediately after use. Apply a warm, mild
soapy water solution with a soft cloth and
rinse with clean water immediately. Abrasive
materials must never be used. For stubborn
stains “Thetford Bathroom Cleaner” is
recommended as the use of other cleaners
may harm these products, cause premature
failure and will invalidate the warranty.
Thetford Bathroom Cleaner is available from
most caravan dealer shops.
Shower Bi-fold Door (When fitted)r
The door panels should be cleaned with warm
soapy water and a non-abrasive cloth/sponge.
Never us an abrasive or aggressive cleaning
agent as these may harm the product and
cause premature failure.
Vuplex®, a proprietary plastic cleaner, can also
be used. This can be obtained from outlets
such as Amazon, ebay etc.
211
MA INT E NA N CE
WINTERISATION
Furniture
A simple wipe over with a damp cloth should
be all that is required. Polishing with a
proprietary brand of wax polish enhances and
maintains furniture in showroom condition.
Winterisation
It must be remembered that because the
frames of the doors are made of ash, which
is a natural product, they can be affected by
temperature and humidity and may bow under
certain conditions. As conditions change they
should revert to their original positions.
Arrange (in advance) the yearly service and
habitation check, if the caravan's next service
is due while the vehicle is stored.
Kitchen Drainer and Cutting Board
You should not stand hot items on to the
removable plastic kitchen drainer. To wash use
only warm soapy water, do not use chemicals
and bleach.
Bulb Replacement and Type
Full details of the bulbs used with your Swift
Group product can be found in your Technical
Handbook. Details of how to change the
various bulbs can be found within our Practical
Guides, located on Swift Talk (http://www.
swift-talk.co.uk/forum/topics/swift-grouppractical-manuals)/
ALWAYS REPLACE LIKE FOR LIKE
Note: LED lights do not contain any serviceable parts and as such the LEDs cannot be
replaced alone.
The Swift Group recommends the following
winterisation points for customers:
Servicing
Electrical
If vehicle is being stored while connected to
230v Mains Hook-up:
• Ensure that the leisure battery is connected
and the 20A local fuse(s) is connected.
• The isolator switch on PSU should be in the
'ON' position, however. the control panel
should be switched 'OFF'.
• If Alde system is installed, there is a frost
protection setting, which can be used.
• Vehicles can be left in this condition
for extended periods, with the charger
operating to maintain the battery. However,
periodic maintenance and inspection is
recommended, this should include the
battery condition.
If vehicle is being stored not connected to
230v Mains Hook-up:
• Charge the leisure battery for 24 hours prior
to placing caravan in storage.
• Ensure the isolation button on PSU is in the
'OFF' position.
• Ensure leisure battery is connected and 20A
local fuse(s) is in place, if an alarm or tracker
device is fitted.
• The alarm will eventually drain the leisure
battery - we recommend regular (monthly)
inspection / re-charging of leisure battery
via appropriate means. A solar panel can be
used to provide an alternative power source
and extend the time between leisure battery
requiring a re-charge.
• Remove the leisure battery and store in a
dry place, if an alarm or tracker device is
not fitted.
212
WINTERISATION
Gas system
• Ensure the gas supply is isolated at the gas
bottle, and ensure that the gas manifold taps
are off.
• Check the age and condition of the high
pressure gas hose and regulator, and replace
if required.
Appliances
• Check the battery expiry date on the smoke
alarm and replace or remove as required.
• Ensure the fridge is turned off.
• Clean the inside of the fridge.
•Prop the fridge door open, and if possible,
the internal freezer compartment door for
ventilation.
• Fit fridge vent winter covers (if available).
• Ensure all hob / oven / microwave surfaces
are clean.
• If the caravan is going to be left connected
to 230v supply while not in use, ensure the
microwave is unplugged.
• Drain the toilet reservoir.
• Empty the toilet cassette.
• Drain the toilet reservoir.
• Empty the toilet cassette - The Thetford
Cassette porta potti is easily winterised for
storage.
Empty the fresh water tank using the drain
tube / fresh water tank level indicator (level
indicator on electronic models only).
Pull the lever indicator / drain tube down
from top plug position and outward through
door opening to drain water from the tank.
water funnel. (Not C-200 toilet).
Do not tighten caps, this helps in keeping
unit dry. The pour out spout and vent plug
can be removed. Seals should be greased if
necessary with acid-free Vaseline.
Exterior (Body / Chassis)
MA INT E NA NCE
•The battery should not be adversely affected
by winter temperatures but the level of
charge should be maintained to maximise
the life span of the battery. This can be
achieved using an automotive type battery
charger as and when required.
• Ensure that all windows, skylights and
access doors are closed and secured.
• Ensure all fixed ventilation points (high and
low) are clear from debris and obstructions.
It is advised that fixed ventilation points
are checked and cleaned (if necessary) on
a regular basis using a small brush and a
domestic vacuum cleaner
• Ensure the vehicle is not parked where falling
debris (i.e. leaves, tree sap) could cause
damage.
• Avoid leaving the vehicle parked in soft
ground, long grass or a potential area where
standing water may form.
• Lubricate relevant points on the chassis.
• Remove road wheels, using the correct
jacking points and suitable axle stands, or
if being left on road wheels rotate wheels
(every two weeks) and ensure the correct
tyre pressures are maintained.
• A purpose made cover maybe used, but
please ensure the cover is a good fit,
breathable and securely fitted.
Note: A poorly fitted cover can rub and
damage the bodywork. Non-breathable
covers will encourage mould to grow and
if fitted prevent the operation of a roof
mounted solar panel (model specific)
Interior (Furniture / furnishings)
• Open all lockers and internal doors, to
ensure good circulation.
• Remove cushions and store them in a dry
location or ensure all cushions are placed in
a well ventilated area.
Empty the water fill funnel by pulling the
bottle away from tank.
• Close all blinds and curtains. Customers are
reminded to check the tension on blinds after
storage if left closed for long periods.
Remove the small water cap on the filler
bottom, allowing water to drain from the
• Thoroughly ventilate the caravan by opening
doors or windows periodically.
213
MA INT E NA N CE
WINTERISATION
• Placing water absorbent crystals in the van
during the winter months, will help reduce
moisture levels and mould growth.
Water system
After a short while the majority of water will
have left the plumbing system. At this point
however it is still important to ensure that the
pump itself is 'dry'. During this part of the
winterisation, a suitable absorbent cloth or
container should be used to catch a small
amount of spilled water that will result.
Water expands as it is frozen, and so trapped
water, when it expands, can damage the tap
/ valve /pump or pipe it is trapped within. For
this reason, (in addition to reasons of hygiene),
the water system should be fully drained when
not in use, particularly in colder weather.
The pump should be disconnected on the
output side of the pump, and run for a short
while to expel any water contained within the
pump body and filter. This is also a good time
to disassemble and clean (if necessary) the
filter fitted on the input side of the pump.
Follow the basic steps outlined below
to remove water from the system
(current caravans):
The easiest method of disconnecting the
pump is to remove the quick-release tabs from
the Posi-flo type pump (details of releasing
push fit plumbing connections can be found in
this handbook).
• We do not recommend leaving portable
heaters in the van unattended.
• Disconnect any external water source,
external submersible hose or pump.
• Locate the 'Yellow' drain valve, which is floor
mounted and will be next to the water heater.
Move the lever on this valve to
the vertical.
• If a water tank is fitted, open the tank drain
valve located on the floor, next to the heater
drain valve as above.
• Open one of the taps (the kitchen tap is the
most convenient) to the middle (hot and cold
mix) position.
• Turn on the pump using the button on the
control panel, and leave the pump running
until water no longer flows from the tap.
• Open the vanity tap and shower tap mixer,
again to the centre hot and cold position
and leave them open whilst the caravan is
out of use.
• Also remove the shower head, and leave the
head in an upright position.
• If present connect the external shower
handset and fully open to drain, disconnect
and store.
214
Quick release tabs
Water filter
AL-KO CHASSIS
Hot dip galvanising has been used for many
years throughout the automotive industry and
is widely regarded as one of the best forms of
corrosion protection.
When the steel is withdrawn from the
galvanising bath it has a clean, bright surface.
Over a period of time this changes to a dull
grey colour as the surface zinc reacts with
oxygen, water and carbon dioxide in the
atmosphere to form a tough, stable, protective
layer.
During this time, if galvanised items are
stored in damp or wet conditions, where
there is little or no air movement then the zinc
will continue to react with the moisture that
is present. In so doing the zinc will produce
excessive amounts of zinc hydroxide. This is
seen as a bulky white deposit on the surface
of the galvanising and is often referred to as
wet storage stain(white rust).
You can help to prevent wet storage stain
(white rust) occurring. You can do this by
washing the chassis with clean water. You
must then allow an adequate flow of dry air to
ensure that they dry off completely.
The caravan should not be parked on long
grass where the air flow around the chassis
is hindered and the dampness retained. It is
most likely that the chassis will rapidly show
signs of wet storage stain under
these conditions.
It is also very important to do this during the
winter months to ensure all salt deposits from
road spray are completely rinsed off.
AL-KO chassis
Manufactured from high quality steel, the
chassis has extra deep sections to provide
strength at points of maximum stress.
Large elongated holes are punched in the
longitudinal chassis members, to reduce
weight to a minimum. Each hole incorporates a
return flange to maintain the required strength
and provide rigidity in the extra deep sections.
MA INT E NA NCE
Galvanised Parts
Wet storage stain (white rust)
The chassis frame is of a bolted construction
which allows replacement of individual parts
should the need arise.
The chassis is Hot Dipped Galvanised. This is
regarded as one of the best forms of corrosion
protection. It does however require minimal
maintenance in certain circumstances and
should, if properly maintained, last the lifetime
of the vehicle.
When new, the chassis is of a bright and
shiny appearance. As the galvanising cures
during the initial 2/3 month period, this will
gradually change to a medium/dark grey
colour. This grey finish is the ideal, giving the
correct protective coating. During this curing
period the surface should be protected to
avoid possible wet storage stain, in the form
of a soft, light coloured, porous, oxidation
layer. If the chassis members are in contact
with any salt deposits from roads this
should immediately be washed off with a
high pressure washer. Salt attracts moisture
allowing the surfaces to remain wet, this
prevents curing and also allows formation of
wet storage stain.
It is recommended that the chassis/
components are washed off, using a pressure
washer on an annual basis (especially after
winter usage), to avoid undesirable build up of
salt and dirt deposits.
The galvanised chassis should not be painted
or subjected to any other protective treatment.
Should the galvanising become superficially
damaged exposing the steel core, this
should be cleaned and treated with a Cold
Galvanising Spray obtainable from vehicle
accessory outlets.
215
MA INT E NA N CE
AL-KO ATC CONTROL SYSTEM
Display
Colour
ATC
Diagnosis
Condition
Green
ATC Active
Everything
Ok
Green
Flashing
ATC Active
Red
ATC
Inactive
Red flashing
LED not
working
216
ATC has
detected a
fault.
ATC has no
power
What to do Outcome
Status
Self test
incomplete
Drive forward
to detect
movement
to complete
self test and
recheck LED.
Green
(Constant)
Ready for
journey
Possible to
continue
journey
Remove
13 Pin plug
and wait 5
seconds.
Reconnect
plug.
Green
Ready for
journey
Red
ATC Error
logfile memory
exceeded.
Caravan can be
towed, but ATC
will not apply
caravan brakes
in the event of
instability.
See below *
Do not
continue
a fault
with ATC
connected
Remove
13 Pin plug
and wait 5
seconds.
Reconnect
the plug
Green
Ready for
journey
Red
(flashing)
ATC faulty,
and cannot be
driven. Remove
push-rod as
shown on page
217 . Consult
AL-KO, see back
page for details.
Check push
rod position
as shown
on page 5
of the ALKO
ATC manual
before
continuing
journey.
Remove
13 Pin plug
and wait 5
seconds.
Reconnect
the plug.
Check for
constant
live - refer
to system
requirements.
Green
Ready for
journey
LED not
working
If power ok,
check push rod
position: Red
line visible - do
not drive vehicle.
Red line not
visible - possible
to continue
journey but
consult AL-KO
see back page
for details.
AL-KO ATC CONTROL SYSTEM
Drilling or Welding of Parts or Accessories
The chassis is designed and built to precise
tolerances and must not be drilled or welded
(except in accordance with certain AL-KO
Accessory Operating Instructions). Failure to
comply will invalidate all warranties.
AL-KO ATC trailer control system
(where fitted)
AL-KO ATC is an electronic, emergency
Control system for caravans and trailers. It
automatically recognises critical swinging
motions and applies the caravan brakes
accordingly to regain control of the caravan
and car.
General notices
Read and act in accordance with the following
operating instructions before attempting to use
AL-KO ATC. AL-KO ATC is a safety related
product and,therefore, should only be fitted
by an authorised AL-KO trained technician
with experience of working with electrical
installations. Any evidence of removal or
disassembly, other than by trained technicians,
will immediately invalidate the product
warranty.
Safety Information
AL-KO ATC is a passive safety product that
activates the braking system on the caravan
in unsafe driving conditions. The driver has
a responsibility under law to ensure that
the elements of towing safety are met,
including driving within the legal speed limit,
consideration of road, weather and other traffic
conditions, correct loading and coupling of the
caravan.
AL-KO ATC is designed to fit only on AL-KO
Chassis and is not suitable for non AL-KO
Chassis. AL-KO ATC only functions on
caravans with a rigid towbar. The electrical
connection between the towing vehicle and
caravan must be in good working order.
ATC draws power from the towing vehicle
towbar and requires connection to either: Twin
* ATC stores operating errors in a logfile which
over time will become full and will result in the
solid red light appearing. This needs to be
erased and can be done easily by connecting
the caravan to a 12 volt supply for a period of
12 hours. The power required to carry out this
function is minimal. Most occurrences of these
errors are due to power supply problems to
ATC which could be due to low voltage, or an
intermittent power supply from the towbar.
MA INT E NA NCE
Damage to chassis members through impact
etc, MUST NOT be straightened or welded.
Damaged chassis members MUST be
replaced.
Maintenance and Warranty
ATC is maintenance free and requires no
servicing. In case of any damage to ATC,
please contact AL-KO. ATC is a sealed unit
and any evidence of removal of ATC or the
component parts including outer casing and
fixings will immediately invalidate any product
warranty.
If ATC is fitted as standard by the vehicle
manufacturer then ATC is covered for the
same duration of the vehicle warranty or
whichever is longer.
If ATC is subject to a call out under warranty
and found to comply with the relevant
specification or standard, then the cost of
any testing or callout charges will be borne
by the customer. We reserve the right to
request credit card details to cover payment in
advance.
Removal of a push rod
Using a 17mm spanner, slacken locking nut on
push rod away from Bowden cable abutment
as directed above.
217
MA INT E NA N CE
AL-KO ATC CONTROL SYSTEM
The AL-KO formula optimum safety
The AL-KO formula for optimum safety is a
combination of industry leading technology
that ensures the safest possible driving
conditions for caravan owners. The formula
provides total confidence and control when
towing a caravan.
Unscrew push rod from brake rod and slide it
from the guide tube. Remove the locking nut
from push rod using two 17mm spanners.
Re-apply the removed locking nut onto brake
rod thread to secure ball nut as shown above.
ATC is now deactivated.
218
AL-KO ATC CONTROL SYSTEM
ATC can be connected via the auxiliary 12S
(white/grey) plug and requires power on
Pins 4 (permanent supply) and 3 (earth).
Please ensure that your vehicle towbar is
correctly connected to ensure correct ATC
operation. This can be checked with the use
of a multimeter. Important - A 20 amp fuse is
required for the constant 12V supply to Pin 4
on the 12S socket. If only a single fuse is fitted
to supply both Pins 4 and Pin 6, the power
supply capability of the installation must be
checked and a minimum fuse rating of 25
Amps must be used.
caravan lighting is fully operational and check
the vehicle is loaded appropriately, the nose
weight and tyre pressures are correct, and
confirm that the caravan is coupled to the
vehicle with the breakaway cable correctly
applied. Always re-check the ATC LED is
green after any interval during a journey, such
as a service station break.
MA INT E NA NCE
7-Pin Connection
13 Pin Connection
ATC can be connected via the 13-Pin plug and
requires power on Pins 9 (permanent supply)
and 13 (earth). Please ensure that your vehicle
towbar is correctly connected to ensure
correct ATC operation. This can be checked
with the use of a multimeter.
Troubleshooting
Should you experience a fault with ATC, the
LED light on the fairing will change colour.
Therefore, refer to the table on page 216 and
follow the instructions. If no illumination of the
LED is evident, refer to system requirements
on page 219 and check towbar wiring for
permanent supply.
Operating instructions
After coupling the caravan correctly to the
towing vehicle, connect the 12N & 12S plugs
or the 13 Pin plug to the towbar.
Upon connection, ATC will carry out an initial
self test and the LED light on the front fairing
will light up RED. During the self test, the
sound of the push rod moving inside ATC can
be heard. When the self test is complete, the
LED will turn GREEN or flashing GREEN to
signal that ATC is active. If the LED does not
change to green, then ATC is not functioning
correctly. The table provided on page 216
details what to do in this case. Prior to
commencing any journey, ensure that the
In the unlikely event that you receive a red
flashing LED light and disconnecting and
re-connecting the power does not alleviate
the problem, check the push rod position as
detailed below. Locate ATC on the axle and
check the position of the push rod. If no red
line is visible, ATC is not active, and can be
driven. However, we recommend that you
contact AL-KO at the earliest convenience.
If the red line is visible on the push rod, as
shown on the left, the caravan should not be
moved. The push rod needs to be removed to
deactivate ATC. Using two 17mm spanners,
the removal process is as shown opposite.
219
MA INT E NA N CE
LOADINGS
Loadings on Coupling Heads, Overrun
Assemblies and Axles
The permitted ‘nose’ weights of the coupling
head/stabiliser, overrun assembly and
drawbars, must never exceed the lowest value
stamped on the assemblies.
Loading
Loads to be carried in the caravan should be
placed directly over, or as close as possible
to the axles, otherwise the handling will be
impaired. Maximum gross weight, as advised
by the caravan manufacturer, must not be
exceeded without approval from AL-KO.
Maximum loading is defined as the difference
between ex-works weight and the permitted
total weight.
Load Too Far Forward (Fig 2)
Steering and braking ability reduced. Increased
loading on the rear axle and chassis of the
tow vehicle.
Fig. 1
The maximum axle loading is that stamped on
the plate (Fig. 1 example axle plate) located in
the centre of the axle, facing rearwards.
Note: Do not attempt to remove as this will
void the plate.
The third line down marked “Capacity” is the
maximum permitted axle loading and must not
be exceeded.
The caravan manufacturer may have stated a
lower maximum loading weight on the plate
fitted adjacent to the entrance door, this then
becomes the maximum permitted load and
must not be exceeded. We recommend you
record the Axle details for future reference.
It may be possible if required for the caravans
MTPLM to be upgraded.
Your caravan dealer will require the following
details from the axle plate.
(Example of information ref Fig 1)
Fig. 2
Load Too Far Back (Fig. 3)
High skid risk together with poor braking
effect.
Fig. 3
Load Over Axle (Fig 4)
Optimum road holding together with maximum
braking effect. Exceptionally heavy loads
should be placed directly over the axle.
Attention should be paid to the legal
regulations regarding the permitted pressure
exerted by the towbar on the towed unit.
• Order - CHA402248
• Qty – 1 of 2
• Date - 3 May 05
• Type - B850-10
• Capacity - 1000E
Please consult your Swift Group Dealer to
confirm if this is possible.
220
Fig. 4
AXLE
Safety Precautions
No welding is permitted on AL-KO Axles
It is important that the wheel and hub /
brake drum are compatible. This mean that
the PCD, wheelbolts and inset must all be
compatible with both the hub/brake drum
and the wheel rim.
Note: The hub bearing is not protected
against water ingress. Check wheel brake
linings for wear every 10,000 kilometers
(6200 miles) or every 12 months via the
inspection hole
MA INT E NA NCE
Axle types
Particular attention must be paid to the
recommended torque figures for the
wheelbolts (see pg 33).
The axle type details shown on axle type
plates must not be obscured or made illegible
by application of any additional surface finish.
Operating Instructions
Service Brake
When the towing vehicle is braking or travelling
down hill, the overrun device shaft is pushed
in (dependent on the magnitude of the thrust
on the shaft) and presses on the overrun lever.
This acts on the bowden cables and expander
mechanism, which in turn expands the brake
shoes applying the wheel brakes.
Hand brake
With the gas strut version, pull the handbrake
lever until upright. With the spring cylinder
version, pull the handbrake lever right up to the
last tooth. The caravan is then braked.
! WARNING: Please note that with the
handbrake fully applied, the caravan/trailer is
able to move backwards by 25 cms until the
spring cylinder/gas spring takes effect.
Maintenance and Cleaning
Maintenance of Euro-Plus/Euro-Compact and
Euro-Delta.
The above semi-trailing axles come fitted with
maintenance free wheel bearings (greased and
sealed for life) and no adjustment is necessary.
Fig. 5
(Fig. 5/Item 1). Adjust if necessary. Where
continuous travel in hilly regions or high
mileage is experienced, earlier inspection and
adjustment may be necessary.
Note: The flanged hub-nut, located under
the dust cap, used to keep the brake drum
in situ, is a ONE-SHOT NUT (ie. must
only be used once). If removed it must be
replaced with a NEW flanged nut - torqued
to 290 ± 10 Nm (214 +/- 1 7.5 lbs/ft). A
small amount of special mineral grease,
available from AL-KO must be applied to
stub axle thread prior to fitting the new
flanged nut. After fitting excess grease must
be removed with white spirit.
The rear hexagon cap head bolt located
under the black plastic cap MUST NOT BE
DISTURBED under any circumstance. Interference with this nut will result in immediate
tyre wear and damage to the braking system and WILL INVALIDATE ALL WARRANTIES. Should the rear nut accidentally be
disturbed then the complete axle must be
returned to AL-KO for resetting of the toe-in
and camber.
221
MA INT E NA N CE
AXLE
No attempt should be made to remove
the bearing. In the event of damage to the
bearing or drum, only the drum complete
with bearing and circlip will be available as
a spare. No grease is used in the hub other
than the mineral grease on the stub axle.
No grease should be placed in the DUST
cap. This is not a grease cap as used in all
previous hubs
Figs. 7, 8 & 9 show the deformation of the
rubber elements at the extremes of
suspension movement.
The axle is designed to ride with the
suspension drop arm at, or slightly below,
the horizontal position.
For Trouble Shooting & Fault Finding please
see Table 1 on page 238.
Spare parts
Spare parts are safety critical parts! For
this reason when fitting spare parts we
recommend the use of original AL-KO
parts or those parts that they have explicitly
approved. The reliability, safety and suitability
of parts designed especially for their products,
has been determined using a special test
procedure. In spite of constantly monitoring
the market they are unable to assess or vouch
for other products.
Fig. 7
Fig. 8
If repair work or servicing is required, AL-KO
have a large network of AL-KO service stations
throughout Europe.
To establish the correct spare parts required
for your axle you should always quote the axle
type (axle identification plate Fig. 1, page 220)
and Spare Part Identification no. (ETI No.),
which will be stamped onto the wheel brake
or on the identification plate (Fig. 6). Please
establish these numbers before contacting
AL-KO or a Service Agent.
Fig. 6
The AL-KO rubber suspension axle has been
designed and developed to suit all types of
road conditions and is maintenance free.
Three rubber elements are contained within
an hexagonal axle tube. These provide
suspension and have inherent damping
characteristics.
222
Fig. 9
AL-KO braking system adjustment
1. Ensure the towing shaft with coupling head
is pulled FULLY FORWARD. (Fig. 10).
2. Release the handbrake to the FULLY OFF
position. If the handbrake will not go down
the whole way because of the fairing or any
other obstruction; then the fairing must be
cut away and/or the obstruction removed
to achieve this desired position. It will not
be possible to set up the braking system
properly when the handbrake is not in the
FULLY OFF position. (Fig. 10).
3. Jack up one side of the caravan, using the
AL-KO Side Lift Jack System. (see Jack
Operating Instructions).
4. Remove the inner plastic bung from the
backplate to expose the “starwheel”
adjuster access. (Figs. 10 & 11).
AL-KO ATC BREAKING SYSTEM
reducing the effective clearance of the
brake shoes. If the overrun lever will not
make contact, it is possible the two lock
nuts, forward of the spring cylinder, are
incorrectly adjusted. Loosen the nuts and
adjust brake rod as above (Figs. 10 & 12).
6. Slacken off the starwheel adjuster until the
road wheel turns freely in the FORWARD
direction. (Fig. 11).
13. OVER ADJUSTMENT of either the wheel
brakes or linkages, will result in difficult
reversing causing the wheels to “lock-up”.
7. Check the adjustment at the end of the
brake cable where it is secured to the
abutment (bracket), welded to the centre of
the axle.
14. When parking, the handbrake lever MUST
ALWAYS be engaged into the fully upright
position (90°). If difficulty is experienced
in this operation, try easing the caravan
backwards with one hand while engaging
the handbrake fully with the other. This
manoeuvre should not be attempted on
a rearwards facing slope. In this case
wheel chocks should be used combined
with the handbrake. See page 221 for all
handbrake operations.
W
hen the inner cable is pulled out it should
extend between 5 and 8 mm. (Fig.12). (On
tandem axles a double abutment (bracket)
is fitted to the front axle ONLY).
8. Repeat for other wheel or wheels.
9. On tandem axles the brake cables from
the rear axle should pass over this axle
and cross over each other, before being
connected to the abutment (bracket) on the
front axle. Where ATC is fitted to a tandem
axle caravan, the brake cables SHOULD
NOT be crossed over.
10. E
nsure the balance bar (compensator)
is being pulled evenly (Figs.10 & 12).
Excessive movement to this bar (double
on tandem axles) would indicate possible
incorrect adjustment (if appropriate, repeat
step No. 7 - Fig. 12).
MA INT E NA NCE
5. ALWAYS rotating the road wheel in the
forward direction - NEVER backwards;
adjust the starwheel with a suitable
screwdriver, in the direction of the arrow
embossed on the backplate until there is
resistance in the wheel rotation. (Fig. 11).
15. Finally, if the road wheels have been
removed, re-tighten using a calibrated
Torque Wrench (see Changing a wheel).
Remember to over-tighten is just as
dangerous as to under-tighten, as this can
distort the wheel rims. Avoid the use of
power wrenches.
! WARNING: The torque settings should
be rechecked regularly. Wheel bolts should
NEVER be lubricated.
11. C
heck the brake rod support bracket,
(fixed to the floor) IS supporting the brake
rod evenly. The brake rod MUST ALWAYS
run straight, NEVER bent or curved under
any fittings. On tandem axles, using the
double balance bar, a brake rod support
tube ( ALKO Part No. 228827) MUST
ALWAYS be fitted on the end of the brake
rod, passing through the centre aperture
on the abutment.
12. R
emove the slack in the brake rod by
adjusting the long ball nut, rear of the
balance bar, ensuring the overrun lever
makes contact with the end of the towing
shaft. Note! Over adjustment to the long
ball nut (Fig. 12/Item 2) could induce
movement of the inner brake cable,
223
MA INT E NA N CE
AL-KO BREAKING SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
Figure 10 Brake Linkage
Figure 11 Adjusting the Starwheel
Figure 12A Standard Brake Linkage
Figure 12B Brake Linkage with ATC Fitted
224
AL-KO ATC BREAKING SYSTEM
AK160 Coupling
Your caravan will be fitted with either an AKS
3004 stabiliser or an AK160/300 coupling
head.
Operating Instructions
Coupling Up
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Always ensure that the coupling head is
properly connected to the tow vehicle’s towball
every time you couple up. If this procedure is
not carried out correctly, the caravan/ trailer
may become detached from the towing
vehicle! Maximum possible articulation of the
coupling head must not exceed ±25° vertically
and ±20° horizontally - see Fig 13.
If exceeded, components will be overloaded
and the operation of the assembly adversely
affected!
MA INT E NA NCE
Stabilisers and coupling devices
Open coupling handle. To do this pull the
coupling handle up (Fig 14) in the direction of
the arrow.
The coupling mechanism has a fixed open
position, ie. as long as the coupling head is
not placed on the ball the coupling will remain
open.
Put the open coupling onto the towball. The
coupling handle automatically and audibly
clicks into position. In the interests of safety,
press the handle down by hand (Fig 14).
The coupling head is correctly connected
when the green cylinder part of the safety
indicator is visible (when viewed from the side Fig 14/ Item 2).
The coupling mechanism is correctly engaged
when the coupling handle can no longer be
pressed down any further (by hand).
Figure 13 - M
aximum Articulation of
Coupling Head
Figure 14 - Coupling Up
Caution
If the coupling head is not correctly hitched
onto the towball, then the caravan/trailer can
become disconnected from the towing vehicle.
225
MA INT E NA N CE
AK160 COUPLING
Uncoupling
AKS 3004 Stabiliser
Open the coupling handle and lift the coupling
head from the towball by using the jockey
wheel winding handle.
Regulations
Wear indicator
A wear indicator on the coupling head (Fig 15)
shows whether the wear limit of the towing
vehicle’s towball or the trailer coupling has
been reached. For this purpose, hitch up the
trailer to the towball and drive the unit for
approx. 500 m. This will set the coupling head
adjustment. Following this, check the wear
indicator as follows:
If the green indicator is visible on the coupling
(with the coupling engaged Fig 15), the
coupling head is in good condition or the wear
on the towball is within permissible limits. .
Green
1. The AKS 3004 stabiliser must be used in
conjunction with 50mm dia. Towballs which
conform to EC Directive 94/20 (DIN 74058
or local equivalent).
2. Suitable for attachment to drawbars or
approved overrun braking equipment for
single (and tandem axle) caravan/trailers,
with a minimum weight of 200kg and a
maximum permissible weight of 3000kg.
3. EC design approval has been given to the
AL-KO AKS 3004 coupling under permit
No. e1*94/20*0930*00.
Red
Figure 15 - Wear Indicator
When the green indicator on the coupling
handle is completely covered over and only
the red portion is visible (Fig 15), this could be
caused by the following:
• Towball has reached the lowest wear limit of
49.61mm dia.
• Both coupling head and towball are showing
signs of wear.
• Towball is in good condition with 50mm
dia, but the coupling head is showing an
excessive level of wear.
Caution
Under these circumstances, the coupling head
can become detached from the towball and
the caravan/trailer can break away from the
tow vehicle. The coupling head and towball
must therefore be checked IMMEDIATELY
before future use. Any faulty parts must be
changed IMMEDIATELY.
226
All maintenance work should be carried out by
AL-KO Approved Workshops.
Figure 1 - Necessary clearances
AKS 3004 STABILISER
1. The trailer coupling may only be connected
to towing vehicles where the clearances
for the stabiliser can be observed, in
accordance with EC Directive 94/20 or
UNECE R55 (DIN74058). If these clearances
are infringed by special attachments, then
the use must be checked separately.
7. The AKS 3004 should only be operated by
one person, when opening or closing the
handle, to reduce injury risks.
25°
MA INT E NA NCE
Restrictions of use
The area above the towball of the vehicle
must be free from vehicle components
or attachments (A) (e.g. spare wheels,
platforms etc.)
The clearance for the stabiliser lever
must be at least 330mm (B) + the
stroke movement (D) (85mm-100mm),
which equates to 440mm when used in
conjunction with an AL-KO overrun.
Min.
60mm
2. Swan Neck towbars (fixed or detachable)
are suitable for use with the AKS 3004
providing they comply to EC Directive 94/20
or UNECE R55 and have the required
minimum 60mm clearance, measured from
the centre of the towball (Fig 2).
Safety warnings
1. In accordance with EC Directive 94/20,
couplings of type A 50-1 cannot be used
(see Fig 3), your warranty will be invalid if
this type of towball is used.
Figure 2 - Max suitable rotation of overrun
device is 25°.
2. For UK use, use the extended neck towball
(type A50-X).
3. A bolted-in type ball coupling (Fig 4) is only
permissible if the thread is locked or welded.
4. The AKS 3004 cannot be used with a
laterally attached reversing lever, on the left
side, when facing the direction of traffic.
5. The towball must be free from grease, paint
and other residue, otherwise the stabilising
effect is greatly reduced. Coated towballs
must have the coating completely removed
(use 100 or 120 grain emery paper). If this is
not done increased towball wear will occur
and may cause damage, or reduce the
efficiency of the stabiliser.
Figure 3 - A 50-1 coupling
Figure 4 - Bolted in coupling
6. If friction pads become contaminated with
grease, they should be replaced.
227
MA INT E NA N CE
AKS 3004 STABILISER
AKS 3004 operating instructions
AKS 3004 specifications
Coupling Handle (Fig 7/Item 1)
Stabiliser Lever (Fig 7/Item 2)
Preparation for
coupling/uncoupling
The Stabiliser lever (Fig 7/Item 2) must be in
the uppermost position (open).
Coupling up
Note: The friction pads (Fig 10/Items 1, 2
& 3) are pressed against the towball and
hence generate a stabilising/damping force.
These pads are therefore subject to wear
over time, however they will have a long
service life (circa.30,000 miles), provided
they are well maintained and kept free of
grease/dirt.
Operating instructions
AL-KO
! WARNING: The coupling is correctly
engaged when the green edge of the safety
indicator button is visible (Fig 9/Item 2).

Pull the coupling handle (Fig 8/Item 1) up in the
direction of arrow. The coupling mechanism
has an open position, as long as the AKS
3004 is not placed on the ball, the handle will
remain open. Put the opened coupling onto
the clean towball. The handle must now make
an audible click and return to the flat position.

Secure Jockey Wheel for transit:
After coupling fully retract the jockey wheel
inner tube so that it locks against the jockey
wheel outer tube.
Slacken the jockey wheel clamp handle and
raise the complete assembly to its highest
position with the wheel facing backwards
within the hitch cover ensuring that it doesn't
come into contact with the brake rod
assembly. Fully tighten the jockey wheel clamp
handle to ensure the jockey wheel is firmly held
in position.
Figure 6 - AKS 3004 stabiliser
2
1
Stabiliser unit
To operate the stabiliser (once coupled to the
towball), simply press the stabiliser lever down
as far as it will go (Fig 9/Item 3).
To ensure the stabiliser is correctly coupled,
check the arrowhead lines up with the black
line marked 2 (Fig 9 /Item 4 and Fig 13/C).
Uncoupling
Pull the stabiliser lever up as far as it will go,
open the coupling handle and lift the AKS
3004 from the towball by using the jockey
wheel winding handle.
228
Figure 7 - Raise stabiliser lever
AKS 3004 STABILISER
For easier manoeuvring (on campsites etc),
pull the stabiliser lever to the ‘up’ position.
1
Please do not use the stabiliser lever as a
manoeuvring handle. Please use the handles
on the caravan or fit the AL-KO manoeuvring
handle to your jockey wheel (available
separately).
MA INT E NA NCE
Manoeuvring
1. During opening or closing, the AKS must
only be operated by one person.
2. Press stabiliser lever down by hand force
only. DO NOT use your foot or an extension
bar, this will damage the components.
Figure 8 - Pull coupling handle up
3. When opening or closing the stabiliser lever,
please ensure your hand does not touch the
coupling handle - you may accidentally trap
your fingers.
3
2 4

Figure 9 - Correct engagement with towball
AL-KO
1

Figure 11 - How not to operate the stabiliser
handle
3
2
Figure 10 - AKS 3004 friction pads
229
MA INT E NA N CE
AKS 3004 STABILISER
Noises whilst driving
As a rule, the friction pads of the AKS 3004 do
not make a noise during driving. Any clicking,
creaking or squeaking noises that do arise
may be due to the following:
a. F
oreign bodies, dirt or exhaust particle build
up between the friction pad and towball.
b. Dry operation of the drawshaft inside the
overrun device.
c. A
detachable towball which has too much
play in the locking mechanism.
Remedial action
a. C
lean the towball and friction pads before
each journey by lightly rubbing the surfaces
with a light emery paper (100-120 grit)
or use brake cleaning fluid to remove the
build up.
Checking the efficiency of the side
friction pads
1. Check that the stabiliser is correctly coupled
by ensuring the coupling handle is fully
down and the red indicator button is in the
raised position.
2. Push the stabiliser lever (Fig 13 - Item 1)
down until resistance is felt (i.e. The friction
pads are in contact with the ball but not yet
under pressure).
3. Check the position of the arrowhead on the
arm of the stabiliser. If it lines up with the
two green lines then the friction pads are still
as new (Fig 13 - A).
4. If the arrowhead lines up with the two red
lines then the friction pads are worn and
should be replaced immediately (Fig 13 - B).
1
b. Lubricate the drawshaft sleeve via the
grease nipples. In addition, push the gaiter
forward and grease (DIN 51 825 KTA 3K)
the exposed part of the shaft (Fig 12).
c. V
isit a specialist workshop to have the
ball holding area checked for damage
and the locking mechanism for function. If
necessary, change the towball.
A
B
C
2
2
2
1
1
1

1

1

1
Figure 13 - Checking left / right friction pads
Note: When the stabiliser lever is correctly
applied, the arrowhead should line up with
the black line marked 2 (Fig 13 - C).
Figure 12 - Remedial action
230
Note: The friction pads do not require any
form of lubrication and should be cleaned
with a fine emery paper prior to every
journey. It is not necessary to adjust the
friction pads.
AKS 3004 STABILISER
c. Towball is in a new condition (50mm) but
the front/ rear friction pads show a high
degree of wear.
(Replace one at a time)
1. Uncouple the AKS 3004 stabiliser.
2. Remove protective caps (see Fig 14- Item 1)
with the aid of a small screwdriver.
3. Press worn out pad inwards and remove
(use punch and hammer) (see Fig 14- Item
2).
4. Insert new friction pad from below (after
first re-inserting shim washers if they were
present) and press in as far as it will go (see
Fig 14 - Item 3 and Fig 15).
Establish the diameter of the towball so that
conclusions may be drawn as to the wear of
the friction pads (ball diameter must not be
less than 49.61mm).
MA INT E NA NCE
Friction pad replacement (side)
Friction pad replacement (front/rear)
1. Uncouple the AKS 3004 stabiliser.
2. Remove the soft dock (pull up & off),
(Fig 20 - Item 1).
3. Press the safety indicator outwards and
secure with SW14 hex. spanner (not
included), (Fig 20 - Item 2).
4. Remove cheese-head screw (Fig 20 - Item
3 & Fig 18), using special torx tool.
5. Press friction lining recess (Fig 20 - Item 19)
inwards and pull down and out.
2
3
1
Figure 14 - Remove worn pads
6. Open coupling handle (Fig 20 - Item 5).
7. Remove countersunk head cap screw using
special torx tool (Fig 20 - Item 6 & Fig 19).
8. Press friction pad inwards with a
screwdriver and remove.
9. Fit new friction pads in reverse. Tighten
screws to 5Nm (Fig 20 Items 3&6)
10. Replace rubber soft dock, insert top
section then bottom.
Figure 15 - Insert new pads
Checking the efficiency of the
front/rear friction pads
2
1. Couple the AKS 3004 stabiliser to the
towball but do not activate the stabiliser.
2. If a green indicator is visible (on the handle),
then the AKS 3004 is in a new condition
or the pads and towball are within the
permissible limits (Fig 16 - Item 2).
Figure 16- Wear indicator - good condition
3. If only a red indicator is visible (Fig 17 - Item
3), then this may have the following causes:
a. A
KS 3004 is okay but the towball has
reached the lowest limit of 49.61mm.
b. AKS 3004 stabiliser shows signs of wear.
231
MA INT E NA N CE
AKS 3004 STABILISER
5
3
1
2
Figure 17 ~Wear indicator - poor condition
3
4
6
Figure 20 Friction pad revealed
Important maintenance & cleaning advice
Figure 18 Cheese head screw revealed
1. The towball should be cleaned regularly to
remove grease or other residue, to maintain
the efficiency of the friction pads. The use
of thinners, white spirit or brake cleaner is
recommended for cleaning the towball and
friction pads.
2. If friction pads are contaminated, they
should not be cleaned but replaced.
3. The surface of the towball must be free of
grooves, rust or seizing marks.
4. Towballs coated with paint or similar, must
have this surface completely removed (use
100 or 120 grain emery paper). If this is not
done, increased towball wear will occur
and may cause damage to the AKS 3004
stabiliser components.
Fig 19 Remove head cap screw
232
5. In winter, you should carefully spray only the
visual indicator with de-icer.
AKS 3004 STABILISER
Should lubrication of the stabiliser parts
become necessary,then the following must
be observed.
a. Clean all parts thoroughly.
b. A
reas may only be covered with a thin film
of grease (see Fig 21).
c. U
se multipurpose grease DIN 51825
KTA 3K.
Friction pads
When should I change my friction pads?
The friction pad life expectancy is around
30,000 miles and can be prolonged by
regular cleaning with fine grade emery
paper. Simply remove them according to
the instructions (see Servicing and Cleaning)
clean them and replace.
MA INT E NA NCE
Lubrication
However, they will wear out and this can
be monitored via wear indicators on your
stabiliser. See pages 230/231 for wear
indicator information, and instructions on
changing them.
My friction pads look ‘glassy’ with bits
flaking off. Contamination has built up on
the pads. This could be due to grease on the
towball, spray from the road, diesel fumes
or failure to remove all of the coating on the
towball.
Figure 21
! WARNING: When lubricating,ensure
none gets into the friction pad or towball
holding area.
FAQS
Stabiliser
Can the red and/or green indicator
buttons be replaced if broken/missing?
This is usually caused by catching the
button with the hitch lock when fitting the
hitch lock. The green section can in some
circumstances be replaced. Please contact
AL-KO for further advice. The red part
cannot be replaced.
The stabiliser arms keep lifting up
when I travel. The most likely cause is the
handbrake handle catching on the stabiliser
lever when braking.
Gently tease the handle away from the
contact point - 5mm should be sufficient.
Whilst doing this, make sure you support the
base of the handbrake with a block of wood
to stop it coming off the ratchet plate.
You need to remove the friction pads
according to the instructions on pages
230/231, and rub them lightly with a fine
grade emery paper. AL-KO recommend
cleaning the pads in this way after every
journey to prevent build up and prolong
friction pad life.
When towing I can hear loud creaking or
groaning. There are two possible causes:
1 The incorrect towball could be fitted.
Check your towball is compatible with
your stabiliser, and if it isn’t replace it
immediately. Failure to do so could result in
your caravan becoming unhitched during
towing.
The necessary clearances are outlined on
page 226, and AL-KO recommends the
AL-KO extended neck towball which
complies to all the necessary specifications.
2 Contamination may have built up on the
friction pads. This could be due to grease
on the towball, spray from the road, diesel
fumes or failure to remove all of the coating
on the towball.
You need to remove the friction pads
according to the instructions on page
230/231 and rub them lightly with a fine
grade emery paper.
233
MA INT E NA N CE
AKS 3004 STABILISER
AL-KO recommend cleaning the pads in this
way after every journey to prevent build up and
prolong friction pad life.
The end has snapped off of my friction
pad. This usually happens when the pads
have not been fully disengaged before
dropping the stabiliser onto the towball. You
will need to replace the friction pad with a new
one. To avoid this in future always place, rather
than drop, the stabiliser onto the towball and
ensure the stabiliser lever has been lifted fully.
Can I tow my caravan without activating
the friction pads? Yes, but AL-KO do not
recommend it. It is the hitch handle that
attaches the stabiliser to the towball. If you
do not activate your friction pads then you will
have no damping benefits.
Towball
My towball has grease on it. Can I use
it with an AKS stabiliser? Under no
circumstances can a greased towball be used
with an AKS stabiliser. Ensure you remove all
grease before hitching up.
Use a cloth to remove the excess grease, and
use brake cleaner to remove any residue. We
do not recommend methylated spirit as this
can leave a greasy residue.
I have an AKS 3004 stabiliser. What is the
minimum clearance that i need between
the towball and towing vehicle? Minimum
clearance is 68mm. This measurement is taken
from the centre of the towball to the nearest
point of contact with the towing vehicle.
Insufficient clearance will prevent the stabiliser
from correct articulation and could damage
your car or even cause the stabiliser to
become detached from the towball.
Which towballs are compatible with
the AKS 3004 stabiliser? The necessary
clearances are outlined on page 226, and
AL-KO recommends the AL-KO extended
neck towball which complies to all the
necessary specifications.
The AL-KO extended neck towball is available
to purchase online at www.al-ko.co.uk.
234
I have a new AL-KO towball - do I need to
take the paint off? Yes. It is vital that all paint
is removed from the towball before use, as it
will contaminate the stabiliser friction pads.
To remove the paint, simply rub with emery
paper, ideally finishing with a coat of brake
cleaner fluid to remove any residue.
In the importance of safety, please familiarise
yourself with the operation of this overrun
device BEFORE using your caravan.
Safety Precautions
When parking your tow vehicle and caravan on
site, you must apply the caravan handbrake.
If the unit is parked but disconnected from
the tow vehicle, it is strongly recommended
that each wheel is chocked using AL-KO or
suitable wheel chocks.
Caution: Please note when parking the
caravan, the wheelbrake auto reverse
mechanism will allow the caravanto travel
backwards for approximately 25 cm (please
allow sufficient clearance when parking).
Operation
AL-KO overrun devices are a mechanical type,
using a hydraulic damper.
Caution: The breakaway cable operates
the handbrake (emergency brake), in the
event of the caravan becoming detached
from the towing vehicle during towing. For
this emergency brake to work correctly, it is
absolutely essential that the following points
are observed:
MA INT E NA NCE
Overrun Device
1. The breakaway cable MUST run through
the breakaway cable guide.
2. The breakaway cable MUST NOT be
wrapped around the jockey wheel, as this
disables the emergency brake (Fig 3).
3. The cable MUST run as straight as
possible and not be restricted.
4. Ensure the cable is long enough to allow
for cornering and will not become taut or
snag during use, as this could result in
the handbrake operating whilst towing.
Please refer to ‘Braked Trailers Use of
Breakaway Cables’ information sheet,
supplied with your caravan.
Breakaway Cable
- Attach the caravan to the tow vehicle as
described in AK160 coupling and AKS 3004
stabiliser sections
- Thread the breakaway cable through the
breakaway cable guide provided (Fig 2) and
connect it to attachment point provided
on towing bracket (Fig 1). Please refer to
‘Braked Trailers Use of Breakaway Cables’
for further details.
Figure 2 Breakaway Cables Guides.
Figure 1 Breakaway Cables.
Figure 3 DO NOT wrap breakaway cable
around jockey wheel.
235
MA INT E NA N CE
OVERRUN DEVICE
EURO-OVERRUN DEVICES FITTED WITH
AKS 3004 STABILISER
Fully retract Jockey Wheel inner tube so that it
locks against Jockey Wheel outer tube.
Slacken Jockey Wheel Clamp handle and raise
complete assembly through cutout in body
to its highest position (ensure it doesn’t come
into contact with the brake rod assembly), fully
tighten Jockey Wheel Clamp handle to ensure
the Jockey Wheel is firmly held in position.
Euro Handbrake
Ensure the handbrake is fully applied to ensure
that the wheel brakes will be automatically
re-applied should the vehicle start to roll
backwards.
Caution: If the handbrake is not fully applied
as detailed above, there is a danger that the
caravan could roll backwards.
To release
SERVICING
Every 10,000 - 15,000 km or every 12
months: Lubricate/grease all sliding and
moving parts of the overrun device as show
in Fig 5.
Recommended lubricant:- General purpose
grease to DIN 51825 KTA 3KA.
CHASSIS
Servicing and care of hot dip galvanized
parts:-The formation of white rust is only a
surface coating and has no adverse effect on
the anti-corrosion properties of galvanising.
To minimise the potential for the formation of
white rust the following precautions should be
taken:
- Ensure there is adequate air circulation when
storing hot dip-galvanized parts.
- After winter journeys it is recommended that
surfaces are washed with clean water.
Press the handbrake down until it is parallel
with the fairing cover to ensure that the brake
is correctly disengaged.
Figure 5 Lubricate/grease the parts indicated.
Figure 4 Handbrake lever operation
236
OVERRUN DEVICE
COMPLEMENTARY PRODUCTS
Spare parts are safety critical parts! For this
reason when fitting spare parts in our products
we recommend the use of original AL-KO
parts or those parts that we have explicitly
approved. The reliability, safety and suitability
of parts designed especially for our products,
has been determined using a special test
procedure. In spite of constantly monitoring
the market we are unable to assess or vouch
for other products.
AL-KO Security Device
If repair work or servicing is required, AL-KO
have a large network of AL-KO service stations
throughout Europe. To establish the correct
spare parts required you should always
quote the model and type of overrun device
in question along with the ETI No. which is
stamped into the overrun device housing. The
ETI number for the Euro Overrun can be found
on the handbrake lever.
EURO-OVERRUN DEVICES FITTED WITH
AK160 COUPLING HEAD
Connect caravan electric plug controlling lights
and indicators etc. into towing vehicle socket.
Wind the jockey wheel up fully and clamp
securely in position, ensuring that it does
not foul the brake rod or breakaway cable.
Remove wheel chocks if fitted and stow safely.
Caution: Failure to comply with this could
result in the brakes overheating.
Euro Handbrake
AL-KO Security Devices provide a substantial
deterrent against the theft of the caravan or
trailer. They lock over the coupling handle,
preventing unauthorised uncoupling.
MA INT E NA NCE
SPARE PARTS
Fitting the supplied Safety Ball into the
coupling head when the Security Device is
applied, prevents the caravan or trailer from
being coupled to another vehicle.
The Security Device is manufactured from high
density steel and is TUV approved.
Visit www.al-ko.co.uk for more information.
Friction pads
Made from low-wear material, four specially
engineered friction pads surround the towball
and continue to ensure optimum friction
damping.
Extended neck towball
Designed especially for use with the AL-KO
AKS stabilisers the Extended Neck Towball has
an extended machined neck to allow correct
stabiliser articulation and clearances.
Hitch cover
Designed to fit the AKS 3004 Stabilisers, the
hitch cover will help protect your stabiliser from
the elements.
The water/fade resistant padded foam fabric
has a velcro fastening and eyelet for padlock
security (padlock not included). Visit www.
al-ko.co.uk for more information.
Ensure the handbrake is fully applied to ensure
that the wheel brakes will be automatically
re-applied should the vehicle start to roll
backwards.
Caution: If the handbrake is not fully applied
as detailed above, there is a danger that the
caravan could roll backwards.
To release
Press the handbrake down until it is parallel
with the fairing cover to ensure that the brake
is correctly disengaged.
237
MA INT E NA N CE
SPARE PARTS
Trouble shooting & fault finding
Table 1 Axles
Fault
Cause
Remedy
Poor Braking
Linings worn or damaged.
Replace Brake Linings.
Brake Linings not bedded in.
Will pass after braking a few times.
Brake set up incorrect.
Reset Brakes as page 222-224 & ensure
system is lubricated.
Difficulty in
Reversing
Braking system set too tightly.
Reset Brakes as page 222-224.
Auto-Reverse lever too stiff.
Lubricate and free off Reverse Lever.
Brakes
Overheating
Incorrect setting.
Reset Brakes as page 222-224.
Braking system not fully
released.
Check Handbrake has been released &
the system is running freely.
Overrun lever stuck.
Lubricate and free off Reverse Lever.
Damage or Corrosion to
braking system
Check system as page 222-224 and
repair or renew parts as necessary.
Handbrake
Force Low
Incorrect setting of the brakes.
Reset brakes as page 222-224 and
lubricate as necessary.
Uncomfortable
ride or Uneven
Braking
Loose braking adjustment.
Reset brakes as page 222-224.
Damper defective.
Check and replace damper if necessary.
Axle shock absorbers
defective.
Replace shock absorber.
Linings not bedded in.
Will pass after braking a few times.
238
CHASSIS T ROUBLE SHOOTING
Fault
Cause
Remedy
Coupling does
not engage onto
ball
Ball diameter too large.
Change ball to correct size.
Ball could be damaged or
deformed.
Fit new ball.
Coupling head dirty or
defective.
Difficulty in
Uncoupling
Clean & Lubricate coupling and replace if
necessary.
Ball damaged or deformed.
Fit new ball.
Coupling damaged or
deformed.
Replace if necessary.
Coupling head under pressure
from damper.
Too much play in Coupling damaged or
the coupling
deformed
MA INT E NA NCE
Table 2 Coupling Heads
Pull forward a few inches to relieve
pressure
Replace if necessary.
Fit new ball.
Ball too small
Table 3 Overrun Devices
Fault
Cause
Remedy
Poor Braking
Overrun shaft tight.
Lubricate overrun shaft and replace any
damaged parts.
Overrun shaft corroded.
Body housing damaged.
Brakes
Overheating
During Towing
Handbrake not fully released.
Release handbrake.
Braking system incorrectly set.
Reset brakes as page 222-224.
Incorrect attachment of
breakaway cable.
Ensure correct attachment as listed on page
29 or refer to Braked Trailers
Handbrake
Force Low
Defective gas strut.
Replace gas strut.
Incorrect setting of spring
cylinder.
Reset spring cylinder as page 222-224.
Brakes
Apply During
Deceleration or
Downhill Travel.
Overrun damper is defective.
Replace the overrun damper.
Use of Breakaway Cables sheet.
239
MA INT E NA N CE
CHASSIS TROUBLE SHOOTING
Accessories
Corner Steadies
Corner Steadies are as stated, for the purpose
of steadying the caravan corners. They are
NOT JACKS AND SHOULD NEVER BE
USED AS SUCH. The screw and pivot pins
should be lubricated periodically to ensure
their satisfactory operation. (See also Jack
Operation).
Shock Absorbers
All AL-KO chassis have pre-punched holes to
accommodate Shock Absorbers, in front of
the axle. On the Euro-Axle System, axle swing
arms have a removable rectangular plastic
cap exposing a slot to accommodate retro-fit
brackets for the Octagon Shock Absorbers.
Delta Axles have Shock Absorbers fitted as
standard which MUST NOT BE REMOVED.
Side Lift Jack
2 Tonne Jack
If working under the caravan in an elevated
position, axle stands must be used for safety.
Wheel chocks for the opposite wheel(s) are
also advisable.
Jockey Wheel
Lubricate screw thread and wheel
spindle periodically.
Road Wheels
The condition of wheels and tyres should be
checked regularly, particularly for distortion
of flanges and the wheel dish. Wheels that
are damaged or distorted, or have wheel bolt
seatings cracked or deformed must not be
repaired or used in service - these must be
replaced.
! WARNING: The torque settings should
be re-checked regularly.
Jacks
The Corner Steadies Should never be used to
jack up the caravan. When jacking becomes
necessary use the AL-KO Side Lift Jack or
2-Tonne Jack system.
Note: It is essential that the car and caravan
are hitched together before commencing
jacking. All AL-KO chassis from 1992
onwards have 2 holes punched in the
chassis members, each side (rear of the
axle); to accept the brackets for the Jack(s).
Corner Steadies may be used for stability
ONLY, when the caravan is in the jacked
position. The caravan should never be lifted
by jacking up under the chassis member.
240
Spare Wheel Carriers
The telescopic frame tubes should be
lubricated periodically.
USEFUL INFORMATION
Spares and after sales Supercare ........................................................................................... 242
Repair facilities ........................................................................................................................ 242
Caravan Clubs ........................................................................................................................ 243
Motoring Associations ............................................................................................................ 243
Trade Association ................................................................................................................... 243
Change of ownership ............................................................................................................. 244
Index ...................................................................................................................................... 248
USE F UL INF ORMAT ION
Owners Club .......................................................................................................................... 242
241
US E FUL INF ORMATIO N
USEFUL INFORMATION
Owners club
The Owners Club is a completely independent
organisation run for the benefit of the caravan
owners. They have numerous rallies during the
year in various parts of the country. Apart from
the friendliness and companionship the Club
generates it is also actively engaged in charity
work for those less fortunate than ourselves.
The address of the Secretary of the Owners
Club can be obtained from the Swift Group
website.
Spares and after sales
A catalogue of spare parts are available
through our Swift Group Dealer Network, from
door catches through to spare wheels. Please
note, all parts enquiries must be directed
through your dealer, as the Swift Group does
not operate a direct retail service.
We endeavour to supply parts for vehicles up
to 8 years old. If the original part is no longer
available your dealer should be able to source
a suitable alternative.
Note: Please remember to quote chassis
number when ordering any items from your
dealer.
Repair facilities
Should you be unfortunate to encounter
damage to your vehicle, we have a number
of approved workshops and dealerships with
workshop facilities to undertake such repairs.
Details of which can be found via our website:
www.swiftgroup.co.uk/find-a-dealer
242
CLUBS AND TRADE BODIES
Caravan Clubs
The Caravan Club
East Grinstead House,
East Grinstead
West Sussex, RH19 IUA
Tel: 01342 326944
www.caravanclub.co.uk
The Camping and Caravanning Club
Greenfields House,
Westwood Way,
Coventry,
West Midlands.
Tel: 024 7647 5448
www.campingandcaravanningclub.co.uk
Green Flag National Breakdown
Tel: 0845 246 1557
www.greenflag.com
RBS Insurance
Churchill Cover
West Moreland Road
Bromley, Kent
BR1 1DP
0800 051 3030
USE F UL INF ORMAT ION
The enjoyment of caravanning can be greatly
enhanced by membership of one or more of
the various caravanning, motoring and holiday
clubs. Here are some useful addresses:
Trade Association
NCC
Catherine House,
Victoria Road,
Aldershot,
Hampshire, GU11 1SS
Tel: 01252 318251
www.thencc.org.uk
e-mail: [email protected]
Motoring Associations
Automobile Association (AA)
Fanum House,
Basingstoke,
Hants. RG1 2EA
Tel: 08705 448866
www.theaa.co.uk
e-mail: [email protected]
RAC Motoring Services
8 Surrey St.
Norwich
Norfolk
NR1 3NG
Tel: 01922 437 000
www.rac.co.uk
© 2015 SWIFT GROUP LTD
243
US E FUL INF ORMATIO N
Change of ownership
Notification of change of ownership
As the new second hand owner, please notify
the Swift Group of the change of ownership by
completing this page, detaching it and sending
it to:
Customer Services Department
Swift Group Limited,
Dunswell Road,
Cottingham,
East Yorkshire,
HU16 4JX.
Note: Warranties are only transferable
providing the terms and conditions of the
warranty have been met by the previous
owner(s). Please see warranty information
at the beginning of this handbook for full
details. The 'Extended Body shell warranty'
is a non-transferable warranty.
244
CHANGE OF OWNERSHIP
Model:
Chassis No:
New
owner:
Name:
Address:
USE F UL INF ORMAT ION
Details of
caravan:
Email:
Telephone:
Mobile:
Date of purchase:
Previous
owner:
Name:
Address:
Email:
Telephone:
Mobile:
Date of purchase:
245
246
US E FUL INF ORMATIO N
NOTES
USE F UL INF ORMAT ION
247
IND E X
INDEX
Symbols
C
12V reading lamp................................... 202
Caravan clubs........................................ 243
13 pin connection..................................... 72
Caravan exterior..................................... 208
13 pin socket............................................ 27
Caravan handling...................................... 32
230V mains electrical equipment.............. 73
Caravan interior...................................... 210
A
Caravan motor movers............................. 18
Acrylic windows...................................... 208
Caravan movers..................................... 208
AKS 3004................................................. 35
Caravan terms.......................................... 14
AKS 3004 operating instructions............ 228
Caravan towing code................................ 14
Alarm siren............................................... 53
Carbon monoxide..................................... 41
Alarm system............................................ 51
Care of laminates.................................... 200
Alarm tilt sensor........................................ 52
Care of laminate tops, tables,
furniture and doors................................. 200
Alde colour touch operating instruction... 130
Alde heating........................................... 122
AL-KO ATC trailer control system........... 217
AL-KO braking system adjustment......... 222
AL-KO chassis....................................... 215
AL-KO operating instructions.................... 50
AL-KO Secure immobiliser........................ 49
AL-KO side lift jack................................... 50
ALKO Spare wheel and carrier tips........... 32
Appliance consumption figures................. 75
Arrival on site............................................ 34
Assistance.................................................. 8
Awning light operation.............................. 52
Awnings................................................. 203
B
Barbeque point....................................... 191
Bathroom / shower................................. 211
Battery box............................................... 93
Battery installation.................................... 94
Bedding.................................................. 194
Blinds..................................................... 195
Breakaway cables.................................... 29
Bulb replacement and type..................... 212
248
Change of ownership......................... 8, 245
Changing a wheel..................................... 33
Chassis trouble shooting........................ 239
Cleaning................................................. 208
CO alarm.................................................. 41
Colour reference..................................... 203
Condensation......................................... 209
Cooking guidelines................................. 175
Cycle racks............................................. 204
D
Dometic refrigerator................................ 149
Doors..................................................... 201
Doorscreen............................................. 196
Drop down TV mechanism..................... 203
E
Electrical overseas connection.................. 71
Electrical system....................................... 71
Escape paths........................................... 40
Exterior 230v socket................................. 97
Exterior door..................................... 35, 196
Exterior door key.................................... 196
External shower point............................. 192
Loading.................................................. 220
Fire alarm test........................................... 39
M
Fire and fire alarm..................................... 38
Measurement of nose weight.................... 16
Fire extinguisher....................................... 40
Microwave oven..................................... 180
Front locker and sunroof......................... 203
Mirrors...................................................... 31
Furniture................................................. 212
Modifications.......................................... 208
Furniture care......................................... 201
Motoring associations............................. 243
G
Motorway driving...................................... 32
Galvanised parts..................................... 215
Moving off................................................ 31
Galvanised steel chassis........................... 22
N
Gas.......................................................... 66
NCC....................................................... 243
Gas bottles............................................... 66
O
Gas faults................................................. 70
Gas hoses................................................ 66
Gas regulator............................................ 66
Gas safety advice..................................... 68
Gas schematic......................................... 65
Generator................................................. 96
Glossary & checklist................................. 17
Green Flag National Breakdown............. 243
Grill operation......................................... 174
H
Habitation relay......................................... 96
Heki care instructions............................. 198
Heki midi rooflight................................... 199
Heki mini rooflight................................... 198
Hitching-Up.............................................. 24
Hitch operating instructions AKS 3004... 226
J
Jacking points.......................................... 33
L
LED road lighting...................................... 28
Levelling the caravan................................ 34
Lift-up bunks.......................................... 194
IN D E X
F
Omni-vent.............................................. 205
oven operation....................................... 174
Owners club........................................... 242
P
PIR internal movement sensor.................. 52
Plumbing connections.............................. 58
Power control system............................... 78
Power control system faults...................... 89
Preparing for the road............................... 20
Pre-tow check list............................... 25, 26
R
RAC motoring services........................... 243
RBS Insurance....................................... 243
Repair facilities........................................ 242
Reversing................................................. 31
Roller blind advice.................................. 197
Roof....................................................... 203
Roof lights.............................................. 197
S
Sanitising water tanks and water system.. 61
Security.................................................... 49
Selecting a pitch....................................... 34
249
US E FUL INF ORMATIO N
INDEX
Service inspection.................................... 10
Truma CP Plus digital timer control......... 101
Shakesepeare TV omni-directional
antenna.................................................. 193
Truma digital timer control...................... 101
Shower heads........................................ 202
Snaking.................................................... 22
Solar panel............................................... 95
Spares and after sales customer care..... 242
Speed limits.............................................. 31
Stabiliser friction pads............................... 22
Stability..................................................... 22
Status 550 directional TV and FM radio
antenna.................................................. 192
Status directional TV and FM radio
antenna.................................................. 193
Step on hitch cover................................ 204
Stopping on a hill...................................... 34
Types of gas............................................. 68
Types of tyres fitted.................................. 23
Typical gas schematic drawing................. 65
Tyre law.................................................... 24
Tyre maintenance..................................... 23
U
Unhitching................................................ 35
Useful items........................................ 18, 19
V
Ventilation................................................. 48
W
Suitable towing vehicles............................ 22
Warranty..................................................... 6
Supplier contacts....................................... 9
Water faults........................................ 63, 64
Swift Talk.................................................... 2
Water intake housing................................ 60
T
Water pump pressure switch adjustment.. 60
Tables.................................................... 202
Table storage......................................... 202
Thetford Aspire 2 cooker........................ 176
Thetford C260 cassette toilet.................. 183
Thetford Caprice cooker......................... 173
Thetford mini grill.................................... 170
Thetford refrigerator................................ 140
Towball..................................................... 22
Tow car electrics................................ 27, 28
Towing vehicle’s rear suspension............. 21
Towing vehicle terms................................ 16
Tracker..................................................... 50
Trade association................................... 243
Truma combi boiler................................. 116
Truma combination boiler....................... 100
Truma CP 25 digital timer control........... 101
250
TV inlet in battery box............................. 192
Water system........................................... 56
Wheel bolt tightening................................ 33
Windows................................................ 197
Winterisation........................................... 212
Wiring of connecting cable and
caravan mains inlet................................... 74
USE F UL INF ORMAT ION
251
US E FUL INF ORMATIO N
USEFUL INFORMATION
All Swift Group models have been certified by
the National Caravan Council for compliance
with stringent European Standards, British
Legislation and industry set Codes of Practice
specifically relating to health and safety issues.
The approval process covers the testing and
inspection of critical areas of the product from
fire safety, weights and dimensions, to gas,
electrics and ventilation. Every caravan carries
the “NCC Approved Caravan” badge.
The NCC also conduct unannounced
inspections at the Swift factory to ensure
continued compliance. NCC Approval gives
you peace of mind that your caravan is legal
and safe.
All Swift Group touring caravans are European
Whole Vehicle Type Approved.
This is your assurance that these caravans
meet all European regulations, and have
been constructed and conform to approved
standards of safety and manufacturing.
IMPORTANT CUSTOMER NOTICE
TOURING CARAVAN MODEL YEAR
The model year runs from 1st September to
31st August.
For example, the earliest a 2016 model
would be registered under the Caravan
Registration Identification Scheme (CRiS) is
1st September 2015.
252
CRiS is the Central Registration & Identification
Scheme that issues touring caravan
registration documents, equivalent to that of
the V5 registration document issues by the
DVLA for cars. CRiS was established in 1992
by The National Caravan Council and provides
a method of registering the ‘keeper’ details of
every tourer manufactured by NCC member
companies to help prevent and detect caravan
related crime.
Why register with CRiS?
• Safety • Security • Warranty
Did you know..?
You should not take a tourer abroad without
a registration document. If you go abroad
your CRiS registration certificate provides the
necessary proof, required by the police and
other authorities, that you are its registered
keeper.
If you need to make a claim on your insurance,
CRiS can help speed up claims by providing
details of your tourer and its purchase date to
relevant parties.
CRiS can help your tourer’s manufacturer
contact you in the event that there is any kind
of product recall or fault that could affect the
safety of your caravan.
CRiS Registration and VIN Chip
Caravan Registration
Your caravan has been security marked and
recorded under the Caravan Registration and
Identification Scheme that is recognised by the
Caravan Industry.
Shortly after purchasing this caravan you
should receive your Touring Caravan
Registration Document. It will be sent by post
to you home address.
USEFUL INFORMATION
To protect yourself and your touring caravan,
never leave the Registration Document in the
caravan. For security reasons keep it in a safe
place.
If you sell the caravan please follow the
instructions on the Touring Caravan
Registration Document.
For help, support and advice Contact CRiS:
NCC CRiS Ltd
PO Box 445
Aldershot
GU11 9SF
Tel 0203 282 1000
www.cris.co.uk
Opening Hours: Monday - Friday 8am to 8pm
Saturday 9am to 5pm
Sunday 10am to 5pm
USE F UL INF ORMAT ION
Your Touring Caravan Registration Document
will include a 17 character VIN (Vehicle
Identification Number), shown in the top
right hand corner. This 17 character will be
permanently marked onto the caravan chassis.
If you do not receive a Touring Caravan
Registration Document, lose it, or any of
the details recorded are incorrect, please
contact: CRiS, Avonbridge House, Bath Road,
Chippenham, Wiltshire, SN15 2BB or Tel 0203
282 1000.
VIN Chip Caravan Identification
The caravan’s unique 17 character VIN will
be incorporated into VIN Chip tamper evident
labels; the master VIN Chip label is situated
on the front near side window to aid police
checking, another in the gas locker and a
maximum of 10 placed on the inside of the
windows (with the exception of opaque
windows).
Three electronic RFID chips containing
the individual identity of your caravan are
concealed within the caravan and can only be
read by using a specially programmed RFID
scanner.
Your local police can obtain the use of a CRiS
VIN Chip scanner by contacting CRiS on Tel
0203 282 1000.
253
US E FUL INF ORMATIO N
USEFUL INFORMATION
254
SWIFT GROUP
Dunswell Road
Cottingham
East Yorkshire HU16 4JX
Tel 01482 875740
Fax 01482 840082
email [email protected]
For more information visit
www.swiftgroup.co.uk
Issued July 2015
FIND OUT MORE SWIFTGROUP.CO.UK
BROCHURE
DOWNLOADS
FIND A
DEALER
FACEBOOK AND
SWIFT-TALK.CO.UK
PRODUCT VIDEOS
SWIFTTV.CO.UK
1416976
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement